Cpt’ The Future Is Working Together.e 1 Introduction WELL TESTING ‘A well test is the measurement, under controlled conditions, of all factors relating to the produc- tion of oil, gas, and water from a well. Acquired well test data is used to determine reservoir capa- bilities. Important decisions, such as production methods, well production improvement, and devel- ‘opmental drilling are made from this information, Regulatory bodies may use the test results to establish withdrawal allocations and tax bases. Well testers have a responsibility to provide com- plete, accurate data of the reservoir performance. Since the purpose of well testing is to gather information, well test equipment provides the ‘means to obtain essential data such as: 1. Pressures 2. Temperatures 3. Production Volumes @ 4, Gas, Oil and Water Rates 5. Samples of Produced Fluids Surface well test equipment provides well control, data measurement, well effluent processing, disposal and analysis. The exact combination of the components necessary to achieve these goals is dependent upon well conditions and test requirements. ‘The following page is a simplified schematic of surface equipment standard elements. Well production begins a controlled surface flow at the surface tree and concludes with disposal at the burners. Descriptions of the main individual pieces of equipment and their specific functions will follow in Section 2, Surface Well Testing Page 1-1abit WOuvuaas u¥ STNHWS ‘aasn waauocay sunivaaeaL ONY SuNSS 38a OWSHTEIM nam vaiens waisat LMOLRA va omva1ant aanivssaal nose alan 30LMO. shhanys 34049 angarn ana WoInaHo Anas sovuns 0193130 SNS AIRS Surface Equipment Package Page 1-7 Surface Well TestingSURFACE WELL TESTING COURSE e@ A variety of topics will be presented throughout the Surface Well Testing course. The course will cover the process by which a welt is flowed, controlled and monitored to gain insight to the resetvoit's capabilities. The class will cover the surface equipment used in the well testing process as well as the theoretical and practical principles on which the process works. The course seeks to combine learning with practical hands-on training. ‘The course’s manual is designed to be a study guide for learning many of the aspects of surface well testing. The Surface Well Testing manual consists of: Section Subject Page 1 Inuoduction 2 Surface Equipment 3 Surface Test Trees 21 Surface Safety Valves 2-13 Piping & Elastomers 2-21 ‘Choke Manifold 2-33 e Heaters 2-40 Separators 2-55 Disposal Equipment 2-86 3 Production Problems 4 Hydrocarbons 5 Data Recordings & Measurements Gas Flow Measurement Test Procedures Test Types Glossary Conversion Factors Dep ear. Rate Calculation Tables Surface Well Testing Page 1-3 aEUNITEST Surface Test Tree ‘The function of the UNITEST surface test tree is to control surface pressures during formation testing. The UNITEST is a component-style tree, allowing maximum versatility in arrangements of control assemblies. Another advantage of the design is to permit field personnel and customers to order only those components they need. Fluid can be pumped through UNITEST equipment for sub-surface pressure control. ‘Swabbing operations can also be done through this equipment. ‘Components include: Lift Nipple Bar Drop Sub Flow Tee Swivel Master Valve Access Valve Remote Controlled Safety Valve All UNITEST surface control subassemblies have a 4 3/8"-6 Stub Acme thread (male or fe- male) so interchangeability of components pre- sents no problem, ‘The flow tee and master valve are separate components; thus, a master valve can be run with or without a swivel, and master valves ccan be stacked in tandem. AU master valves are basically LO TORC plug valves. A remote controlled safety valve can be installed in place of or in tandem with the flow tee, and can provide a way to close in a well atthe surface from a remote location, UNITEST components can be provided for the standard service (S) applications (15,000 psi working pressure) and for sour service (SG) (10,000 psi WP). Litt Bar Drop Flow Nipple Device UNITEST Components Suryace Well Testing Page 2-1}—_ UFT NIPPLE BAR DROP SUB FLOW TEE MASTER VALVE, REMOTE CONTROL ‘SAFETY VALVE, FLOW LINE HYDRAULIC CONTROL UNE ‘20 SWIVEL MASTER VALVE ACCESS VALVE NIPPLE }-—_—— DILL PIPE Control Head and Component Descriptions cee eee ee ee lene nena ieininanan nines atatssiasasassinininintestastntntstt= ttt tsa tats] ‘The Lift Nipple, used instead of a pup joint, provides a latching point for tubing or drill pipe elevators. ‘The Bar Drop Device allows a bar to be dropped down the test string to operate a revers- ing valve without breaking any surface connec- tions. ‘The Flow Tee contains a side port that allows flow to exit from the surface control equipment. At the top it contains a plus which can be replaced with a check valve or can be completely removed if the tee is located below the bar drop device. The Double Ported Flow Tee is an optional flow tee with two 1.62 in. ID flow outlets. One of the outlets can be used for direct connection of a kill line. The Remote Controlled Safety Valve is used when the surface equipment is too high above the rig floar for the safe manual operation or when it is desireable to control a well from a remote location when testing. The valve is normally closed but can be opened with the application of fluid or gas pressure and will remain open as long as external pressure is maintained. Where high flow is expected the optional Double Ported Remote Controlled Safety Valve with a 1.62 in. ID flow is avail- able. ‘The Master Valve provides a means for surface closures and pressure control. The LO TORC plug valve design allows pressure control in harsh conditions. The master valve is de- signed to operate with string weight hanging through the valve. One quarter tum is all that is required to operate the valve. The Access Valve is used to introduce hydrate inhibitors into the flow stream to prevent freezing. Surface Well Testing Page 2-2Bar Drop Device Uft Nipple 3-7/8 in. 6 Stub Acme 3-7/8 in, 6 Stub Acme 3. Master Valve: -7/8 In. 6 Stub Acme ST Pressure Balanced Swivel 3-7/8 in. 6 Stub Acme oT Modular Compact Test Tree Surface Equipment Assembly Page 2-3 Surface Well TestingStiff Joint A stiff joint is a heavy walled joint of tubing that is placed in the upper section of the test string. This joint replaces thin wall tubing sections which run through the rotary table and below the surface test tree. These joints provide extra support, safety and stability to the control head if the elevators are removed. SPECIFICATIONS -Meets requirements of NACE MR-01-75. NOTE: Other sizes and configurations are available w meet most applications. Stiff Joint Surface Test Tree ‘The basic designed Surface Test Tree incor- porates four valves - waster, swab, kill, and. flowline (hydraulic actuator). ‘The assembly also has a swivel to-allow pipe rotation for manipulat- ing downhole tools without turning the test head. Er Stiff Joint Specifications A lifting sub is supplied with the tree to allow rig elevators to raise and lower the tee in the derrick. Some designs may incorporate a hydraulically actuated kill valve, lower master valve, and/or chemical injection sub. Two distinct styles of test trees exist: (1) component aud (2) solid block. Surface WellTesting Page 2-4UFT SUB SOLID BLOCK CONTROL HEAD CHECK VALVE ‘SURFACE CHEMICAL INJECTION VALVE FROM KILL LINE CONNECTION Surface Test Tree ats EMERGENCY SHUT DOWN ACTUATED WING VALVE HYORAULIC ACTUATOR ‘VALVE FLOWLINE D FLEXIBLE TEST LINE Lower MASTER VALVE STIFF JOINT AC TO STIFF JOINT ya hae CONNECTION Surface Well Testing Page 2-5SPECIFICATIONS (683.0020 683,00300 683.0500 Cameron Type FC ‘Cameron Type FC ‘Cameron Type FC 29/16 in 18K 31/16 in 10K 31/16 in 15K Service HS’ Hs! Bs" Size 2-9/16 in 3-1/16 in 3-1/16 in ‘Working 115,000 psi. 10,000 psi ‘15,000 psi Pressure End 5.75 in - 4 Stub Acme Box | 5.75 in - 4 Stub Acme Box | 5.75 in - 4 Stub Acme Box Connections Flanges +2-9/16 API 6 Bx 15K 3-1/16 API 6 Bx 15K 3-1/16 API 6 Bx 15K Studs A320 GRL7 A320 GRL7 4320 GR L7 NACE Class II NACE Class If NACE Class II el I Wing Tee WLead-filed target W/Lead-filled target W/Lead-filled target Cross Overs | 2-9/16 APL6 Bx x Weco | 3-1/16 APL6BxxWeco | 3-1/16 API6 Bx x Weco Fig 2202 Union Fig 1502 Union Fig 2202 Union One wing ‘One wing half, One wing half. half, one thread half ‘one thread half ‘one thread half e@ whbull plugs woul plugs whoull plugs Lint Eye 3 in Dia Hole x 1.5 thick x | 3 in Dia Hole x 1.5 thick x | 3 in Dia Hole x 1.5 thick x pin thread pin thread pin thread Lift Sub 61771021 617.7101 617.7101 Operating. -20°F Ambient temperature | -20°F Ambient temperature | -20°F Ambient temperature ‘Temperatures | 250°F Maximum fluid 250°F Maximum fluid 250°F Maximum fluid temperature temperature. temperature “Meets requirements of NACE MR.01-75. NOTE: Other sizes, configurations, and pressure ratings are available to meet most applications. Surface Test Tree Specifications Test tree flowheads are installed on the DST _They also provide an exit through a flow string to give a means of entry into the DST wing valve for the well stream fluids. Since tubing by: they are a complicated piece of equipment they should only be operated and maintained by LKill, circulating, or stimulation fluids ‘competent personnel. 2.Wireline or Coil Tubing ‘To operate the valves with the tree installed on e a floater, takes considerable skill and dexterity, ‘Surface Well Testing Page 2-6Eee A Check Vaive .:istaller! or the side cf the Surface Test ites) Te vaive s designed to prevent we i c# vet from flowing back Ihrough the ke, Wie °. 708 ke BUMPS. Use of the Check Valve allows the kill valve on the Surface Test Tree to be left ‘open and enables the kill pump to be left ‘on-iine at all times. This action enhances emergency kill operation response since Bersonne| are not required to ascend the ina riding belt to manipulate valves Prior to commencing operations. The Check Valve is designed with a lock- out pin to be used during pressure tes ‘operations. When the pin is screwed in, wil keep the check vatve flapper off seat, Gliowing the test liquid to flow back through the Check Valve. This allows pressure to be bled off the the kill pump ‘manifold rather than the choke manifold immediately before testing is to begin. SPECIFICATIONS Part Number 683.20500 683,20501 683,20502 Working Pressure | 10,000 psi 15,000 psi 15,000 psi Service HS" HS" HS Size 3-1/16 in 2.9/16 in 3-116 in End Connections | API 6 Bx Flange | API 6 Bx Flange | API 6 Bx Flange “Meets requirements of NACE MR-01-75. | NOTE: Other sizes und configurations are available ro meet most applications. ‘Check Valve and Specifications Surface Well Testing Page 2-7SPECIFICATIONS 0533 5.00100 oosa, BS op 1025 in 3a 10000 psi 444.000 80 pat 540000 80 psi 421300 5.000 pa | Max WP 477.000 th5.000 psi 358,700 1/10.000 ps 415,000 Ws10.000 pa 352.00 5,000 psi 352.000 15.000 psi ‘Connections a3 6 5738-4 4375 9-6 ‘Sub Acne Sub Acne ‘Sub Acme Pin x Box Pin Bor Pin X Box * Meets requirements of NACE MR-OI-75 NOTE: Otter sizes and configurations are avaiable 1 mest mos applications. Surface Test Tree Swivel and Specifications Surface Well Testing Page 2-8 He eee eee a en ee TERED EEE UBER GEER REESE Eee EEE Ena{Ihe lower master valve 1s an optional item which can be run below the swivel. This valve provides added security because it can be closed manually or by emote control should a leak develop in the swivel assembly or STT assembly. The lower master valve can also be used when pressure testing the above rotary table installation; this prevents test fluid and pressure from entering the test string. SPECIFICATIONS Part Number 4073720 | _683,00600 640.73449 683.0601 Valve Type ‘Manual Hydraulic Pneumatic Hydraulic Service Hs” HS” HS HS” D 2.68 in 3.0625 in Bin 3in Working 10,000 psi 10,000 psi 15.000 psi 15,000 psi Pressure Tensile 358,000 Ib 400,000 tb 400,000 Ib 400,000 Ib Strength Wire Cutter No Yes No Yes Connections | 4.375in-6S.A. | 5.75 in-4 S.A. 5.75 in -4 5.75 in -4 S.A. Pin x Box Pin x Box Box x Pin Box x Pin “Meets requirements of NACE MR-D1-75. NOTE: Other sizes and configurations are available to meet most applications. Lower Master Valve and Specifications Surface Well Testing Page 2.9Tn some well tests, chemical injection is required in the q@ surface tet tre, The chemical injection aub is designed to allow chemicals to be injected into the vertical upper ‘test string. When the well is flowing, the chemicals mix with the well effluent and flow through the surface equipment. When the well is shut-in, the chemicals fall own the test string. SPECIFICATIONS 358,000 Ib Connections | 4.375 in-6S.A. | 5.75in-4 S.A. ‘Pin X Box Pin X Box * Meets requirements of NACE MR-01-75, NOTE: Other sizes and configurations are available to meet most applications. ‘Surface Chemical Injection Sub and Specifications Surface Well Testing Page 2-10 ————— — —— rr — — — — —————Generai Rules 1, Always wear a safety hamess (in good condition). 2. Do not ascend to the tee on the tugger by using the DST tubing as an aid to ascent. Always ascend on the tugger away from the tree, then once above the tree swing over and come down on the tree, otherwise there is a danger of being caught under the tree when the rig heaves. 3. When hoisting subassemblies such as wireline BOP’s etc. to the top connection ensure that it is properly slung with a certi- fied lifting strap. Stendaré Operating Practices 1, Ensure that the test tree is rated in excess of the maximum anticipated shut-in wellhead pressure, 2. The tree is suitable for sour service if the well is of sour nature. 3. Visually inspect the main body for signs of structural damage likely to affect integrity of assembly. Check threads and sealing sur- faces for damage. Check lead targets (if installed) for signs of erosion. 4, Oneach of the manual valves ensure that the number of turns to open/close the valve are noted (18 turns to fully open Cameron/Foley type valves, 13 turns for McEvoy type valves). 5. Function the hydraulic actuator mechanism ensuring that it travels freely the full travel without internal pressure. With the valve in the closed position measure the protrusion of the stem and note. Check the operation of the ESD panel supplying the hydraulic fluid to the actuator. Pressure Testing Prior to the Surface Test Tree being taken to the drill floor and rigged up onto the test string the assembly will be pressure tested to ensure the integrity of the Tree body, valves and flanged connections. Please refer to schematic on page 2-5. In initial tests pressure applied via D with needle valves in test caps in postions A, B and C. The Barton surface pressure recorder should be used to record these tests. The test pressure and test period are usually dictated by our clients requirements. 1. Prior to pressure testing: a. Erect warming barriers around the test area, b. Announce over P.A. system that pressure testing is about to commence. c. Ensure all non-essential personnel are clear of test area. 2. Open valves 1 through 4 and A through D. (3000 psi control line pressure required to open Actuator Valve (4)). 3, Fill assembly with water. 4, Close needle valves A,B and C and com- mence pumping to test pressure. Visually inspect all connections for sign of leaks. Note: Do not attempt any remedial action while there is pressure applied. 5. Once at test pressure isolate pump and monitor for test period. (Test one - full internal). 6. Close valves 2,3, and 4 (control line pressure 2210). 7. Bleed pressure slowly via needle valves A,B, and C to zero. 8. Monitor for test period. (Test two against Kill, swab and flowline valves internally). 9. Close valve 1, open valve 2 (kill ine) slowly bleeding pressure above master valve, monitor for test period. (Test three - master valve from below). 10. Bleed pressure via pump vent to zero. 11. Rig-up onto a (kill line) with test equipment, 12. Open valve 2. (Valves 1,3 and 4 closed). 13. Commence pumping to test pressure. Surface Well Testing Page 2-1114, Once at test pressure isolate pump and pressure testing of the test string. There are monitor for test period. (Test four - master _various permutations employed by our clients to valve from above). achieve this, one such approach is outlined q below. 15, Close Valve 2 and monitor for test period. (Test five - kill valve). Valve configuration as follows: 16. Bleed pressure via pump vent to zero. i, Kill valve open. Actuator valve open, Note: Repairs and maintenace undertaken at iii, Swab valve closed. this point should follow recommended iv. Master valve closed (or fluid will be maintenace procedures. pumped downhole). y. Choke manifold valves open. Moving Surface Test Tree torig floor: ‘1. Commence pumping slowly flush lines. (Utilizing rig pump via kill line). 1, While in the process of moving tee to die rig floor ensure that all personnel are aware 2. Close front valves on choke manifold and and avoid being trapped under the tree commence pumping to working pressure. should the rig heave. 3. Once at test pressure, isolate pump and 2. Remove and store the shipping slings before monitor for test period. Test one against the tree is hoisted by the rig elevators. master and swab valves also checks integrity of co-flexip, data header and choke connec- 3. Before the tre is made up to the handling tions. joint to be made up to the DST string ensure that the swivel is free to turn and that either 4, Bleed pressure via pump vent to zero. e the upper or lower master valve is closed. 5. Close flowline actuator valve, 4, While the wee is being made up to the DST string ensure the lock out cap is on. This 6. Commence pumping slowly to test pressure. will avoid damage to the actuator stem. Be careful of grease nipples and their web 7. Once at test pressure isolate pump and Protectors. monitor for test period. Test two against flowline actuator valve. 5. After the tree is made up to the DST string ensure that the lock out cap is removed and 8. Bleed pressure via pump vent to zero. excessive weight from the flow lines (Coflexip or metal hoses) is not being sup- 9. Open master valve and flowline actuator ported by the tree connections (use tuggers, valve. if necessary). 10. Close kill valve. 6. Before pressure testing check the swivel. It is good practice when working on a floating 11. Commence pumping slowly to test pressure. rig to paint a white line down across the joints on the STT to be able to observe if any 12. Once at test pressure isolate pump and of them are backing out. monitor for test period. Test duce against kill valve. Once the surface test tree has been rigged up onto the test string there will be further pressure 13, Bleed pressure via pump vent to zero. e@ tests to ensure the assembly's integrity prior to the test program commencing. These tests will normally be performed in conjunction with Surface Well Testing Page 2-12Considerable problems are caused by at- tempting to open the valves with pressure locked in between the gates and seats. This may occur uring pressure testing. This pressure must be relieved by either: 1. “Stinging” the valve through the body filer port using a tool specially supplied by McEvoy. NOTE: This must be done with extreme caution. 2. Bleeding off the pressure through a port in the bonnet of the valve (if available). Once the pressure testing is complete the tree should be left in the following condition prior to the opening of the downhole tools. a) Swab valve closed b) Kill valve closed (unless otherwise di- sted) rect ©) Flowline valve open 4) Master valve(s) open Maintenance and Repair ‘The removal of worm seats must be done with a seat extraction tool and not with a bar, etc. If the seats are removed improperly, the counter bores which receives the seats may be distorted “oval”. ‘This will cause further problems when the new seats are pressed home. ‘The size of the counter bore can be found stamped under the bonnet of the valves. If any machining is done, these sizes must be updated. ‘The sealing compound chambers in the seats must be filled. “This is done by closing the valves 4-5 tums and then injecting the sealing compound. through the appropriate grease injection ports. Each time the valve is funtioned the displacement of the stem and seat helps to inject a small amount of sealing compound onto the face of the valve to aid in sealing. Grease the valve stem bearings through the ‘grease nipples in the valve bonnets. ‘When shipping put protectors over the union connections to prevent damage (i. other half of union complete with bull plug for pressure testing). A fill inspection of assembly should be made between test periods. Any maintenance and repair should be carried out using recom- mended maintenance procedures. ‘An end of job status report must be submit- ted to Maintenace Supervisor. Surface Safety Valve Since the consequences of uncontrolled flow are so severe, especially offshore, well safety systems are important enough that they are sometimes mandated by law. Safety systems must be failsafe. Failure of the energy source or any component must cause the system to shut in the well at one or more points. Safety systems sense conditions and shut in the well or wells when conditions deviate from the preset limits. Shutting in the well averts further danger due to: 1) Uncontrolled flow from ruptured pressure vessel 2) Fueling any fire that has started or may start 3) Overfilling vessels with fluid and/or pressure STANDARD LOCKOUT Cal RiaLe CaP OPTIONAL) ‘UPPER STEW Surface Safety Valve ‘Surface Well Testing Page 2-13Most surface safety valves are reverse-acting gate valves with piston-type actuators. Valve body pressure against the lower stem area moves the gate to the up/closed position. Control pressure applied to the piston pushes tie gute the down/open position. Usually a spring is used to close the valve if valve body pressure is not present. Valve body pressure and piston/stem area ratio determine the control pressure re- quired. The larger the area ratio the less control pressure needed to maintain the valve open, A hydraulic actuator valve is normally Jocated on the flow wing of the HRS Surface Test Tree. However, when a non HRS tree is being used or test conditons dictate, a hydraulic or pneumatic actuated valve can be located on the flowline upstream of the choke manifold near the wellhead. SSV usually have an actuator stem protrud- ing from a threaded boss on the actuator cylinder head for several reasons. ‘© Stem position gives a visual position indica- tion. © A manually operated jack can be attached to open a closed valve. © Alockoute.y 9r Sc sop vam keep the valve open during # weli 1: : jerations or when the control system is dc wn. The power required by most pilots and safety valves is pneumatic or hydraulic. Most systems are pneumatically powered because compressed air or gas is readily available. Power is con- sumed only when a valve is being opened; most of the time the system is static. ‘Valve control is performed by hydraulic/ pneumatic or pneumatic/pnenmatic relays. These relays permit the use of either bleed (two- way) or block and bleed (three-way) sensors. Relays are reset manually to put the system back in service after a closure. This safety feature ensures that personnel are present to determine that the cause for closure has been corrected and that reopening will not be hazardous. Conditions that are possibly monitored include: 1) Pressure - high or low 2) Levels - high or low 3) Fire 4) Toxic or flammable gas mixtures 5) Manual controls at exits and critical locations 6) Erosion Probes HYDRAUUC PRESSURE NET PRESSURE TOCrEN) Gate Vaive with Hydraulic Actuator Surface Well Testing Page 2-14Tn addition, the system can be adapted to Visual inspection of unions for damage. land or offshore operations incorporating subsur- These unions may be Weco connections, face safety devices. Graylock connections or flanged connec- tions. Ensure threads are clean and undam- Inspection aged, inspect sealing surfaces. On receipt of equipment on location a gen- if : : eral inspection of the actuator valve should be ® Visual check on main body for signs of made. This inspection should include: es damage likely to affect integrity of ° assembly. OPEN—Uoper stem practically flush with cylinder. indicating valve is open. (1) Control pressure on actuator piston holds valve ‘open: (2) Large piston area permits use of low-pressure contro! system: (3)Stem packing section reduces contamination of act ator worning parts) Flowine pressure. ‘CLOSING—() Loss of control pressure on piston permits piston tomove outward. Valve Doay pressure, acting on area of the lower stom. is designed to move the gate to the closed cosition: 2) Spring helns to close valve. especially where low tlowiine pres- Sure exists; Nonrotating, vertical movement of stem minimizes ‘wear on packing ‘CLOSED—} Extended stam inaicates valve is closed: (2) Metal ometal seat between actuator bonnet and lower stem nas Served.as a Secondary seal when high temperatures have meited br alstorted lower stem packing: (3) Unstream vale body pres- Sure nelps to noid gate closed unt trouble ts corrected Pneumatic Safety Vaive, Operating Surface Well Testing Page 2-15Emergency Shutdown System ‘The HRS Emergency Shutdown System consists of a hydraulic control manifold that supplies hydraulic pressure to the actuated flow valve on the Surface Test Tree and air or nitrogen to a “pilot” sensing system. Pressure sensing pilots are located at strategic locations throughout the surface equipment. If any of these pilots sense au “upset” condition (either high or low pressure), the well will be automatically shut in at the ‘surface test tree via a hydraulic/pneumatic relay in the control manifold. In addition to the dial pilots, manual shutdown valves and fusible plugs can be strategically placed around the test area and rig. If required, high and low liquid sensors can also be incorporated. Hydraulic/Pneumatic Well Test Safety System Surface Well Testing Page 2-16‘The BRS surface hydraulic control manifold is designed to provide the hydraulic pressure required tn hold open varius safety valves, such as the hydraulic surface safety valve, and to sense the pilot pressure of the system. Any loss of pressure in either the pilot ine or hydraulic line allows the safety valve (or valves) to close automatically. HRS Surface Controt Equipment OVAM ee =n Bag gtevensen- Surface Well Testing Page 2-17200¥ FLAPPER SEAL SPRING GUIDE, VALVE SPRING RETAINER O-ING CONTROL LINE PRESSURE exHausT EXWAUST BACK TO. RESERVOIR In Service Operates Hydraulic Quick Exhaust Operating Principle The operating principle is based upon pressure differential. When backflow occurs in the control line Isading to the Quick Exhaust Vaive, upward movement of diaphragm Is desioned to pull non-extrusion vaive offseat. With valve offseat, an unobstructed path is created for exhausting of control ine pressure. Control line presstire will then retum fo hydraulic fluidt reservoir FROM PILOT ROLLING ee sonrace une gourmet pressure Frow ars SEING Bxraustes math SouRce. ‘TeROuEH PLOT vawe SensusT PORT (n Service Pneumatic Quick Exhaust Operating Principle When In service, contro! pressure is admitted to and flows through the Quick Exhaust Valve to ‘the safety valve. When the control pressure is exhausted from the control line, the pressure differential should cause the diaphragm in the Quick Exhaust Valve ta move. The valves exhaust port is then opened and is designed to allow quick exhaust of the control pressure from the safety valve. ‘Quick Exhaust Valves a ia Surface Well Testing Page 2-183-Way Block and Bieed Relay vatve sa ‘diophragm/spring-operated valve that is designed to block and bleed control Pressure to operate safety valves automatically Design Principle Vaives large flow area is Gesigned to bleed off control pressure quickly to speed closi of safety valves. 7 Valve can be used in most safely systerns ‘with low-pressure control ine. Valve closes automatically. A deliberate manual effort must be made to open valve. This positive action is dsigned to prevent accidentally reaciivaling the sysiem. Manual overtide allows the shuttingin of the safety system or putting system back in service, contro. UNE — Fhow vow omessune GisoRaIRsouRcE outer SFeowT ROL er Shutdown Valve is is designed !o be used re it can be operated manually to shut down the safety system in on emergency of for routine maintenance. Such locations inciude separators. rig floor, tanks, exits, etc. The valves are located in the pilot Control ine and are normally used witn G relay valve. By pling up the handle, control pressure Is released 16 the atmosphere from the contro! line, which is designed to activate the relay valve, bleed off control pressure from the safety vaive and allow the safety vaive to close. sano PISTON Presoune wanoue mare contro. tnero Operating Principle Control pressure is acimittec to the 3-Way Block and Bleed Relay Valve, and f flows through the vaive body to one or more safety valves, Pressure also flows down the 3-Way Valve stem through an orifice where it gqucizes above and below a diaphragm. Control pressure continues on to monitor pilots in the flowiine. Should any monitor pilot sense gan abnormal change in flowline pressure beyond the preset limit, itis designed to ‘exhaust pressurefrom the control line by the Bilot. This is dosigned to create a pressure Siferential across the dlophragm (assshed by spring) to move inward, blocking incoming control pressure from the safety valve chamber, permitting the safety valve to close. Control pressure is exhausted quickey through a snap-cigture slement Ground the 3- Way Valve stem. 3-Way Valve handle must be pulled out manually to put valve back into service. Ne 4 + Sonnet Live pressure In Service Operated INSTRUCTION, Pneumatic ESD Valves Surface Well Testing Page 2-19the supply pressure ports. 2 cap SPRING High-Only Moge OF Operation The capis screwed down to compress the spring which pushes the inner vaive stem and Pressure assembly all the way down. This cllows supply gas to enter through the "HIGH Port and exit "he port marked “OUT.” Fiowine Pressure increases will bush up the inner valve stem, blocking and bleeding supply pressure ‘and aliowing The safety valve fo close. nici por ve - HIGH’ PORT 7 INNER en vv out ANE sren Low roar Low post c wenn { PRESSURE. I~ pressure e SENEING Senso : sSSeMaty AD) setwawe =H genseo 3/4) ~ eevee 3. 7p BSc g pressure ao - In Service Operated 2 Ladhnshit Otis BB HI-Only or LO-Only Monitor Pitot is c spring-loaded, pressure sensing plunger pilot, The pllot is designed fo block and bleed control pressure whenever sensed pressure rises of fals eyona the preset limit, it can be converted to high or low sensing by proper connection of cae SPRING Low Only Mode Of Operation The cap i adlusted to alow towne pressure to override spring pressure. ‘This pushes the inner valve stem and pressure assembly all the way up and allows the passage of supply gas from the "LOW" entry port to tne “OUT” ox port, ‘Upon loss or decrease of flowline pressure, the soring wil push the inner valve stem down, blocking and ceeding supply Pressure and allowing the safety valve to close. Pressure Pilots Tix ase ~ Pressume z—reonae | FF icontaaccne on y= C _(snosion 2 Sonne: SPanaee Erosion Probe Operating Principle The housing of the pilot is cylindrical and is Ported to provide G means of connecting the safety system control lines. The pilot is designed to operate only when erosion penerates the thin wall of the probe, When the probe is penelrated, pressure within me vessel § ollowed To act against the lower end of the 3/4" piston, This pressure forces the piston and plunger upward until the valve containing system control pressure is allowed to exhaust to tmosphere around the plunger and is designed to cause the satety system to activate. Surface Well Testing Page 2-20Pressure Testing Prior to the test program commencing the actuator valve assembly will be pressure tested to censure the integrity of the valve body, valve and connections. See procedures headed ‘HRS Sur- face Test Tree’ for guidelines on pressure testing actuator valve when part of the ST assembly. ‘The procedure for testing an actuator valve on a flowline is as follows. This test will normally be conducted in conjunction with tests on the choke manifold, 1. Prior to all pressure testing: a. Erect warning barriers around test area. b. Announce over P.A. system that pressure testing is about to commence. ©. Ensure all non-essential personnel are clear of test area. 2. Open hydraulic actuator valve. Control line pressure 3,000 psi. (Choke valves open). » . Commence pumping slowly to flush lines. S . Stop pumping. w . Close actuator valve. Control line pressure zero. 6. Commence pumping slowly to test pressure. ‘Visually inspect all Connections for sign of leaks. Note: Report leaks immediately, Do not attempt any remedial action while there is pres- sure applied. 7. Once at test pressure isolate pump, if possible, and monitor for test period. . Bleed pressure via pump vent to zero, 9. Open hydraulic actuator valve. Control line pressure 3,000 psi. Operational Procedures The flowline actuator valve is normally in the open position for the duration of the well test. A pressure of 3,000 psi will be required in the control line between the actuator and the ESD (Emergency Shut Down) Control Panel. ‘Care should therefore be taken in the running of this line. The Actuator valve is the primary clement in the HRS ESD system. A full inspection of the assembly should be made between test periods. Any maintenance and repair should be carried out using recom- mended maintenance procedures. An end of job status report must be submit- ted to the Maintenance Supervisor. Coflexip Hose Coflexip hoses are generally used for 10,000 and 15,000 psi applications to replace hard piping. Their primary uses are as kill and flow lines from the surface test tree. By using 40 foot Jong flexible hoses instead of hard piping, many connections are eliminated and no sharp comers are present which could be subjected to flow cutting. A typical Coflexip line is composed of: A) A length of flexible pipe B) Twoend-fittings complete with lifting/ handling collars. ‘The end-fitting consists of: 1) The termination which ensures the seal and the mechanical attachment of the end-fitting to the flexible pipe. To move the line use a shackled sling through the eyes of thevifting collar. 2) The connector to allow the connection of the end-fitting to any other connector. All types of connectors can be supplied with any end- fittings, the most frequent being API hubs, hammer unions and flanges. ‘The termination bears permanent markings indicating: Manufacturer * Test pressure Serial number Length of line Tntemal diameter Date of factory pressure test Application* Stamp of certifying authority working pressure * Optional before mid-1990 ‘Surface Well Testing Page 2-21Available line applications and limits: C/K: Choke and Kill (temporary H,S; not vented) DST/ACD: Dual Service Line (temporary sour service limit of 72 hours; vented) PTL: Production Test Line (permanent sour services vented) ACD: Acidizing/Fracturing (150°F limit) ROT: Rotary (150°F limit) ‘The whole surface, both inside and outside of a standard end-fitting is protected against corrosion, wear, abrasion and handling by a protective coating of Ni-Kanigen. If the inner coating is damaged or cracked, traces of corro- sion and rust may be visible and an inspection should be completed. CONNECTOR LIFTING / HANDLING COLLAR ‘TERMINATION | FLEXIBLE PIPE fetes =n TL experrnscs 4 — End Fittings Cronund nl armor Invermediate psu nr Flat ste! spiral | TARR intemal Structure ‘The construction of the Coflexip consists of a “non bonded” structure of seven layers. 1) The thermoplastic inner liner makes the pipe leakproof. This layer limits the upper tem- perature and the chemical compatibility of the line, Standard lines are rated from -20°C to 100°C with a Rilsan material liner. The inner liner of high temperature lines is ‘Coflon and good between -20°C and 130°C. 2) The zeta spiral layer takes the hoop stress due to the internal pressure and external Joads. ‘This layer limits the minimum bend- ing radius of the line (roughly 12x ID). If the limit is exceeded, irreversible damage to the line will occur leading to perforation of the inner tube when under pressure. Overbending generally occurs during han- dling of the line near the end-fitting. Due to the heavy nature of the line, never allow the Coflexip to support its own weight, Thus insure that while manipulating the Coflexip during installation, a length of about 3 feet behind the termination is not bent. 3) The flat steel layer reinforces the zeta layer ‘under high pressure. 4) The intermediate thermoplastic sheath improves the dynamic behavior of the line with its anti-friction material. This layer is not leakproof. 5) The double crosswound steel armour wires resist axial load caused by intemal pressure or external axial loads. This layer also provides the line with its resistance to tor- sion. 6) The thermoplastic outer sheath is leakproof and therefore protects the armour wires against corrosion and the line against hydro- static external pressure. 7) The stainless steel outerwrap protects the plastic outer sheath against mechanical damage caused by impacts, wear, handling, etc. Note: A flexible stee! line is a mixed con- struction of steels and thermoplastics. Heat diffusion which occurs during welding may cause irreversible damage leading to a danger- ous line. Surface Well Testing Page 2-22WRONG RIGHT f \ Hales & OC) ° OF a 7 | i MINIMUM : ' js BEND | : RADIUS | | i g 7 7 SB LONG LENGTHS = Srixon MINIMUM OT OF piri i BENDING : RADIUS Coflexip Handling installation Guide 4 _ Surface Well Testing Page 2-23PRODUCT COMPATIBILITY OF STANDARD TEMPERATURE RATED LINES e CORROSION RESISTANCE OF RILSAN INNER LINING CONCENTRATION TEMPERATURE DESIGNATION OR OF ) 150°F | 20°F | 250°F EXPOSURE TIME | _Yg°¢ eete-tosecdsice Hydrochloric acid 13% F Fo. F F HCL 30% F F F F Hydrofluoric acid 3% F Fo. oF F HF 75% F F F F Xylene 100 % 1s 8 3 s | MR C6 Hy (CH3)2 24H s s | 5s NR eae 100 % s | xR | xr | nr 5 | oem saturated F F F F F en al saturated el] eg Bye L foo saturated 8 s wip L e Toul 100 % s s 8 8 1 Diesel 100 % s s i $s i Ss L Crude oil 100 % Ss Ss $s Ss eNO 30% s L | xR | NR | ONR Beton soe | <20% siti s 8 L 2 | | S: Satisfactory NR : Not Recommended Le Limited use Fs Farhidden Procuct Compatibilty of Standard Temperature Rated Lines Surface Well Testing Page 2-24@ PRODUCT COMPATIBILITY OF HIGH TEMPERATURE RATED LINES CORROSION RESISTANCE OF COFLON INNER LINING CONCENTRATION | TEMPERATURE | DESIGNATION OR | 9° 75° 50° yo tia oer | 75°F | 150°F | 200°F j EXPOSURE TIME "| gee} a4 | 66°C | 93°C ! Hydrochloric acid 15% s s s $ $ HCL 30% s s s $ 8 Hydrofluoric acid 3% $ $ s $ 2 HF 15% 8 s s 8 ? Xylene 00% | 15° 8 $s s 8 s Co Hy (CHaig | 24H 8 s s s s anon 100 % $ s $ s Arent saturated $ 3 3 s ? Sannin saturated |S $ s s | e sae Cateium enloride saturated s s {os s 2 Methane | $ | | cH, | 100% $ 8 s $ s Diesel | 100 % 8 s | s 8 Crude oil | 100 % Vs Tos |] os 3s | Sodium hydroxide 7 a Lil Y ! ha 50% Ss $s L NRO} NR j NaOH | | ! i | Hydrogen sulfide i / i | ¥ <20% los jos s s Sj Hy | | - i 3: Satisfactory NR: Not Recommended Li: Limited use F Forbidden Product Compatibility of High Temperature Rated Lines Surface WellTesting Page 2-25jyrgRecedved from mRS.nENAB (214) 418-3020 05/14/92 e 14.51 -> HS.721899 HS NIGERIA/TELEX TELEX cc: Mike Jenrette -> HS.T45529 HE COLOMBIA/TELEX TELEX cc: F. Suarez -> HRS.GLENG GLEN GIBLING/MANAGER STE ENG -> HRS.BNM BN MURALI/TECHNICAL MANAGER ADMIN -> HRS.GREGL GREG LOYACANO/MGR SVC LINE DEV ADMIN Date: May 14, 1992 te: Area Managers Regional Eng. Managers From: Robin Jackson Subject: Coflexip Hose Failure In July of 1991, Colflexip issued Technical Bulletin GG/N91/179 to all U.K. North Sea users cf high tomperature drill stem and production test lines. This was the result of a failure on such a line. e ‘They have determined certain operating conditions were seen as the main source of failure. The three main parameters are exposure of relatively long periods to : a) High Temperature b) High Pressure ¢) High C02 concentratins with H2S present Coflexip has new suspended supply of ET/HP test lines until an alternative design becomes available. For those HT/HP test lines (Coflon) which remain in use, the following limitations on use therefore appiy + PRESSURE ‘TEMP FLUID CONDITIONS 35,000 ps 130 deg.c 02 > #28 less than 108 10,000 psi 130 deg. C C02 + HAS less than 30% 10,000 110 deg. C C02 + H2S less than 50% In the event that any such line is known to have been exposed e to conditions above these limits tor a period over 48 hours, the line should be removed from service and returned together with full details of the exposure to Coflexip for inspection. Soo S So ST ee === nee eeePiping Ensure enough of correct size and pressure _errosion in the flow system: target elbows, rating pipe is available for surface rig-up. block trees, lead targets and erosion probes. 6 Check supply of any crossovers required. Piping may consist of straight lengths, Grease swivels, check unions and seals, Pres- swivels and crossovers. Additional assemblies sure test to working pressure prior to sending on may be needed to reduce flow cutting and a job. m= j i § i Colborne Rearend ang | Surface Well Testing Page 2-26SYSTEMS ENGINEERING BULLETIN Report No.: $90-01 SURFACE Date: 19 September 1990 L_Averovais [¥¢E [Hee | Pressure Ratings for 1502 Weco Unions Purpose ‘Tho purpose of this bulletin is toinform you of the limitations of 1502 Woco style unions. Pressure Limitations It is esesential to know beforchand if the flow pipe you are putting into service was fabricated for sweet or sour service: When fabricated from standard service materials, the 1502 style union is approved for use in pressures of up to 15,000 psi. @ When fabricated from sour service materials, the 1502 univu is good for use in pressures of up to 10,000 psi. Consequently, a flow pipe with 1502 unions that has been built for sour service should not be used in any application (sweet or sour) above 10,000 psi. This is because the material used to build the sour service flow pipe has a much lower yield strength than if the pipe were built to be used for standard service. Note: The HRS quality program QP1433 requires flow pipe to be striped to indicate pressure rating and type of service. H,S serviceis identified by a 4-in. green band. The presence of that band on a piece of flow pipe with 1502 unions means that it should not be used in conditions that exceed 10,000 psi. Page 1 of 1 Robert Pahmiver —————————Production Systems e P.O.Box 819052 Dallas, ‘'X 75381-9052 2601 Beltline Rd. Carrollton, TX 75006 Ph. 214-418-4412, Fax 214-418-3010 HALLIBURTON pn. Ao [ Approvals | ffs £ Se Dili To: Surface Well Test Equipment Personnel From: Production Systems Engineering - Dallas Date: October 28, 1993 Subject: Threaded Line Pipe Bulletin Introduction The purpose of this bulletin is to specify the Halliburton surface well test equipment threaded piping requirements. This document applies to all surface taper-threaded piping and connections where the threaded joint serves as a seal. This document supersedes HRS engineering bulletin 89-02 Halliburton Production Systems Engineering Standards conform to ASME/ANSI B31.3 Chemical Plant and Petroleum Piping. Threaded Pipe Standards Minimum Thickness of Male Steel Threaded Components Fluid Service Nominal Pipe Size Range Min. Wall Thickuess Category "M" sis" Schedule 80 2" Schedule 40 >2" Not PermittedPressure Rating The depth of the threads must be considered in establishing the pressure rating of threaded pipe. Prior to calculating the allowable working pressure, thread depth must be subtracted from the pipe wall thickness much in the same manner as a corrosion allowance, The thread depth of NPT thread is 0.0571" for 1/2" & 3/4” NPS, 0.0696" for 1"-2" NPS, and 0.100" for pipe greater than 2” NPS. If you have questions regarding this bulletin, please feel free to contact Joe Kangan via MEMO ID HRSW611 or at (214) 418-4412dian 5S }10S} 10 | LW] 20} 30} STD] 40s} 40 | 60 | 80S] 80 | 100/120} 140] 160] Xs | xx ie eK] 085 iS 8 Sal Ta Be 2% Bish 3 ice ssoal Sn eel BP Sef B55 3% Ren Al 2a36|i238% Tc 288 30) Le satizoe 7 sof 7aqhiiseohr$i0 rs; o|11 Sof ioecet osaol Ors rseea [rstocks Sissel a stan hsagahist cigs peat gaye 18 beste Gal nerolireaalincohnso x a8Sal2aosc 2a [race Tan : 20 [nse ‘infiséee| Sea] 9s0q)1950 200% ‘apealsozschsooe 5 30 is hs 32 In 24 Pisce, oa ial aa 36 sie oa ARE af pal sérstiszsohrs 3izshe a S05ef S39) 37 Pssahh Hee rahiassshres 7 x37shi2)2 alir2so] i i 1925019006) :625} Ta 7API Flanges z Ee oe oe ne ne = = 2 et ae ne eee aa $20 cinecreme ae tae ae ae Roma 12 Ve be axe ii nes oe p ze zene ia i a aE : ae iene = H za EE na ae , Lees te a 4 Epes HE she $2 enema oo or ns se ae Hada ee Eee H om ) SEE 3 u aoe ee ii Ses Sa enemas ie oo SANSTCEEEEEEEEEEEE EERE EEE EEE PE Pressure-Temperature Ratings - Material Group 1.1 MAWP (psi) Based on Class of Flange Temperature (°F) -20 100 200 300 400 500 600 650 700 750 800 850 900 950 2000 150 285 260 300 740 675 655, 635 600 550 535, 535 505, 410 270 170 105 50 400 990 900 875 845 800 730 15 710 670 550 355, 230 140 70 600 1480 1350 1315 1270 1200 1095 1075 1065 1010 825 535 345 205 105 900 2220 2025 1970 1900 1795 1640 1610 1600 1510 1235 805 515 310 185Paint Specifications Each HRS assembly shall include painted identification bands to identify pressure rating and service, An assembly should have a 12” band of the proper color for the working pres- sure of that particular piece. H,S service is identified by a four inch wide green band with four inch wide bands of the pressure rating bordered on each side. The pressure rating color code to use is: Working Pressure (PSI) 1,440 @ 2,000 3.000 4,000 5,000 10,000 15,000 Color Silver Blue Black Brown Gray \ Yellow Orange Note: Band width may vary according to size or configuration of assembly Paint Specs HS CODE (IF APPLICABLE) PRESSURE CODE 12° —= Surface Well Testing Pave 2-27tro-:-:;----;----—-'‘(('|_——_——_—_———— HALUBURTON ELASTOMERIC MATERIALS GUIDE Chemicai 70 XXXXX 600 XXX 601.3XXXX e Environment P.C. Nitrile Fluorocarton Aflas (FEM) (TFEP) HS x aA A Hydrocarbons A A A (Sweet Crude) CH, B-EX B-EX A-EX (Methane) Sweils Slightly Salt Water A a A Steam x Devends on Type B co, B-EX A-EX B-EX Sweils N, B-EX ALEX B-EX Weak Acids B A a (15% HCD Amine B x A Inhibitors | ® Alcaiois A C. Sweils Diesei B A Acidic Compietion DIC B A Fluids Rapid Hardening Aromatic C - Softens B c ‘drocarbons and Mechamicai Property Loss Solvents x B x camnie-Xviene) Exceijent - Recommended Good - Little or No Efect Conditionai Attacks Not Recommended Exposure at High P: jease May Cause ture and Rapid Pressure Re- olosive Decompression | Hallipurton Elastomeric Materials Guide Surface Well Testing Page 2-28 ee ___{ant 96) #24 coos pus (o. cy Vv v aN 7) @ cI we «| <} <} 5} 5] <| gs] < g ag Otis Guidelines for Seals Page 2-29 Surface Well Testingepwauwore! IN -YN —ex2eHY-G —_PaHe ov 10 eI POELION-IN — sHIMg 9 ‘homasnes: y we uN wr wy v 3 v v ¥ vy ¥ ww tN ws v v v v v Y v ¥ v 2 3 v v v v v v ¥ ¥ v v v v v v v v v v v v @ é v ¥ 3 7 v v sre Gen 008 onost ea oy war Baader see on eonies Pr end on wen | gions [epee | ygpumoduog Otis Guideline for Seals Page 2-30 Surface Well TestingData Header The data header is an assembly normally e@ mounted in the flow path upstream of the surface choke manifold. The header is designed with four to eight lateral fittings providing access to measure certain well flow parameters. The access points may be used for pressure, tempera- ture, sand monitoring, sampling, chemical injection, etc. If transducers or gauges are to be used, care must be taken not to shock them when making up unions etc, e SPECIFICATIONS Size 2in | 2in 3in 3in 3in Working Pressure | 10,000 psi_| 15.000 psi | 10,000 psi | 15,000 psi | 15,000 psi Service HS" as’ |S" HS? HS" End Connections | Fig 1502_| Fig 2202 | Fig 1502 | Fig 2202 | API6 Bx Fig Length 37 in Din Win 20 in 21 in Weight (56 Ib 225 Ib 140 Ib I 225 Ib 225 Ib “Meets requirements of NACE MR-01-75 Data Headers and Specifications Surface Well Testing Page 2-31 PERSRESRERREREEeInspection On receipt of equipment at location a general inspection of the data header should be made. This inspection should include: ¢ Inlet female Weco connection (Hub-Clamp connection for 15K equipment). Check threads are clean undamaged. Inspect seal ring and replace if necessary. ‘© Outlet male Weco connection (Hub-Clamp connection for 15K equipment). Check sealing surface for damage. Check condition of wing nut threads. © Removal of 1/2" NPT plugs (SNO-Trik HP fittings for 15K equipment). Check condi- tion of threaded connections. Replace plugs. Rig Up The general procedure on a four port data header is to install needle valves in three of the 1/2" NPT threaded connections with a thermowell in the fourth. Use thread (teflon) tape on all NPT connections. Pressure Testing Prior to the well test program commencing the data header will be pressure tested to ensure the integrity of the connections. This will be done in conjunction with the pressure tests on the choke manifold. Note: Report leaks immediately. Do not ‘attempt any remedial action while there is pressure applied. Deadweight Tester Deadweight Testers are used where accurate pressure measurement or pressure calibration is required. Their operation depends on balancing known weights against the force exerted by an unknown pressure acting on a piston of precisely known area. The weights are applied manually until the piston is floating with no net vertical movement. ‘When the weights are applied to the piston, the entire assembly is rotated clockwise slowly. This rotation minimizes frictional effects and permits vertical motion of the piston with ex- tremely small variations in pressure. Deadweight testers have a manually con- trolled pump which can generate the pressure needed to calibrate spring and strain gauges. Valves permit rapid, convenient switching between functions. Testers have an oil reservoir to provide the pressure medium needed for purging lines and calibrating purposes. Typical Deadweight Tester Surface Well Testing Page 2-32Chemical Injection Pump Chemical injection pumps are provided to inject the following chemicals: a) Hydnue formation inhibitor (medanol or glycol) ») Corrosion inhibitor ©) Demulsifying agents d) Foam inhibitors ) Dewaxing agents Chemical Injection Pumps Choke Manifold ‘The choke manifold is the primary means of controling the flow of the well and should be monitored and operated by competent personnel. ‘The assemblies normally contain two chokes: 1) an adjustable choke used generally in well clean up operations and 2) a positive choke which allows more accurate control for pre-determined choke sizes. Alternatives of dual fixed or adjust- able chokes are also possible. Manifolds offer the option of directing flow through either choke while isolating the other for choke changes, maintenance or repair. Five valve configura- tions also allow an unrestricted flowpath through, the manifold with a total bypass of choke con- tral. Inspection On receipt of equipment on location a gen- ral inspection of the manifold assembly should be made. This inspection should include: a. The choke manifold must be rated to the maximum expected shut-in pressure. It should be sour service rated if H2S is ex- pected. b. Inleoutlet Weco connections (Hub Clamp connections for 15K equipment). Ensure threads are free of dirt and have no indica- tion of damage. Inspect seal rings and replace if necessary. Ensure thread protector replaced after inspection. Surface Well Testing Page 2-33 a. Always prior to operation count and note the number of tums to fully open and close each valve. Valves should open and close freely (18 turns to fully open Cameron/Foley type valves, 13 turns for McEvoy type valves). Also inspect condition of Stem Adaptor, Bearing Cap and Bonnet. 4d. Visual check on main body for signs of structural damage likely to affect integrity of assembly. Rreak om 60" nut on vovitive side of chrke manifold. Checi. itu: size of choke bean installed. Ensure thot i» rhreads are in good condition and the inner as; "iy is free of dirt and other deposits. Checs sal 31. ving nut. Replace and make-up wing nut. Break-out wing nut on adjustable side of choke manifold. Ensure inner assembly free of dirt and other deposits. check valve scat for signs of wear or damage. Check seal on wing nut. Replace and make-up wing nut. |__ Positive Choke ‘Choke Manifold Surface Well Testing Page 2-34MANIFOLD ASSY. 5 VALVE c A B CHOKE MANIFOLD ASSY. 4 VALVE FIXED CHOKE INLET VARIABLE CHOKE Surface Well Testing Page 2-35 Choke Manifold AssembliesValve repairs and maintenance undertaken at this point should follow recommended mainte- nance procedures. Pressure testing of the assem- bly may be required before placement in its well test position. this should be done following the ‘guidelines laid down for workshop pressure testing of choke manifold, SO 1416. Rigup Installation of adjustable choke, positive choke, sample points and pressure gauges should only be undertaken once manifold is located in its well test position. a, Adjustable choke - installed as per manufac- turers recommended procedures. s )._ Positive choke - if information is available of the well’s performance it may be possible at this point to install a positive choke. If so it should be installed as per manufacturers recommended procedures. If not, install a thread protector (large choke size bean). ¢. Sample points - 1/2" NPT threaded connec- tions (SNO-TRIK HP fittings for 15K equipment) are located on the manifold assembly. One directly behind each of the chokes and one at the junction prior to the outlet. Needle valves should be installed in each of these connections. Sample/Bleed hoses can then be installed behind each of the chokes. d._ Pressure gauge - Downstream choke pressure is monitored throughout the testing program. ‘The gauge may be installed in the needle valve at the outlet junction, Pressure Testing Prior to the test program commencing the choke manifold will be pressure sted w ensure the integrity of the choke body, choke valves and Weco connections. The tests should be monitored via the data header on a Barton Pressure Recorder and a suitably rated pressure gauge (€.g. 5,000 psi test use 10,000 psi gauge). ‘The recommended procedure for the four valve (non-bypass) configuration is as follows:- 1. Prior to all pressure testing: a. Erect waming barriers around test area. b. Announce over P.A. system that pressure testing is about to commence. ¢. Ensure all non-essential personnel are clear of test area. 2. Ensure alll needle valves with the exception of those to the Barton recorder and pressure gauge are closed. 3. Open all 4 valves on the manifold. = Back-out the adjustable choke. 5. Commence pumping slowly to flush lines and choke manifold: 6. Stop pumping, 7. Close both back valves on manifold. 8. Commence pumping slowly to test pressure. Visually inspect all connections for sign of leaks. Note: Report leaks immediately. Do not aitempt any remedial action while there is pressure applied. 9. Once at test pressure isolate pump, if pos- sible, and monitor for test period. 10. Bleed pressure via pump vent to zero. 11, Close both front valves on manifold. 12. Open both back valves on manifold. 13. Commence pumping slowly to test pressure. Visually inspect all connections for signs of Teaks. 14, Once at test pressure isolate pump, if pos- sible, and monitor for test period. 15. Bleed pressure via pump vent to zero, 16. Open both front valves on manifold. Surface Well Testing Page 2-36Procedure for the 5 valve by-pass configura- tion is similar and is outlined below. ..As above. -Open all 5 valves on manifold. -As above. ..Close both back valves and by- pass valve on manifold. As above. ..Open both front valves and by- pass valve on manifold. Valve repairs and maintenance undertaken at this point should follow recommended mainte- nance procedures. General Rules Manipulations of the chokes should be done in conjunction with the company representative. It is essential that perfect understanding and ‘communication exists between ourselves and our client. Never flow through the manifold without either the adjustable choke seat or fixed choke bean in place to protect the body threads. Never use the valves as chokes as this will damage the gates and seats. Note: Before operation of the choke mani- fold, while in service or in testing, the entire installation should be grounded by means of a cable which allows the static electricity to dispense and avoid flashes. The cable should have a maximum resistance of 1 ohm per three ‘feet. It should be connected to a place where there is no paint, either on the vessel or on the rig. In the case of onshore testing, the ground should be a copper earth electrode at least three ‘feet long, driven into the ground and watered regularly to keep the earth wet and provide good contact. Operation Adjustable chokes are not highly accurate. ‘Therefore, avoid using adjustable chokes for extended periods. Where conditions permit use fixed chokes with the the adjustable used as a bypass system to allow fixed choke changes. Note: Careful monitoring of upstream and downstream pressures must be made during any choke change; bearing in mind the rating of the downstream equipment. When installing choke beans/scats use the appropriate wrench and check that the metal sealing gasket is in place. The seal will help prevent damage to the body and choke seat threads due to flow cutting. With the seat installed correctly the adjust- able choke stem can be made up to the manifold. Back out the stem before offering it up to the choke body. Make up the hammer union tight insuring the indicator notch is centered on the top. Screw the adjustable stem all the way in until it butts with the seat. Zero the indicator. Rack the choke out halfway then re-check the. zero setting. The accuracy of adjustable chokes is affected by the amount of backlash in the threads. Con- siderable choke size variation can occur due to the thread movement between stem and body. Pressure may drive the stem to seat or away from the seat depending upon the force applied and the area of the stem. Due to the aforementioned reason, whenever a well is first opened to the adjustable choke, the stem must be backed off its seat to prevent a pressure lock. If a pressure lock occurs, do not force an unseating with excessive torque or damage may result. Ensure provisions are made to bleed off pressure when changing chokes both upstream and downstream of the choke. Be particularly careful of pressure trapped upstream of choke, caused by mud, plugs, hydrates, etc. Check for wear and damage of chokes and body threads. Surface Well Testing Page 2-37Check that an adequate supply of chokes/ seats and correct choke indicators arc available. Ensure adjustable choke is zeroed correctly. Always remove positive chokes after test and replace in carrying box. Always carry spare adjustable choke stems and seats. 1. Initial Opening The choke configuration prior to initial opening of the well is generally as follows:- Both front valves closed. Both back valves open. Sample point needle valves closed. Needle valve to downstream gauge open. ;. Adjustable choke set off zero. Positive choke installed, choice depen- dent on well performance. peeoge On initial opening a low adjustable choke size may be selected. ‘The front valve is then opened and the well flowed through the adjust- able side. The downstream pressure is carefully monitored to ensure the working pressure of the downstream configuration is not exceeded. The adjustable choke size is then manipulated up or down depending on well response. Well effluent samples can be taken duting this period. Itis good practice to take these samples at a point directly in the flow path i.e. in this case from the adjustable side sampling point. Samples should be taken throughout the flowing periods and results recorded. 2. Positive Choke For accuracy af results it is good practice ta flow the well, once clean-up achieved, on a positive choke. The choice of positive choke bean will be predetermined by the adjustable choke size, ‘The procedure for installation of a positive choke bean is as follows: a Ensure front and rear valves on positive choke side are closed. b. Bleed pressure to zero via the bleed valve at the rear of the manifold, Avoid discharge of well effluent onto floor or work area as this may present a safety hazard. c. Leaving bleed line open break-out and remove wing nut. 4. Install choke bean as per manufacturers recommended procedures. €. Replace and make-up wing nut. f. Close bleed needle valve. ‘The choke bean is now installed on the positive side. The flow path must now be switched from the adjustable to the positive side. (Note: two operators may be required). The procedure is as follows: a. Open rear valve on positive side. b. Begin to slowly close front valve on adjust- able side while simultaneously opening slowly the front positive side valve; observe the downstream pressure gauge. Note: Itis essential the working pressure of the downstream configuration is not exceeded. e c. Generally a pressure ‘kick’ is observed on the downstream gauge indicating flow through both sides of choke, at this point smoothly close front adjustable valve while opening front positive valve. The adjustable side may be isolated at this point and the adjustable choke removed, cleaned and inspected. Post Test Inspection A fill inspection of the assembly should be made in between test periods. Any maintenance and repair should be carried out using recom mended maintenance procedures. End of Job Status An end of job status report must be submit- ted to the Maintenace Supervisor. Surface Well Testing Page 2-38Chokes Chokes are throttling valves whose design enables progressive manual, powered or fixed control of the wellstream by opening, closing or selecting an orifice. They are capable of with- standing erosion due to the very high stream velocities occurring at, and immediately down- stream, from the orifice. In order to understand the flow controlling ability of a choke, two essentially different flow conditions across the choke must be reviewed. These are called critical and noncritical flow conditions. Critical flow occurs when the pressure downstream of the choke is one-half or less than the pressure upstream from the choke. In this case, the flow rate through the choke depends only on variations of the upstream pressure, flnid character and on choke settings. Changes in the separator pressure within the critical flow range does not affect the rate of flow through the choke. Flow rates can be estimated from choke coefficient tables in the critical flow condition Tange. Non-critical flow occurs when the down- stream pressure is more than half of the up- stream pressure. In this case, changing the separator pressure downstream from the choke will affect the flow rate through the choke. In the non-critical flow condition, estimation of flow rate cannot be made from choke coefficient tables. Assumptions of Choke Nipple Flow Esti- mates: 1) Dry gas 2) Positive choke bean (6" long) 3 Critical flow 4) Gas is ideal (compressibility constant) 5) Qmefi Gravity x Temperature Absolute Choke coefficient is based on the following : Coane D?9" x 26.616 x 18 Note: Moderate and changing amounts of liquid content will invalidate flow rates esti- mated by this method. CHOKE COEFFICIENT SHOKE SIZES MCF / DAY * 2/64 0.324 3/64 0.918 4/64 1.638 5/64 2-610 6/64 3.690 7/64 5.166 8/64 6.250 9/64 7.992 10/64 9.954 11/64 12.132 12/64 14.440 13/64 17.208 14/64 20.088 15/64 23.184 16/64 26.510 17/64 30.006 18/64 33.930 19/64 37-980 20/64 43.640 21/64 46.818 22/64 51.588 23/64 56.592 24/64 61.210 25/64 67.320 26/64 73.134 27/64 79.092 28/64 85.130 29/64 91.818 30/64 98.532 31/64 105.516 32/64 112.720 36/64 144.180 40/64 179.740 44/64 219.168 48/64 260.990 * Calculated from data appearing in Bureau of Mines Monograph 7. Choke Flow Rafe Estimate for Gas —_ Oil Flow Estimate: Qe Rowrr P= Wellhead Pressure (psig) D= Choke (64ths) Surface Well Testing Page 2-39Wellstream Heater Itis frequently necessary to heat the pro- Guced wellstream above the wellhead flowing temperature in order to: 1. Prevent hydrating at the separators. 2. Compensate for heat loss through a flow control throttling device (choke) which drops a large amount of wellstream heat through free expansion at the end. 3. Assist in separation of water in oil or oil in water emulsions. 4, Aid in separation of foamy oil. 5. Lower the oil viscosity to promote better flow and atomization at the burners. 6. Prevent waxes from coming out of solution in wax bearing oils, which could foul the separator. Wellstream Refridgerator Option Heaters are on occasions used to cool the well fluid. To achieve this cooling, a water medium is pumped into the shell to puil heat out of the well effluent. Baffle plates made up, alternately top and bottom, ensure the water makes a tortuous flow path to eliminate stagnant hat spats. A phenomenon requiring consideration is the Joule-Thomson effect. When natural gas ex- pands from a high pressure to a lower pressure without heat added there is a coincident tempera- ture drop or refrigeration effect which is nor- mally referred to as the Joule-Thomson effect. Possible separation economic advantage can be gained. Benefit is achieved by using the pres- sure drop to lower the separation temperature of the hydrocarbon mixture, causing more liquid condensation of the natural gas. ered is the formation of hydrates of natural gas. Hydrates are unstable, solid chemical com- pounds of natural gas and water which exist in snowlike form at temperatures above 32°F under pressure but decompose at atmospheric pressure. ‘They appear to be hydrates of 2 mixture of the component gases and not 2 mixture of the hy- drates of the individual gases. Thus these hydrates form at a temperature for a given gas mixture rather than at the hydrate temperature for the individual pure components in the mix- ture, It is also a known fact that the presence of liquid water is generally considered necessary for the formation of hydrates. Turbulence accelerates the formation of hydrates and freez- ing occurs frequently downstream from valves, regulators, chokes, sharp bends, etc. Until the first hydrate crystal forms, there exists no nucleus for further formation; but once started, hydrates form rapidly from the available free water, When testing high pressure gas wells at low rates itis especially important to have the heater at operating temperature before the well is passed through it. This set of conditions, high pressure drop at the choke and possible low temperatures, is conducive to the formation of hydrates with its resulting problems. Flowing wells at higher flow rates usually increases the flowing wellhead temperature because the formation heat comes to the surface. Due to the higher temperatures and less pressure drop at the choke there is less likelihood of hydrates and the heater’s use may be reduced or even eliminated. Designs There are two basic designs of wellstream heaters in general use with production testing equipment. One is the indirect heater; the other is the steam heat exchanger. Both designs usually incorporate a choke or chokes located downstream of the midpoint on the heating piping (coils). Three types of indirect, fired, (water bath) heaters available are: 1) Gas fired 2) Diesel fired 3) Electrical Indirect gas or diesel fired heaters consist of a large, low pressure tank which contains a large volume of water or glycol mixture heated by a burner nozzle inside a fire tube. The well fluid Surface Well Testing Page 2-40passes through high pressure flow tubes or coils which are installed in the tank and emersed in the water, The coils make numerous passes to provide the largest amount of surface area possible for heat transfer. Note: Heaters may have a high pressure side upstream of choke and a low pressure side downstream. Care musi be exercised when testing to ensure low pressure coils are not subjected to excess pressure. When the heaters are opened for inspection a small hole will be seen in the end of each coil’s 180° bend. Erosion will be at its worst on the crown of the bend. If erosion takes place, the “ell tale” hole should allow a release of flow to the shell of the vessel at a controlled rate provid- ing sufficient time to remedy. Do not flow the well through the heater during the clean up period, since any entrained solids could damage the coils and necessitate expensive repairs. The heater should have a direct bypass manifold such that the flow tubes can be isolated during well cleaning up opera- tions or depressurized to check/change the choke. Because of the length of the coils and the number of bends, the heater can exhibit a con- siderable back pressure. At low rates this may not be a problem but at high rates this can present a considerable problem. For this reason modifications have been made to some heaters that include larger coil IDs and elimination of chokes. While this has reduced the back pres- sure exhibited, there is a compromise in that the effective surface area for fluid heat transfer has. been reduced. Unfortunately, all the heat put into any heater vessel is not 100% efficiently exchanged to the well fluids flowing through. Heat loss is always present. Diesel fired heaters use a diesel burner assembly which incorporates a diesel pump for pressure and an electrical fan to supply forced air for good burning. Generally, diesel units have more efficient BTU ratings than the gas fired. Electrical heaters consist of two clectrical elements replacing the fire tube arrangement. The heated water/glycol allows heat transfer to the coils and thus the well effluent. Electrical supply of 220/480 volts is required for the electrical control system. This unit was de- signed to meet stringent environmental safety guidelines for offshore California. Gas fired bumers may use 1) natural gas obtained from the separator at a point down- stream of the gas orifice meter or 2) gas from an external source such as a propane tank. The piped separator or external gas usually makes one pass through the heater bath to prevent possible hydrate formation and then is regulated down to 15 psi for burning. The bummer has a gas-air mixing arrangement with air being Controlled by an adjustable shutter. A thermo- stat controls the heater bath temperature. A pilot light with 3-5 psi gas burns constantly to ignite the main burner when necessary. Note: Extreme care should be taken during attempts to light the burner. Only remote igni- tion of pilot is advisable. Allow system to purge with fresh air before attempting to light a gas saturated fire tube. During the clean up period separator gas can be obtained by cracking the inlet valve with the separator’s downstream valves closed and trapping a sufficient supply of natural gas. On any well with HS an external supply of gas is required. Be aware that the heater stack’s spark arrestor may suffer from soot blockage due to the inefficient buming of rich liquid gases such as bottled LPG. Poor burner air drafting may result unless a clean bum is maintained or modifications tu the spark arrestor are made. Check working pressure and pressure test. If the heater is indirect fired (using diesel or separator gas) check operation of pilot main burner and safety shut down controls. Ensure bath is filled with fresh water (do not use salt water) and that the thermostat operates correctly. Check that the regulators are set to give correct, pilot and burner gas pressure. Surface Well Testing Page 2-41Internal View of Indirect Gas Fired Heater Surface Well Testing Page 2-42Heat Exchanger Heat exchangers consist of an outer shell into which is passed a series of coils. The coils are subdivided into HP and LP coils. The pressure drop from HP to LP coils being usually made through twin parallel long nose chokes. To determine and note the appropriate choke size when flowing through the twin parallel chokes use the following formula: D,=\D7+D;_ Example Flowing through 20/64 and 24/64 parallel chokes, the equivalent choke size would be: Dye Nae D= 31/64 ‘The chokes are secured by unibolt fittings. ‘The bleed screw must be removed and any pressure bled off before attempting to release the securing bolt. Once the securing bolt is loosened a sharp tap on the lugs of the connection should break the connection. The bolt should then be removed and the choke withdrawn carefully to prevent damage. To replace the choke, reverse the procedure but ensure the choke stem is backed out before you start. Once the securing bolt is made up tight, zero the choke. and replace. the hleed screw with a new gasket in place. The outer shell is rated at 250 psi and are fitted with relief valves. The coils are usually 5- 10,000 psi HP and 2000 psi LP. Each heater must be checked and the respective ratings determined. ‘The vessel is supplied by heat from an external source - rig steam or HRS boiler unit. The steam, once used, is either dumped to a drain or fed back to the boiler via a fluid trap to remove the hydrocarbons, Inspection On receipt of equipment on location, a general inspection of the heat exchanger should be made. This should include: a. Inspect all inlet and outlet connections. Check threads are clean and undamaged. Replace seals where necessary. b. Visually check for signs of structural damage which may affect the integrity of the equip- ment. ¢. Visually check all piping and valve assem- blies. Function test all valves. Note: Before operation of a steam heat exchanger, while in service or in testing, the entire installation should be grounded by means of a cable which allows the static electricity to disperse and avoid flashes. The cable should have maximurn of 1/3 olen per foot. It should be connected to a place where there is no paint, either on the vessel or on the rig. In the case of onshore testing, the ground should be an iron stake at least three feet long, driven into the ground and watered regularly to keep the earth wet and provide good contact. Pressure Testing ‘The pressure test should be done in conjunc- tion with the complete rig up and should com- prise of 1. LP coil test 2. BP coil test 3. InleV/bypass manifold test Note: Once the pressure test is completed it is imperative that the outlet valve be open to prevent water trapped in the coils from expand- ing when steam is applied. Surface Well Testing Page 2-43Steam Boilers erat ‘The quality of the water used in the boiler will ‘The boiler must be sited ina safe area. ete nd the prorranceof tba. 6 Tee feed wuermastmeet he folowing specifies, Checks shoud be made on he quality of he ons: feed waters and the water treated with chemicals as necessary. At regular intervals open 1. Total dissolved solids -2,000 ppm maximum the boiler steam valves by lifting the relief lever. 2: Total alkalinity - 300 ppm maximam 3. PH value - 9-11 trols under pening Condi oy en controls under operating conditions by interupting Boilers may be gas fired or oil fired. When the feed water sipply. starting an oil fred boiler, care must be taken to censure thatthe fuel pump is properly primed Check the operation of the flame failure otherwise the pump could be severely damaged. device by withdrawing it and covering its “eye”. Exar al seam oes arin good coon and properly made up. Always ensure before applying steam to the heat exchanger that the inlet and outlets to the coils are open. Steam Heat Exchanger Surface Well Testing Page 2-44SPECIFISATIONS ‘Capacity Imm 2mm 2 um BTU/ir 3mm 3 mm BTU/hr BTU BTUMr Brune @ Pressure 5.000 psi | 5000psi | 10,000psi | 5,000 psi 5,000 psi Rating Preheat 12-3xxH_ 14-3xxH 445x25 18-3xxH 184.5225 Coils Rating 5,000 psi 5,000 psi 10,000 psi 5,000 psi 10,000 psi Postheat 63H e-3ut 83uH 3x 6-308 Coils Rating 2,000 2,000 $,000 2,000 5,000 ‘Choke 2in~ $000 | 2in- 5,000 2 in - 5,000 2 in - 5,000 2 in - 5,000 Service HS’ HS” HS" HS” HS’ Heater OD 48 in in 60 in in 60 in Skid Length | __192 in 288 in 288 in 288 in 288 in Skid Width 60 in 90 in 90 in 90 in in Skid Height 72 in 120 in 120 in 120 in 120 in ‘Skid Weigot 15,000 in 20,000 in 23,000 in 25,000 in 25,000 — e Size 6mm (BTU) 6mm (BTU) Working Pressure 10,000 psi 5,000 psi Vessel Pressure 350 psi 150 psi Preheat Coils 224.5" OD x 2.25" ID 223"xxH Pressure 10,000 psi 5,900 psi Postheat Coils 2x 4-3xxH 2x 4-3"xH Psi 5,900 2,300 Choke 2-2 in Mox Oriface 2+1 in Mox Oriface 10,000 psi 5,000 psi Service HS" HS" Heater 60 0D 60 OD Skid Length 294 in 294 in Skid Width 84 in 84 in Skid Height 108 in 108 in Skid Weight 25,000 Ib 20,000 1b e “Meets requirements of NACE MR-01-75 Heater Specs ‘Surface Well Testing Page 2-45“NI OS W3d SONNOd - 3uNSS3ud 3ONvD 0008 oo0y 0008 9002 ° —= = ‘Janseaus Svo Jonadu:azuinoau | on Tews Tor “ ‘LIBHNBSHYS '§934930 on ¢ JO! SV9 U9 dS Z NO GaSvE BAND NOILONGSY AW3L—NOISNYdXd SVD WYNLWN Page 2-46 ‘Surface Well Testing Natural Gas €xpansion/Temperature Reduction Curves180 160 140, 120 3 3 & Tomporoture drop, °F a 8 40) 20 ° 9 sa9 i000 isco t200 280 30ca 2500 000 4300 50c@ 5500 6000 fninet pressure, 9319 Temperature Drop Accompanying a Given Pressure Drop 6000 4000 3000 1500 1000 ‘800 400 300 130 z 3 t00 20 60 40. ramperature, °F Pramure Temperature ‘Curves for Predicting Hydrate Formation Surface Well Testing Page 2-47LAA eT Ae ATA Nid Pamnissibia Expansion of 0.7-Gravily Natural Gas Without Hydrate Formation Surface Well Testing Page 2-48aT 0 7 Ed & OSs B00 eee 7300 2000" Permissible Expansion of .08-Gravity Natural Gas Without Hydrate Formation Permissible Expansion of 0.9-Gravity Natural Gas Without Hydrate Formation Surface Well Testing Page 2-49MAG ST i TEMPERATURE I lrinal pense, oe Permissibie Expansion of 1.0-Gravity Natural Gas Without Hydrate Formation Surface Well Testing Page 2-50Theoretical Heater Performance Below are outlet temperatures versus flow rate calculations and curves for the following heaters: Water Bath Heaters: 5,000 psi 2 mm BTU/HR Gas Steam Heat Exchangers: 6mm BTU/HR Description Four programs have been developed to provide the outlet temperatures versus flow rate calculations and curves for water bath heaters and steam heat exchangers: LIQHTR For water bath heaters flowing liquids. The required input data is: © Inlet temperature, © Water bath: temperature, thermal conductiv- ity, temperature of volume expansion, specific sravity, viscosity and prand! num. er. © Well fluid (iquid): specific heat, specific gravity, viscosity and thermal conductivity. GASHTR For water bath heaters flowing gas. In addition to the input data required for LIGHTR, the following is also required: Inlet pressure Gas critical temperature and pressure, spe- cific heat, specific gravity and thermal conductivity. LIQHTR.STM For steam heat exchangers flowing liquids. ‘The required input data for the well fluid is the same as that for LIOHTR. For the steam bath, the input data is: © Steam temperature, pressure, thermal con- ductivity, density of saturated liquid and vapor, latent heat of vaporizadon, saturated liquid viscosity and specific heat. GASHTRSTM For steam heat exchangers flowing gas. In addition to the data required for LIQHTR.STM, the following are also required: © Inlet pressure. © Gas critical temperature and pressure, spe- cific heat, specific gravity and thermal conductivity. Example curves follow for typical condi- tions. Surface Well Testing Page 2-51OOO! X dd - 3LVv¥ MOTs ainoIn coos osz oz 8330930; OE +... §338030:0L0 3330930:09 7 ova! ASINI vacua $a3u030: osa 4 Set = due, weg Bisd 000s = sseug 19)U SOUBUOLad Je}e9} jeONWe100UN) 00580 = DITDS enh Oe! oe 00"! 060 08'0 Opt 001 Xx wal L310 3 930 - 5,000 2mm BIU/HR Gas Fired (Liquid Flow) Page 2-52 Surface Well Testing0000000! X g3oS - 3LvY MO14s SVD rc StL: LSC Se@z@—sNs SL @N3L LBW! EvaHadd 4 $8. = dwa, weg SAINI NG +... 5338930:0L0 S33uO3d!09 Bazvoad‘oso } isd 00S = Sseld 19]U] QOUPLUIOPOd 19]89}] [BDNe100U os‘! ser 6€ss'0 = SVD OS oso 060 z oc ov O01 X 4 930 - dN3L L371NO 5.000 2mm BTU/HR Gos Fired (Gas Flow) Page 2-53 Surface Well TestingO1 XxX e QS9SWW - 3Lby MD14 suo ess 00°35 esh eern ese 9a°s ese e272 esl SdH3L LBINI LW3H3d, corsster Beal St Nur “184 x? hh +e Eh wet ota A otey =dwet weg Sisd 000s = said 191UI 00s9°0 = svD DS eoueuoped JaBueyoxy jeoy weal jeonesooyL os Steam Heat Exchanger (Gas Flow) 54 Page 2. Surface Well TestingSeparators A separator is a pressure vessel used for separating well fluids produced from oil and gas wells into gaseous and liquid components. An oil and gas separator generally includes the following essential components and features. 1) A vessel that includes: a. primary separation device and/ar section b. secondary “gravity” settling section c. mist extractor to remove small liquid particles from the gas d. gas outlet €. liquid settling section to remove gas from oil and/or separate oil and warer f. oiloutlet 8 water outlet 2) Adequate volumetric liquid capacity to handle liquid surges 3) Adequate vessel diameter and length to allow most of the liquid to separate from the gas without carryover 4) A means to control oil and water levels - liquid controller and diaphragm cantral valve 5) A back pressure controller and valve on the gas outlet to maintain a steady pressure in the vessel 6) Pressure relief devices Oil and gas separators can operate at pressures ranging from a high vacuum to 5,000 psi. Most separators operate in the pressure range of 20 to 1,500 psi. Separators may be referred to as low, intermediate, and high pressure. Low-pressure vessels usually operate at pressures ranging from 10 to 225 psi. Medium-pressure separators usually operate at pressure ranges of 230 to 700 psi. High-pressure vessels generally operate in the pressure range from 750 to 1,500 psi. Oil and gas separators can have three general configurations: horizontal, vertical, and spherical. ‘The different configurations are available for two- and three-phase operation. In the two-phase units, gas is sega)! trom ths liquid werh the gas and liquid being sii "sargec! separately. tn three-phase separators, well fi! is separate imu gas, oil, and water with the thre2 2:7 discherged seztécstelv, Some units may be two s vr “cnsistin: of a hight pressure two-phase vessel and a lus rs, :supe three-phase vessel used in conjunction. Variations of Separators and Functions: 1) Separator - Conventional, handles highest instantaneous flow 2) Trap - same as separator 3) Knockout vessel - removes one component (H20, liquid, sand) 4) Flash chamber - low pressure, second or third stage 5) Expansion vessel - first stage on low-temp separator unit ©) Scrubber - similar w separator, handles Quid w/ less liquid 7) Filter - dry type scrubber, removes dust, scale, rust Surface Well Testing Page 2-55‘The table below shows a comparison of the “absolute” guide but affords a relative compari- advantages and disadvantages of horizontal, son of the various features of the different types vertical spherical oil and gas separators, two- _of separators over the full range of types, sizes and three-phase. This table is not intended as an and working pressures. Comparison of Horizontal, Vertical, and Spherical Separators CONSIDERATIONS HORIZONAL* VERTICAL SPERICAL, MONOTUBE MONOTUBE ONE COMPARTMENT 1, Efficiency of Separation 1 2 3 2. Stabilization of Separated 1 2 3 Liquids 3, Adaptabitity o varying 1 2 3 conditions (such as “heading” Now) 4, Flexibility of operation 2 1 3 (such as adjustment of liquid level ‘3. Capacity (Same diameter) 1 2 3 6. Cost per unit capacity 1 2 3 7 Ability to handle foreign 3 1 2 e material 8. Ability to handle foaming 1 2 3 oi 9. Adaptability to portable 1 3 2 use 10. Space for installation 1 3 2 Vertical plane Horizontal piant 3 1 2 11. Base of installation 2 3 1 12, Ease of inspection and 1 3 2 maintenance 13, Handling low API gravity 3 1 2 and LP oil 14, Handling gas/condensate 2 3 1 production 1 - Most favorable, 2- Intermediate, 3 - Least favorable. For overall operations, the comparison favors the horizontal separator, but separator performance depends vn lke e internals, associated accessories, plus the type well to be tested. *Table from Petroleum Production Handbook, Vol. 1, Thomas C. Frick, Editor-in-Chief, Society of Petroleum Engi- neers of AIME, Dallas, Texas. Surface Well Testing Page 2.56Main Functions of Oil and Gas Separators Removal of Liquid from Gas Separation of liquid from gas begins as the fluid flows to lower pressures through the formation into the wellbore and progressively increases through the tubing, flow lines, and surface handling equipment. Under certain conditions the fluid may be completely separated into liquid and gas before the oil and gas separa- tor is reached. In such cases, the separator affords only an ‘enlargement’ to permit gas ascent to one outlet and liquid descent to another for sampling and measurement. In other words, the oil and gas separator may perform only the function of providing space in which final separation is accomplished by density difference of the liquid and gas. Mist Extractors Residual liquid in the form of mist can be effectively removed from the gas stream in an oil and gas separator by a well-designed mist extractor. However, condensible vapors in the gas cannot be removed by mist extractors. Condensation of these vapors due to reduction of temperature, may occur after the gas has been discharged from the separator. This existence of condensed liquid in the gas effluent from an oil and gas separator, in many instances, does not necessarily reflect upon the efficiency of the separator. Since condensible vapors may have the characteristics of natural gas when at separa- tor tcmperature and pressure, condensation of these vapors into liquid between liquid and gas may accomplish separation of liquid droplets from a gas stream where the velocity of the stream is slow enough and sufficient time is Oll.ana Gas Separator Difference in densities of the liquid and gaseous hydrocarbons may accomplish accept- able separation in an oil and gas separator However, it is usually necessary to use mechani- cal devices commonly referred to as ‘mist extractors’ to remove liquid mist from the gas before it is discharged from the separator. Also, it may be desirable or necessary to use some means to remove nonsolution gas from the oil before it is discharged from the separator. allowed to accomplish separation. Limiting the gas velocity in a separator may obtain satisfac- tory separation without a mist extractor. How- ever, mist extractors are generally installed in conventional oil and gas separators, to assist in separation and to minimize the amount of liquid (mist) carried out with the gas. Mist extractors can be of many different designs, utilizing one or more of the principles of 1) impingement, 2) change of flow direction, 3) change of velocity, 4) centrifngai force, 5) coalescing packs, and 6) filters. Surface Weil Testing Page £-3/RUPTURE: OUTLET RELIEF DISk PRESSURE VANE MIST A A Aout EXTRACTOR \ WATER OUTLET Separator Piping Schematic Surface Well Testing Page 2-58a SL-L0-ML SOVN Jo suswarnba s29jy_ SL10-WW ADV Jo stuawaynbar sayy, ] (009 - UZ oo-uz | wyeaq | 00 = HZ 009 = Uz ureaq Ost Uy ost-uy | PUPA Ost - Up Ost - Up PUT I (009 = WZ ooo-uz | FING are AL OE = UZ 009 = UZ WUMO 4978 A, 109 - ure oo-me | THRO WO oor - Ee N70 10 009-49 ooo-ur | PEN sep O0E = UF WIN sey | 009 - Uy oo- | vaquy | O0E - Uy fort 1 000'8E amo | TA PPIS ‘1 000" TW3PAL PPIS UL FIT Ur pT [ 13H PPS wt zor TBH PPIs U1 96 1 96 WIPIAA PPS: 1 96 UIPEAA PIS: ‘Ur OOE UL OPT | w8uay pris UL OFT wauay pris I SH SH Ee SH ‘@]A9g I ‘ads 000'07 ada 00's! =| Apedea pmbrT dad 00°01 dad 000'0r Aygedeg pinbry 2 (Gps) ww on (QDs) ww og | Aypedeg sep GDS 87 Gas €¢ pede sey I 18d OFT dot | sanssoug Buyeaedg 18d 009 sd OFT danssoig Bunesado I Tewozoy aseyd ¢ | jewozucy aseyd ¢ | wondyssaq Tewvozpoy eseyd ¢ Feiuocuoy aseud ¢ y ustxarurey [ worxaiursy | aZIS (RS89A BOI X GT Urge Wor € ar urge ! SNOILVOISIO3dS SNOILVOISIOadS Well Testing Separator Specifications Page 2-59 Sus face Well TestingSPECIFICATIONS ] Service HS” Cold Temperature Heater Rating 1,000,000 BTU he Description Working Pressure (coil) 5,000 psi —| Proheat Coils 123yxH. 115.4 sq ft area Postheat Coils 6-3nHl, 79.2 sq ft Separator Gas Volume 25 MMSCE/D Description oi 3,000 BPD Water 2,000 BPD Vessel Dimensions 24 in Dx DHSS Operating Pressure 140 pai Overall Length a 19 6 in Dimensions Width 9ROin Height 99 in Weight 29.000 tb Applicable Separator ASME Sec. VII Div 1 Codes Piping ANSLB313 Overall NACE MR.O1-75 Units DNY. ABS. Lloyds Separator Combination and Specifications Surface Well Testing Page 2-60Impingement If a flowing stream of gas containing liquid mist is impinged against a surface, the liquid ‘mist may adhere to, and coalesce on, the surface. After the mist coalesces into larger droplets the liquid will gravitate to the liquid section of the vessel. If the liquid content of the gas is high, or the mist particles are extremely fine, several successive impingement surfaces may be re- quired to effect satisfactory removal of the mist. Change of Flow Direction When the direction of flow of a gas stream containing liquid mist is changed abruptly, inertia causes the liquid to continue in the origi- nal direction of flow. Separation of liquid mist from the gas is thus effected, since the gas will more readily assume the change of flow direc- tion and continue to flow away from the liquid mist particles. The liquid thus removed may cualesce on a surface, or it may fall directly into the liquid section below. Change of Velocity Separation of liquid and gas is also effected with either a sudden increase or decrease in velocity. Both conditions utilize the difference in inertia of gas and liquid. With a decrease in the velocity of gas, the higher inertia of the liquid mist carries it forward and away from the gas. The liquid may then coalesce upon some surface and gravitate to the liquid section of the separator. With an increase in gas velocity, the higher inertia of the liquid causes the gas to move away from the liquid, and the liquid may fall to the liquid section of the vessel, which shows one version of a vane-type mist extractor used in oil and gas separators to remove liquid from gas. Centrifugal Force If a gas stream carrying liquid mist flows in a circular motion at sufficiently high velocity, centrifugal force throws the liquid mist outward against the walls of the container or element. Here it coalesces into progressively larger droplets and finally gravitates to the liquid section below. Centrifugal force is one of the most effective methods of separating liquid mist from gas. Efficiency of this method increases as the velocity of the gas stream increases. The figure on 2-55 contains a centrifugal- type mist extractor used in vertical oil and gas separators. The radial vanes cause a circular motion of the gas, and the resulting centrifugal force throws heavier liquid particles to the wall of the vessel where they coalesce into drops large enough to drain from the mist extractor element. ‘Small centrifugal-force-type mist extractors have been inserted in small-diameter (4 to 12 in.) vessels, and these “separators” have handled relatively large volumes of gas. This type of separator (or scrubber) is used in scrubbing gas in gas gathering transmission, and distribution systems. However, a small-diameter vessel usually is not practical for use on oil and gas producing wells as the primary separator because of the possibility that the small vessel may be filled with a “slug” or “head” of liquid and cause the liquid to flow out the gas line. ‘Therefore, a larger conventional separator vessel should be used to separate well fluids because miniature vessels may cause trouble by “overloading” with liquid. Coalescing Packs Coalescing packs afford an effective means of separating and removing liquid mist from a stream of gas. One of their most appropriate uses is the removal of liquid mist from gas in transmission and distribution systems. Coalescing packs can be made of Berl saddles, Raschig rings, knitted wire mesh, and other such materials. The packs imply a combi- nation of impingement, change of direction, change of velocity, and centrifugal force in separating and removing liquid mist from gas. ‘These. packs provide a large surface area for collection an coalescence of the liquid mist. A word of caution is appropriate concerning the use of coalescing packs in oil and gas separa- tors for general field use. Coalescing packs may be made of fragile material which can be dam- aged during transit or installation if they are Surface Well Testing Page 2-6?installed in manufacturing shop prior to ship- ‘ment to point of use. Knitted wire mesh may foul or plug from paraffin deposition aid other foreign material and thus make a separator which utilizes this material inoperative after a short period of service. Even though coalescing packs are very effective in removing liquid mist from gas, itis usually preferred to use vane-type mist extrac- tors for oil and gas separators because they may be used under widely varying conditions. The use of coalescing type mist extractors, because of their “fouling” tendency, is appropriately restricted to gas scrubbers used in gas gathering, transmission, and distribution systems, Filters Porous filters have proven effective in removing liquid mist from gas in certain applica- tions. In effect, the porous material strains or filters the liquid mist trom the gas. In addition, the porous material may utilize the principles of impingement, change of flow direction, and change of velocity to accomplish separation of the: liquid mist fram the gas. Pressure drop through mist extractors used in separators should be as low as possible and still maintain maximum separating efficiency. Gen- erally speaking, filter-type mist extractors will have the highest pressure drop per unit volume of capacity and the coalescing type will have the lowest. Pressure drop through the other types of mist extractors will range hetween these two. extremes, Removal of Gas from Liquid Most crude oils are saturated with natural gas at reservoir pressure and temperature. The physical and chemical characteristics of the oil and its conditions or pressure and temperature determine the amount of gas it will contain in solution. The rate at which the gas is liberated from a given oil is a function of change in pressure and temperature. The volume of gas that an oil and gas separator will remove from ciude vil is dependent upon (1) physival and chemical characteristics of the crude, (2) operat- ing pressure, (3) operating temperature, (4) rate, (6) size and configuration of the separator, and other factors. Fluid rates and liga sc des in the separator determine the ‘retention’ or ‘settling,’ time of the oil. Retention time of from 1 to 3 minutes is generally adequate to obtain satisfactory separa- tion of crude oil and gas unless foaming oil is being handled. When separating foamy oil, retention time should be increased to 5 to 20+ minutes, dependant upon the stability of the foam and on the design of the separator. Im- provement in field processing systems and Productions procedures, such as electronic metering, emphasize the need for complete removal of non-solution gas from the oil. Agita- tion, special baffling, coalescing packs, and filtering elements assist in removing nonsolution gas that otherwise may be retained in the oil because of viscosity and surface tension of the oil. METHODS USED TO REMOVE GAS FROM OIL (LIQUID) With a steady demand for natural gas and the widespread reliance on metering of liquid hydro- carbons and for other reasons it is important to remove all non-solution gas from the oil. Re- moval of gas from oil can be accomplished in several ways. Settling Gas not in solution will separate from oil if the oil is allowed to settle in a sufficient length of time. To increase retention time for a fixed liquid rate requires an increase in the size of the vessel or an increase in liquid depth in the separator. Increasing the depth of oil in the separator may not result in increased emission of nonsolution gas from the oil because “stacking up” of the oil may tend to prevent the nonsolution gas from emerging from the oil. ‘The weir maintains the oil level and the interface controller maintains the water level. ‘The oil is skimmed over the weir and the level Of the oil downstream of the weir is controlled by alevel controller that operates the oil dump valve. Surface Well Testing Page 2-62GAS OUT t [SSC PRESSURE. <> RELIEF ¥v PsECTION aa MST EXTRACTOR (LET SeparaToe NO DEGASSING ELEMENT FLUID Ww iL ouT an A1ivO 3H1 JI O3S43A3H 3a NVD W37BOUd 3HL “ONINVOSNON SIN0°E ——_ yonwuvaas 31 40 HAL avi “O/SWW 12 FIONVH Tim ISd SZ Av ONILVU34O “ONIOV3LNON ONY AGW3LS UV S3IVH MOT "2 AHL JTVH-3NO NUH vdivaUO ‘NIG. JO H1d3d GINOIT V HLIA kOLVEVd3S SVD “ViSd ZbI GNY 4009 LY G3UNSVAN SANIT I0A 1 ‘SH1d30 GINO HOd 0350 38 QNV lO WANOZIHOH ISd-S2I AB L401 AG Neb? ¥ "NO G3S¥8 SI ALIDYdYD SYD LON GNOHS BAYND SIL !310N AVI “Y-b2/ JOSWW 'SHOLVYYAIS SVD ONY “HO TWINOZHOH 40 ALOVdYD SvO seb Se Os a1 ssey se ogoa.0 syospo sco sco ‘off ov] o¢ sz ore: ai [ca] odos| ov] ocez oz 1 or peopecdsdord oro] ozo sio_10 0608 cal [ou bore oz a3) 09 aunssaud NoIS3ad ze any 00 NI woivawd3s H1g30 gino ‘Gos Capacity of Horizontal Cll and Gas Separators Page 2-68 Surface Well Testingsueqeno py *d10,) jusudindg Ousee2.01g pun Ouss2}2 Jf 119 fo Asa1m0y) -s1oVeINdos EHS puT Ho [BUOZUOY Jo KoMdRD pI ‘Ga¥IND3Y SI ‘MIB 40 HId3d GINOIT v HLIM eOLWaYd3S SVD ONY “lO WLNOZIHOH ‘Ni-b2 "BLANINT JO 3WIL NOILNIL3Y ¥ HLL 110 30 0/8 00b'2 FIONYH OL "HO “SLONIW | 40 WL NOLLNSLIY W KLIN, 0/8 OOb'2 JIGNYH Tim ‘NIB 30 Hid3¢ INcI W HILIM YOLWUYd3S TWINOZINOH 13-01 48 OO Ni-be v AVG 2U-t2/788 ‘SHOLVYYASS SVD ONY “10 TWLNOZIYOH 40 ALIDvdv OINOIT ‘ocovo! ‘od91 900'9 ooo'e 998 001 ‘0006 0002 'B| O00'»| 060" 0001 box 905] ‘OOF 002 Osi COLOR. 09 I OF OZ “JYON HO S31NNIW SOL OASV3HIN 38 OL BAH AVIN BILL NOLLNIL3Y SWvOs WIL NOLINIL3H O3QNIWHIONI MINI BHT ONINUTL, "USHOIH YO IdWes¢ JO ALIAWYD “WO SQNO23S OF = ISd OOI'! WAAC $QNO93S OS = ISd 0OTI-009 TLONIN | = ISd OC9-O. J 4401 JO H19N37 173HS 853.1 HO NSSOS 49 ALSOISIA Bor “INIOc_UNOd 3AOBY 39 LSAW Tio 4O Jun WHHL ONIFIVOINON, Swi HOLA) IY 1 € $I Alva) O1NON" of a hay Ota 96 _ NIT3SSaA, AWINOZHOH Nt H1d3d_ainor e 2 bit on Ge 22 £08 9€ Go wcIvevd3s Liquid Capacity of Horizontal Oil and Gas Separators Page 2-09 Surface Well Testing(Copsey ‘uopmoy “ds0) juawdsndy Oursesr044 pur OUL27 FY 110 fo Mea}1N0) “NMONM Juv aunssaud ONDUOM ONY BNNIOA xtIVa BHI 41 O3SHaN3N 39 NYO WA TBO SHL “O/J9SWW 28 JO ALIdvdYD Y SUH SISd COZ Iv ONILWYadO YovEWd;S SVD ONY “WO TVIILY3N Isd-OOO' AB 1401 AB “NiO2 v “S10 }UsEdos 683 pus [> [wo JA yo Syoudes ev.) “SW 9 01 NVHL SS37 ‘LAO! SI} HLONI1 “13H “be 3 THM Y3A0-ABuYD GINO! Z ‘ONINWOSNON SI10 “ALIAWED 21519345 $90 SI Sv9'9. ‘QNIGVIHNON “Bunivaaanat, ‘ONY AQVaLS Jay SL MOTH 2 BIVUOAH 3noRy SI SUNLTERIML 'S ISd Zot ONY 4009 AY G3UNSUAN SINIMOA ‘I AVA 44-b2//P5WA “SUCLUEYAAS SVD ONY TIO WILYIA JO ALIDVdYD SvO __'NO GSAS! Al1Oviva SvO. ° 35g, ‘os 1,24 8 680.959 G0. oc0 Ontoror os os on stoc sz_oz st oolfoaorosos ov of cz v2 51 Abad eo BoE 29 oslo O17 Bunssaed ‘NL ‘NSIS30_-GO aOLvaNd 3S Gas Copacity of Vertical Oil and Gas Separators Page 2-70 Surface Well Testing929, ‘uomnoH “ding maudyidgy Outeed20/q pun Ouri9}2 Jy [10 fo Meaney) “eioyeiNdes FeB pure [fo [821294 Jo Ayoudw pinbry “words ‘0341038 St 1430 OINOIT-‘NI-O€ 40, NO1S3q towxa No sNON3430 ‘ANIOd Nd 3AOGY WHIM 135530 ALOE W184 0004 SI aurceaee — MOMVENIS IO MAL aNvIG SUL Saiigd 38 SAW TO 40 SUNIMEIANSL y ONDWOM SHL ONY “HOLvUNd’S V NI GSIONUH 3B GiNONS YolvevsaS NI HIcaO GINO ‘Z WO ONIRVOINON *€ 04 SI SLONIW 1 40,3. NOLLNS1 34 V ONIINGAY 10 ‘40-078 002'2 i HO “SANNIW | 30 SWIL NOUNSI aN 9837 YO NSS OS 40 ALISODSIA “9 ‘MO14 ONIGYIHNON AQUaIS % (uv 935) waz anveud YHA 0/8 OOL2 FIONVH TW H1d3G GINO —“YBHOIH YO IdveSE 4 ALIAVHD WO “SAG GIIVAIGNE WIL NOINSL3H ‘NOE V HIM HOLWHYdIS ISd OOO AB 14-01 A N-OF V AVG M-b2/788 “SHOIVEVEIS SVD GNY-T10 WIHLYIA 40 ALINE GINO 00%001 coves _codz oxd'o! ‘900"» “a00'z| Coot Baufo0s] oor 00% | C108 09 ovor oz a BNI7 ONINGAL- No G3SV8 3uV S3ILI2vav9 ainor 9 OO Gos c0e009 doy OF! BYOW YO S3LNNIW OL G3SV3¥ONI 3B OL SAV AVW BALL NOLIN3L3Y SHVOS 1D dl *310N SONODIS OF = IS OO! ¥3A0 SGN093S 0g = Sd 0001-009 BINNIN 1 = ISd008-0 WIL NOLLN3L38 O30N3WWOT34 WHHININ a @ o te. 2 w * st —~14 i wz 09 M a a eoivayd3s at woivayeas “WOHLM IA Nrudaad ‘anor Liquid Capactty of Vertical Cil and Gas Separators Page 2-/1 ‘Surjace Well TestingSafety Features for Oil and Gas Separators Generally speaking, oil and gas separators are installed at relatively remote distances from other valuable lease equipment. However, where they are installed on offshore platforms or in close proximity (sited in a zone 1) to other equipment, it is important that precautions be taken to prevent damage to surrounding equip- ment and personne! in event of failure of the separator, its controls, or accessories. The following safety features can be provided on nearly all standard oil and gas separators. High and Low Pressure Controls High/low pressure controls are installed on Separators to prevent excessively high or low pressures from interfering with normal opera- tions. These high/low pressure controls can be mechanical, pneumatic, or electric and can sound a warning, actuate a shut-in valve, open a bypass, or perform other pertinent functions to protect the separator and surrounding equipment. Safety Relief Valves A spring-loaded of pilot operated safety relief valve is installed on all oil and gas separa- tors to relief an unsafe high vessel pressure. They normally are set at the design working pressure of the vessel. In many arcas the relicf valves require calibration and certification by a third party. Safety relief valves should be large enough to handle the full rated capacity of the separator. ‘souR00N rua. Peeeire seine PLY PANEL cursus siowan Pressure increases inside the Bourdon tube. have a straightening effect on its shape. This movement of the Bourdon tube is lransmitted to te inp arm. It pressure ‘changes are significant, the trlowire (at the @nd of the trip arm) will unseat one of the pilot valves. The unseated nlot valve s designed to exhaust the output signal, causing a pressure differential across the disk type ‘check vaive, which will block the supply Pressure. The block and bieeding of a signal pressure is designed to cause the safety vaive to close. ange i ome ee snr she In Soie opmatne DS HI and LO Pressure Monitor Pilot Swface WelTesting Page 2.72Safety Heads or Rupture Disks The safety head or rupture disk is a device containing a thin metal membrane that is de- signed to rupture when pressure in the vessel reaches a predetermined vaiue. This is usually from 110% to 125% of the design working pressure of the vessel. The safety head is usually selected so that it will not rupture unui atter the safety relief valve has opened or is incapable of preventing exces- sive pressure buildup in the separator. Do not operate an oil and gas separator without a prop- erly sized and installed safety head or rapture disk. UL: at Set eee ir iw ase Chace (Gisea by Sten Satety Relief Valve Rupture Disks Surface Well Testing Page 2-75SYSTEMS ENGINEERING BULLETIN Ne Report No. S92-01 Pressure Relief Line Requirements Purpose ‘The purpose of this bulletin is to clarify the pressure relief line requirements of HIRS surface pressur- ized vessels. Guidelines for relief line flow capacities are included to assist the field locations in designing proper surface equipment packages. ‘The HRS Surface Equipment Engineering Standards conform to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code (ASME B&PV), API RP 520, and API RP 521. Relief Requirements ‘The ASME B&PV Code eubsection UG-133 requires that “the aggregnte capacity of the pressure relieving devices connected to any vessel or systems of vessels for the release of liquid, air, steam, or other vapor shall be sufficient to carry off the maximum quantity that can be generated or supplied to the. vessel.” In a weil test sccnario, the maximum flow rate to the vessel is not known beforchand and is only estimated. Therefore, the vessel and relief system are designed to a predetermined flow capacity: In order to stay within the code safety requirements, the equipment must not be used beyond this predetermined capac- ity. For example, our standard 48-in. x 10-ft separator has a rated maximnm gas capacity of 80 million scf/ D. This means thar the relief system for this vessel must have the capacity to flow 80 million scf/D, and this vessel must not be used to process more than 80 million scf/D. ‘The capacity of the relief valve must be matched to the flow rate capacity of the relief'line. Relief valves are provided with a replaceable seat/orifice that allows the valve flow rate capacity to be adjusted. If this orifice is not properly sized, the relief line or the pressure vessel can be overpressurized. For example, a 3-in, inlet x 4-in. outlet pressure relief valve set at 1,440 psig can flow in excess of 100 million scf/D through an API L size orifice. Figures 1-5 illustrate the difficulty in designing a relief Hine-to handle this flow rate. Downstream Flanges Most of our 48-in, x 10-ft separators have been provided with a 3-in. x 4-in. pressure relief valve with 600-Ib inlet and 150-Ib outlet ANSI flanges. For the most common carbon steels, 600-Ib class ANSI flanges have a maximum allowable working pressure (MAWP) of 1,480 psig, and 150-Ib class ANSI flanges have a MAWP of 285 psig for operating termperarures below 100° F. [Reprovaie] pane 1 WEL] Page 1 of 12SYSTEMS ENGINEERING BULLETIN Date: February 15, 1992 Report No. S92-01 ‘The 150-Ib flange has a pressure rating ot 285 psig, which limits on the downstream pressure available to drive flow through the relief piping. Figure | shows the flow rate capacity for various relief fine lengths for systems using 150-Ib flanges on the relief valve oulet. These lengths are total equivalent line lengths starting from the relief valve outlet. For example, if the equivalent line length from the relief valve outlet to the exit is 100 feet of 4-in. schedule 80 piping, then the relief line capacity is 40 million scf/D. Equivalent line iength is a convenient method of calculating the effects of deviation from straight pipe. Table 1 shows the equivalent line length of many common valves and fittings. For example, a 4-in. short radius ell has the equivalent flow resistance of 7 feet of +-in, piping. The cumulative effect of fittings usually has a significant effect on the piping capacity. For high gas ratings. it is very difficult to install a relief line that will stay below the 285 psig 150-Ib class flange ratings; therefore, we are upgrading the relief valve specified on all new HRS separazors. The new requirement for all pressure relief valves is that the exit flange and the inlet flange must be of the same ANSI class rating. For our example, with our 48-in. x 10-ft separator, we have changed to 600-Ib ANSI flanges on both the inlet and exit side of the valve. In this configuration, the pressure available-to drive the relief flow through the piping can be as high as the critical downstream pressure. ‘The critical downstream pressure is the highest pressure that does not affect the flow rate through the relief valve orifice. If the downstream pressure (which is dependant on the flow resistance-of thedown— stream piping) is above the critical pressure, then the flow rate through the relief valve will be reduced. A good rule of thumb for calculating downstream critical pressure is to use 1/2 of the upstream pressure: The exact value of the critical pressure ratio can be calculated from the ratio of specific heats far the-vxpar in question. Figure 2 shows the relief line flow rate capacity for various relief line lengths for retieé systems using 600-Ib flanges on the relief valve outlet. As in Figure 1, these lengths are also equivalent linedengths starting from the relief valve outlet. In Figure 2. if the equivalent line length from the relief valve-outiet to the exit is 100 feet of 4-in. schedule 80 piping, the relief line capacity is approximately 90 millionracf/D. Depending on location, the relief line may need to be vented to the end of the boom. Figures 3 and 4 show the relief line flow rate ezpacity for various relief line lengths prior to the boom. These-figures include the flow capacity reduction of the boom relief piping. Figure 3 shows the flow rate capacity based.on 150-Ib downstream flanges on the relief valve, and Figure 4 on 600-Ib downstream flanges on the relief valve, Page 2 of 12SYSTEMS ENGINEERING BULLETIN Date: February 15, 1992 Report No. S92-01 ‘Surface Equipment Effects of Choked Flow ‘The configuration of the vent line exit will effect the relief flow capacity. The maximum velocity of 2 compressible fluid in a pipe is limited by the speed of sound (sonic velocity) in the fluid. Sonic velocity decreases when the pressure of the fluid decreases. The maximum velocity occurs in the downstream end of a constant cross-diameter pipe since the pressure falls off and the velocity increases as the fluid proceeds downstream. If the pressure drop is sufficiently high, the exit velocity will reach the speed of sound. Further de- crease in the downstream pressure will not be felt upstream because the pressure wave can only travel at sonic velocity; therefore, the “signal” will never translate upstream. This condition is commanly referred to as sonic or choked flow. The “surplus” pressure drop obtained by lowering the outlet pressure below this critical pressure will take place beyond the end of the pipe. This surplus pressure is lost in shock waves and turbulence of the vent fluid. Choked flow will increase the back pressure in the relief line. Figure 5 shows the maximum flow rates for vent tip exits up to 18 inches in diameter operating in subsonic (nonchoked) flow conditions. These flow rates are the maximum that can be achieved for constant diameter discharge pipes without significant. pressure drops at the exit tip. ‘The relatively low flow rates versus pipe diameters in Figure 5 illustrate that it is generally not practi- cal to achieve the desired subsonic flow at the relief exit. In Figures 1-4, the effects of the pressure disconti- niuity ot the relief exit have been included calculating the capacity of the relicf lines. Mustrating the tip effects, Figures 6 and 7 show the pressure drops at the exit tip for sonic flow conditions. The discharge of a pressure relief system will impose a reaction force on the discharge-piping as a resallt of the flowing fluid. This reactive force mast be accounted for in the desiga and installation of relict piping anchors. If the pressure relief valve docs not operate for mechanical reasons, rupture discs are'an excellent backup. However, the flow capacity for rupture Uiscs should not be included in the relief valve flow capaci- ties because the downstream pressure caused by the relief valve flow in the common relief manifolding reduces the differential pressure across the rupture disc and delays the rupture disc operation. The only times when the flow capacity for the rupture discs can be included are when the ruptare dise will burst at a pressure lower than the relief valve sewing and {tis free from backpressure, or When the rupture disc and relief valves have completely separate exit lines. Page 3 of 12 ai SYSTEMS ENGINEERING BULLETIN Report No. S92-01 Summary A partial summary of the relief line flow requirements is as follows: © The pressure relief vaive(s) must be capable of flowing at the design flow rate of the well test package. ¢ The relief vaive(s) flanges must be rated for the downstream pressure. © The downstream piping must be of sufficient diameter for the well test package design flow rate and line configuration. © The effects of choked flow at the relief line exit must be included in the relief system design. © To prevent excessive backpressure. all components downstream of the relief valve-mmst have a greater flow capacity than the relief valve when operating under the same flow conditions. If you have questions about the venting requirements or if you require assistance in designing a proper relief system for a given application, please feel free to call call me at (214) 418-4412. Page 4 of 12SYSTEMS ENGINEERING | So Date: February 15, 1992 Figure 1 - 150% Flanges Relat Une Flow Capecides (MMSCFD) vs Equivalent Line Langth (tt! . x » tow | Caoscty (eAMSCFOI ; Maximum Upstream Pressure for 1508 Flanges (285 PSIG MAWP) O18 39 Gente = 1-00) “60 degrees = Vent To Atmosonene Conatdon Page 5 of 12MRS SYSTEMS ENGINEERING cs BULLETIN Se Report No. $92-01 Figure 2 - 600# Flanges Relat Line Flow Capacities (MMSCFD) vs Equivalent Line Length (ft)i SYSTEMS ENGINEERING | BULLETIN Se Date: February 15, 1992 Report No. S92-01 Figure 3 - 150# Flanges Vented to End of 60’ Boom Ralief Line Flow Capacities (MMSCFD) va Equivalent Line Length (ft) { Page 7 of 12ASRS SYSTEMS ENGINEERING | a> BULLETIN Ne | Date: February 15, 1992 Report No. S92-01 Figure 4 - 600# Flanges Vented to End of 60° Boom Reliet Line Flaw Capacities (MMSCFD) vs Equivalent Line Length (ft)nara on SYSTEMS ENGINEERING BULLETIN Ne Date: February 15, 1992 Figure 5 - Subsonic Vent Tip Rates 70 Flow Co . ;—|_| Rate (MMSCFD) 0 re 20 2 pif || ‘0 +} |_| 1 °G rl 7 s 10 1z 1 18 ‘Vent Tip Inner Olamecer {in} Mec Fw ate WAASCTO) va ver aan Yowacntmmare ro 68 36 Gants) 30 80 deo Page 9 of 12Js. SYSTEMS ENGINEERING BULLETIN Ne Date: February 15, 1992 ‘Surtace Equipment Figure 6 Vent Tip Sonic Pressure Orops versus Flow Rate | Page 10 of 12SYSTEMS ENGINEERING BULLETIN Date: February 15, 1992 Report No. S92-01 Figure 7 Vent Tip Sonic Pressure Drops versus Flow Rate a aft cr 73 80 + §.7617 1D Flow Rate (MMSCFD) sch 80- 7.625710 cn 80- 9.564" 1D 11.376" 10 Based on 0.8 SG Gas (k= 1.30) @ 80 degrees F Page 11 of 12ee re ee SYSTEMS ENGINEERING BULLETIN Report No. 92-01 Table 1 Equivalent Length of Vatves and Fitings in Fest er BEER SBS BEE Be Sis 338 3s BEE BES SES seu sue Sut Bes 388 Sth SE ESS eww 53S SEE toe EBS Nea =4o wee Page 12 of 12Production Systems P.O.Box 819052 @ . Dallas, TX 75381-9052 2601 Beltline Rd. Carrollton, TX 75006 Ph. 214-418-4412 HALLIBURTON Deemer gm 7 To: All Surface Well Test Personnel From: Production Systems Engineering - Dallas Date: October 28, 1993 Subject: Rupture Disc Settings The purpose of this bulletin is to specify the rupture disc setting requirements for Halliburton surface test equipment pressurized vessels. This document covers rupture disc assemblies when used as a e secondary relief device. Halliburton Production Systems Engineering Standards conform to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel ‘Code (ASME B&PV) Section VIII Division |. Pressure relief requirements are defined in ASME B&PV code subsections UG-125 through UG-136. ASME B&PV Code subsection UG-134(a) requires that the primary relief device be set at or below the maximum allowable working pressure (MAWP). Additional relief devices may be set to open at higher pressures, but not at a pressure higher than 105% of the MAWP. For example, the maximum pressure settings for a 1440 psi separator with a pressure relief valve and rupture disc are 1440 psi for the relief valve and 1512 psi for the rupture disc. ‘The actual bursting pressure of the rupture disc may be +/- 5% of the stamped bursting pressure. The burst pressure is also affected if the operating temperature is different than the rupture disc stamped temperature. Table | shows the affect of temperature on the burst pressure for BS&B type B rupture discs. Consult the manufacturer for other makes or types. ate If the operating temperature of the vessel is known, the rupture discs can be ordered with burst pressures at that particular temperature rather than the standard 72 deg F. This will minimize or eliminate the temperature effect on the disc burst pressure.For a relief valve set at 100% of MAWP and rupture disc set at 105% of MAWP, the combination of rupture dise burst pressure tolerances, rupture disc temperature affects, and relief valve setting tolerances. may allow the disc to rupture prior to the relief valve opening. ‘The inconvenience of replacing a spent rupture disc may be prevented by setting the relief valve at pressures below the MAWP. For example, setting the relief valve at 95% of MAWP and the rupture dise at 105% of the MAWP would insure that the relief valve would operate before the rupture disc (barring a mechanical failure). E Please sefer to Engineering Dulletin #S92-01 for pressure relicf linc flow requirements. If you have questions regarding either of these two bulletins, please feel free to contact Joe Karigan via MEMO ID HRSW61 or at (214) 418 - 4412.Installation of Safety Devices Alll safety relief devices should be installed as close to the vessel as possible and in such manner that the reaction force from sudden, violent exhausting fluids will not break off, unscrew, or otherwise dislodge the safety device. The discharge from safety devices should not endanger personnel or other equipment. The discharge from a safety device should be open and without restriction. The braced dis- charge line from a safety device should be parallel to a vertical separator and perpendicular toa horizontal one. A valve must not be used upstream or downstream of the safety device because it may be inadvertently closed. Relief lines should be securely anchored to prevent, movement during release of the pressure. Note: At no time should the separator relief line be piped into the separator gas outlet or the tank vent line, ‘Water should not be allowed to accumulate on top of the rupture disc. It could freeze and alter the rupture characteristics of the dia- phragm. The disc should be regularly inspected for damage or corrosion. Relief valves may corrode and leak or may “freeze” in the closed position. They should be checked periodically (usually third party) and replaced if not in good working condition, Maintain Optimum Pressure on Separator For an oil and gas separator to accomplish its functions, pressure must be maintained in the separator so the liquid and gas can be discharged into their respective gathering systems. Pressure is maintained by use of a gas back pressure valve on each separator that controls the pressure on he separaturs, Note: At no time should air be used to displace fluids from the vessel. This could create an explosive mixrure The pressure at which a separator is operated can vary, depending on the degree of separation desired, the producing pressure of the well and the pressure ravry th: ves‘el. ‘The optimum pressure to maintain «a ris that pres- sure which will result in vi: h jh2s! economic yield: the largest liquid volume. ix “-e separator pressure is too high, more liquid will be lost to the gas phase at the tank. If the pressure is too low, many of the light hydrocarbon components will not be stabilized into the liquid at the sepa- rator and will be lost to the gas phasc. In dealing with a production environment, the more stages of separation after the initial separation, the more the light components will be stabilized into the liquid phase. However, the economics of the improvements become negli- gible after a certain number of stages. In order to maintain pressure on a separator a liquid seal must be effected in the lower portion of the vessel. This liquid seal prevents loss of {gas out the liquid line. This requires a liquid- level controlicr and a valyc to maintain a con- stant level in the separator. Pressure Control ‘The pressure in the separator is maintained by a Fisher Wizard pressure controller. By use of a bourdon tube, flapper, nozzle arrangement, the pressure controller senses changes in the separator pressure and sends a output signal to either open or close the back pressure valve accordingly. By controlling the rate at which the gas leaves the vessel the pressure is controlled. ‘The back pressure valve is a normally open valve and must open when there is insufficient instrument gas (air). Use the correct valve trim and material for whatever pressure, temperature, and type of service being operated in. Make sure all sealing surfaces are clean and capable of seating. Be sure you use the correct grease for the liquid vonuul and the type of application, through the liquid dump valve, which is regu- lated hy a level controller. ‘The Jevel controller senses change in the liquid level and controls the dump valve accordingly. The most common form of controller is displacer float activated. ‘The oil/water control valves are normally closed Surface Well Testing Page 2-74valves and must close when there is insufficient back of most controllers. This prevents moisture instrument gas (air). If using a Fisher Level-trol, from accumulaung in the case and pressure check the range of Bourdon tube, reset bellows _ build-up inside the case. LEAVE THIS HOLE and action compatability with valve top-works. | OPEN and check it periodically to see that it does not become clogged. ‘There is a vent that has a screen on it on the ‘cousranr surrcy evens ‘Senseo, ‘PRESSURE PROPORTIONAL VALVE Senseo KORDNG GEER Norrie a CSDPaSStne CEDURE Shee Cerne Type 657 Fisher Ward Pressure Controller and Valve, Surface Well Testing Page 2-73oe ave —— ee (ED) sorry emessune [Ed ovreur pressune (5 nezte pnassune IMME Proromnonas pressure 5 emnser Direct Acting, Right Hand Mounted, 2500-249/2598 Series Controlier/ Transmitter and Valve. Surface Well Testing Page 2-76| { 1 . i. Poe { i wean een rds Flow Control Processes Taw maasume | ABEATION OF TEST INHERENT CHARACTERISTIC. ‘wane stnal WME | rae mangeet Few | Satara Pom nt Udeeteeees ELEMENT Set Point “rth Increamng Lond veers ow cane Pere Tn@vonte’ fnew | oa Pwrcarnoe ot wae peer nGvaeee” om Save | covmeconige | tovahecenepe Pressure Control Systems id Lever Systems. aaa ieee ‘omen a sib ct epee ee Ibert [ate] Hamar = aE | oe = ee ceetne itaeaeet Lh Gotan aes oe ra ier] Reece ncenrguane arash aaa Seether erent leer eee Se ranneoen oa rao | Ges Process, Large volume. Decraseng BP win | Equal Percentage | Reetiae icchiennenian cen ee Valve Trim’ Surface Well Testing Page 2.77Gas Supply Gas supply is regulated by a Fisher 67AFR usually downstream of a Fisher 630 Big Joe. ‘The Big Joe is the primary regulator that drops the pressure of the separator supply gas from possibly 1440 psig to approximately 100 psig for the gas-fired heater controls and/or the 67AFR controller supply. A type 67 AER instrament regulator is installed near the back of the each controller, It is suitable for inlet pressure of 25 psig to 250 psig. The regulator should be set at 20 psig supply pressure when the controller output pressure range is 3 to 15 psig. For a 6 to 30 psig output pressure range, the regulator should be set to supply 35 psig. On the regulators observe the flow arrow and ensure the regulator is installed in the flow path in the correct direction. Be sure the pressure range of the regulator is as required. Always make sure the body and the orifice are clean, If the gas contains any H,S then it can not be used to operate the control systems, An external source of air or propane must be used. If space is confined, such as an offshore location com- pressed air should certainly be considered as the instrument air supply. vatve PLus [EE meer pressure [J ouner pnessune 630 Regulator, Sectional View Surface Well Testing Page 2-7867AF and AFR Regulator Assemblies Sight Glasses Sight glasses and sight glass valves should be for the correct pressure and temperature rating. Checking the levels is important when starting up the separator. If there is any doubt as to whether the level indicators are clean, they must be cleaned. The following procedure is recommended. a) Remove top plug. b) Fill sight glass with diese! ©) Clean inside with bottle brush or rag d) Drain through bottom bleed valve ©) Replace top plug £) Donot dismantle sight glass unless it is impossible to clean properly by above method and spare glasses, etc. are immedi- ately available. Oil Meters Considerations in the selection of the liquid ‘meters include: 1) Operating conditions - Pressure, flow rates, temperature, amount of abrasives » ) Space availability 3) Properties of liquid - Viscosity, density, vapor pressure, corrosiveness 4) Parts and service availability Ball and Floco Flow meters should be proved and calibrated before cach usc. Make sure the correct gears and register are used. ‘There should be no broken gear teeth, broken shafts or debris in the case. Make sure the rotor assembly and parts are free from calcium carbonate deposits and parts are not wom. Be sure you have the correct design of meter for the pressures, flows and velocities it may be subjected to. ‘When the meter does not register, first determine if the readout device is at fault. ‘Check that the readout device has been properly installed. Surface Well Testing Page 2-79‘The Floco operates by positive displacement. All liquid passing through the meter must first fill a rotor segment prior to rotation and exit. The rotor rotations are magnetically coupled to a gear driven register. Gear teeth ratios provides the means of calibrating the rutur rotations to the correct volume indication. Flocos, normally accurate, are highly susceptible to debris and gas damage. Avoid passing any fluid besides a clean single-phase liquid through the meter. The Ball operates by the principle of vortex velocity. The velocity of the fluid passing the rotor provides its rotation, A septum (lower section plate) and calibration plug permits adjustment of fluid volume allowed to pass by the rotor. Deposits or restrictions in the up- stream line or in the meter bore will increase fluid velocity which will result in higher read- ings. Examples are oversized gaskets in the upstream couplings or a foreign object lodged under the meter septum. BRIDGE SRIDGE SEALS PIAS ge Up tzzzaaad Floco| VORTEX GHAMBER M CALIBRATOR PLUG METER HOUSING Ball Meter Surface Well Testing Page 2-80Turbine Meter Today most liquid measurement is done by turbine meters because of its simplicity. A turbine meter is a flow rate measi which has a rotating element that senses the velocity of the flowing liquid. The liquid causes the turbine rotor to rotate at a velocity proportional to the volumetric flow. ‘The movement of the rotor is normally sensed magnetically and electronically registered. uring device Care should be taken not to allow gas 0 blow through a turbine meter. MODEL MC-IT FLOW ANALYZER TOTAL RATE (BPO) SSSEES NOMA wa row ‘CALBRATION ‘oureuT METER FACTOR FREQUENCY ‘Sze BP (PUSESGALI (PULSES@m _(PULSESSEC) 25.250, 3.000 3.435 1625 “aS w 55 3.000 7 730 33060 700-1600 7600 2 200. 550 _ara7O VOT TO 70 230 725 "a 1180 80-1000 sv 8000 30 a 0 2 Zease 2108 109 TaN no = we Es Turbine Meter and MC II Surface Well TestingBarton and Daniel Flow Meter Always make sure the gas meter run is clean and orifice installed in the correct direction. Erroneous readings will result from incorrect installation, Refer to segment on Separator Operations for information on orifice plate installation. Make sure any pressure taps not in use are plugged. The Daniel gas meter fitting should be pressure tested for leaks. Make sure otifice carrier moves freely and all valves oper- ate correctly. ‘On the Barton chart recorder be sure the linkage is free from din, free to move and does not drag. Make sure the bellows is not filled with solids, that there is no gas trapped or liquid in the housing. To prevent liquid build-up in D.P. cell it is suggested the lower tap be used for pressure connections. Always be sure to cali- rate meter before using. On separators wh the recorder is situated below the meter run it is suggested that a fully displaced ‘wet’ system be utilized. Place Barton in position and connect the lines to the manifold so that the static pressure is measured on the low pressure side (downstream from orifice) ‘Check pens; must be in good condition, ‘Check clock works (24 hour, 7 day combina- tion), and is set on correct time. Sarion Differential Recorder & Daniel Senior Orifice Tester Surface Well Testing Page 2-82TABLE METER RANGES & PULSE FACTORS FLOCO 383 {5 ROTOR BLADE) HALLIBURTON TURBINE HALLIBURTON TURBINE HALLIBURTON TURBINE HALIBURTON TURBINE 1.300 - 13,000 HALLIBURTON TURBINE 2.100-21,000 | S14 - 2.057 206- 1,716 | Balt one cea nen BALL VORTEX 2.057» 17,142 (BALL BEARING) NOTES: 1 Forthe Floco, the pulses/bbl are elecrically “picked-up” and transmitted by the Model 573 Pulse Transmizcer, ‘The Halliburton Turbine Meter uses the MC-II Analyzer and the Ball Vortex Meter requires the Model XSH Optical Encoder-Transmitter to pickup and transmit pulses/ebl. 2 When two different size Flocos have the same flow range it is because they have the same size meser body ‘allowing the same throushput: itis their end connections that are sized differently. 3) When using the smaller size Halliburion meters that have large pulses/bobl values in a SCAN system, care should be taken in selecting a sample/ealculation interval for flow rates that will not overrun the counter card in the HP3497 which has a maximum pulse count limitation of 999,999. 4° The slight increase in pulses/bbl in the 3" Halliburton turbine over the 2° turbine ix attributed to an increase in number of rotor bladas. The 3* turbine haz six rotor blades as opposed 10.4 rotor blades in the 2° size,Operating and Maintenance Con- siderations for Separators Periodic Inspection HRS requires periodic inspection and ceutifi- cation documentation on all pressure vessels and piping for corrosion and erosion. Lack of this policy would create hazardous conditions for ‘operating personnel and surrounding equipment, Periodic inspection schedules for all pressure equipment must be followed to protect against undue failures and hazards. Note: No welding should be done directly to the shell of the separator or associated pipe work unless it is under the supervision or guid- ance of Engineering. Liquid Carryover Some separators have definite fixed capaci- ties that cannot be exceeded without “liquid carryover” through the gas outlet. The capaci- ties of some separators may be lowered with use. Low Temperatures Separators should be operated above hy- drate-formation temperatures. Otherwise hy- drates may form in the vessel and partially or completely plug it. This reduces capacity of separator and, in some instances when the liquid or gas outlet is plugged or restricted, will cause the safety valve to open or the safety head to rupture. Corrosive Fluid A separator handling corrosive fluid should be checked periodically to determine if remedial work is required. Extreme cases of corrosion may require a reduction in the rated working pressure of the vessel. Periodic hydrostatic testing is recommended, especially if the fluids being handled are corrosive. Expendable anodes can be used in separators to protect them against electrolytic corrosion. High-capacity Operation Where separators are operating near or at their maximum rate of capacity, they should be checked carefully and periodically to determine if acceptable separation is being accomplished. Pressure Shock Loads Wells should be switched in and out of the separator slowly. Fast opening and closing of valves will cause damaging shock loads on the vessel and its components. Throttling Discharge of Liquid Throttling discharge of small volumes of Tiqnid from separators normally should be avoided. Throttling causes erosion of the inner valves and seats of the liquid dump valves and may erode the dump valve bodies to the extent that they are in danger of bursting at rated working pressures. However, throttling discharge may be neces- sary because of processing units, such as lower- pressure separators or stabilization units, down- stream of the separator. Pressure Gauges Pressure gauges and other mechanical de- vices on separators should be checked for accu- racy at regular intervals. Isolating valves should be used so gauges can be removed for repairs or replacement. Gauge Cocks and Glasses Gauge cocks and gauge glasses should be kept clean so that the liquid level in the gauge glass reflects the true level in the separator at all times. Flushing of the gauge glass or cleaning by use of special swabs is recommended. Cleaning of Vessels It is recommended that all separator vessels be equipped with manways. cleanout openings. flushing pipes and/or washout connections so the vessels can be drained and cleaned periodically. Larger vessels are equipped with manways to facilitate cleaning them, Smaller vessels can be equipped with handholes and/or washout con- nections so they can be easily cleaned or washed out periodically. Surface Well Testing Page 2-83Note: No attempt should be made to enter a _ land location, depending on the possibility of vessel through the manway unless it is certified escape of combustible gases, location of well- “gas free”. head, etc. Itis important that precautions be e@ taken to prevent damage to surrounding equip- Preparation for Transport ment and personnel in the event of failure of the separator, its controls, or accessories. It is recommended that the following proce- dure be adopted. Note: Before operation of separator, while in service on testing, the entire installation should a) Dismantle and pack the level controliers/ he grounded by means of a cable which allows floats, measuring equipment, pressure the static electricity to dispense and avoid gauges, thermometers, hydrometers, etc. flashes. The cable should have maximum resis- tance of ! ohm per three feet. It should be b) ‘Transport Barton in a separate box with pins connected to a place where there is no paint, securely held or protected by foam rubber. either on the vessel or on the rig. In the case of onshore testing, the ground should be a copper c) Allunions should be greased and protected earth electrode at least three feet long, driven with grease tape. into the ground and watered regularly to keep the earth wet and provide good contact. The following is a guide to the equipment Pressure Testing required to satisfactorily perform a test and give a complete report on the well performance and Prior to the test program commencing the characteristics. separator will be pressure tested to ensure the integrity of the separator shell, associated 1. Complete set of oritice plates pipework, connections and valves. This is generally undertaken as part of a complete e 2. Orifice plate holders surface equipment hook-up pressure test. 3. Daniel orifice box grease The following procedure may vary depend- 4, Top gasket for Daniel (spare) ing on the requirements of our clients: 5. Daniel box wrench 1. Prior to all pressure testing: a. Erect warning barriers around test area. 6. Barton meter with charts, pens, ink and key. b. Announce over P.A. system that pressure Barton should be calibrated before test. testing is about to commence. 7. Thermometers for oil and gas lines, shrink- 2. Open separator inlet valve, close separator age tester and ambient temperature by-pass valve(s) 8. Accurate pressure gauges for separator body, 3. Close water line block valve and shrinkage tester, instrument air supply oil line block valve. 9. Needle valves for sampling at following 4, Open needle valve on top of separator vessel. points: separator gas, oil and water (up- stream of control valves). 5. Commence pumping slowly to fill separator assembly with water. Close gas line block Installation valve when water is observed at the gas flare. Some thought should be given to the installa- 6. When separator is full, stop pumping and @ tion of a separator and associated equipment close needle valve. either on board an offshore drilling location or a Surface Well Testing Page 2-84 = ———————7. Commencs pumping slowly w test pressure. Visually inspect all connections for sign of leaks. Note: Report leaks immediately. Do not attempt any remedial action while there is Pressure applied. 8. Once at test pressure isolate pump, if pos- sible, and monitor for test period. 9. Bleed pressure via pump vent to zero. 10. Close downstream 2" oil line. Close downstream 3” oil line valve. 11. Commence pumping slowly to test pressure. Visually inspect all connections for signs of leaks. 12, Once at test pressure isolate pump, if pos- sible, and monitor for test period. 13, Bleed pressure via pump vent to zero. 14, Close upstream 2" oil line ball valve. ‘Open downstream 2" oil line ball valve. Close upstream 3" oil line ball valve. Open downstream 3” oil line ball valve. 15. Commence pumping slowly to test pressure. Visually inspect all connections for sign of leaks. 16. Once at test pressure isolate pump, if pos- sible, and monitor for test period. 17. Bleed pressure via pump vent to zero. 18, Close separator inlet valve. Open upstream 2" oil line ball valve. Open upstream 3” oil line ball valve. 19. Commence pumping slowly to test pressure. ‘Once at test pressure isolate pump, if pos- sible, and monitor for test period. 21, Bleed pressure via pump vent to zero. 22, Open separator by-pass valve. Close separator inlet valve. Close downstream 2" oil Line ball valve. Close downstream 3" oil line ball valve. 23, Drain separator. Operational Procedures ‘The test program is normally directed by an operating company representative. It is there- fore essential that a good understanding and communication exists between ourselves and our client. Separator Operations Separator start up and subsequent instrumen- tation adjustment should only be undertaken by trained personnel. Varying well conditions and fluid characteristics make the laying down of set procedures inpracticable. However, within the context of separator operation, guidelines may be written for certain tasks. Installation and Removal of Orifice Plate A) Installation Install orifice plate in plate carrier. Install plate carrier in Daniel’s box ensuring level. Close bleed valve. Rotate upper plate carrier shaft slowly until plate carrier is clear of sealing bar and gasket level. Care should be taken not to lower plate onto sliding gate valve. Replace scaling bar gasket, scaling bar and clamping bar. Tighten clamping bar screws. ‘Open Daniel equalizing valve. Open sliding gate valve. . Rotate upper plate carrier until plate engages in lower pinions. 10. Rotate low plate carrier shaft slowly observ- ing section of differential on Barton Re- corder. 11. Close sliding gate valve. 12. Close equalizing valve on Daniel. ee ope a Prag Note: During same installations , such asa remote Barton or confidence of correct orifice size, it may be preferable to equalize the Barton prior to lowering the plate. This will ensure a zero beginning and prevent damage to the bellows. Surface Well Testing Page 2-853B) Removal 1. Open equalizing vaive. 2. Open sliding gate valve. 3. Rotate lower plate carrier shaft until plate engages in upper pinions. Rotate upper plate carrier shaft. Close sliding gate valve. Close equalizing valve. Open bleed valve. Loosen clamping bar screws. Remove clamping bar, sealing bar and sealing bar gasket. Care should be taken as pressure may still be present in upper cham- ber of Daniels Box. Pee Post Test Inspection A full inspection of the separator should be made in between test periods. Any maintenance and repair should be carried out using manufac- turers recommended procedures. Shutdown 1, Ensure equipment is flushed. 2. Inlet valve to separator should be closed. 3. Make sure all pressure is off the vessel, all lines, gauges, instruments, meters and valves. 4. Displacement elements should be tied back or removed prior to shipment, 5. If finished with the job and the vessel is to be moved, be sure all liquids are drained to proper places and all valves are closed to keep from spilling excess fluids. 6. If testing a sour gas well, be very cautious of any gas still venting out of separator when inspection plates are removed or any valves are opened. 7. Always inspect the vessel and piping periodi- cally for corrosion and erosion. If you have flowed excess amounts of corrosive fluids you may need to derate working pressure of vessel and piping. End of Job Status An end of job status report must be submit- ted to the Maintenace Supervisor. Tanks Well test tanks may be used for clean-up, liquid storage, meter proving and sampling. ‘Two designs of tanks available are 1) pressur- ized and 2) atmospheric. Tanks usually have capacities ranging from 50 barrels to 200 barrels. HRS Procluctin Weil Tasting Pressurized Stock Tank Surface Well Testing Page 2-86 aPressure containing tanks have a maximum working pressure of 50 psi. Pressurized tanks are preferred or required when dealing with H,S, confined work space, emulsions and foamy oil. Each are equipped with sightglasses, calibration strips, and safety reliefs. They may be modified with level controllers, back pressure valves and a Daniel to be used as a low pressure second stage separator. Some tanks may be fitted with heat- ing coils for dealing with heavy, viscous crudes. us 760 | Atmospheric Tanks and Tank strap, Inspection On receipt of equipment on location a gen- cal inspection of the tank assembly should be made. This inspection should include: 1. Allinlet and oudet connections. Ensure all threaded connections and sealing surfaces are clean undamaged. 2. Operation of ball valves to ensure free movement. 3. Sight glasses and calibration strip. Ensure strip and glasses are clean and glass valves operate fully. 4, Visual check the main body for signs of structural damage likely to affect integrity of assembly. 5. Check back pressure control valve. 6. Check relief valve. Any repair and maintenace undertaken at this point should follow recommended maintenance procedures. Some customers may desire atmospheric tanks when well conditions permit. ‘The tanks contain a thief hatch on top to allow personnel to gauge the liquid depth with a plumb bob strap. Dual compartment tanks are normally preferred because they allow continuous flow to alternate compartments while pumping from or running meter checks with the other. Keys to Accurate Stock Tank Gauging: 1) Correct and accurate tank table 2) No dents or damage to tank 3) Tank is clean 4) Allow foam to settle 5) BS&W at bottom of tank (water indicator paste) 6) Good tank strap (tape and plumb bob) with flour, etc. 7) Reading is taken at same spot each time 8) Temperature of oil is recorded to adjust volume 9) Stable oil level Surface Well Testing Page 2-87Inbreathing and outbreathing due to flows and temperature changes must be provided for in the venting design, Atmospheric tanks must be fitted with spark arresters and care must be taken to ensure the spark arrestors are clean and do not exhibit a restriction to flow. Safety Be extremely careful when upending a tank ‘on its bottom with a crane. Lifting of the tank should only be attempted when tank is empty. Note: Before operation of the test tank, while in service or in testing, the entire installation should be grounded by means of a cable which allows the static electricity to dispense and avoid Slashes. The cable should have a maximum resistance of 1 ohm per three feet. It should be connected to a place where there is no paint, either on the vessel or on the rig. In the case of onshore testing, the ground should be a copper earth electrode at least three feet long, driven into the ground and watered regularly to keep the earth wet and provide good contact. Never enter a tank without gas free checks, breathing devices and buddy system. Rig Up of Pressured Tank 1, Ensure a pressure gauge is located for easy monitoring. Pressure must be carefully monitored when flowing into the tank, ensuring the working pressure of the tank is not exceeded. (Relief valves are set to 50 psi on pressurized tanks). 2. Ensure vent line size is sufficient to prevent pressure build-up in the tank. Further ensure that a flame arrestor is fitted on this line. 3, When using a pressurized tank as a sccond stage separator follow guidelines for use of Daniel Orifice Meter laid down in proce- dures headed “HRS Well Test Separators’. 4. Care should be taken with routes for vent and relief lines. They should also be se- curely anchored to prvent movement during the venting of gas. Note: relief line. Never connect tank vent to separator Before flowing to the tank be it pressurized or atmospheric always establish a level in the tank using water or preferably diesel. Sight glasses should be ‘blown down’ and cleaned regularly to ensure correct levels are indicated. Be aware erroneous level indications can be caused by different fluid densities U-tubing in the sightglasses. Methods of minimizing oil evaporation and gravity losses (if applicable) - 1) Introduce products as cool as possible and maintain 2) Maintain high back pressure 3) Tanks painted light colors; aluminum = 44.5°F red = +14°F 4) Use small diameters, greater heights, smaller capacities 5) Use downcomer pipes to prevent agitation (holed for gas vent) Post Test Inspection A full inspection of the assembly should be made in between test periods. Any maintenance and repair should be carried out using recom- mended maintenance procedures. If testing a sour gas well, be very cautious of any gas still venting out of tank when removing inspection plates or opening any valves. Note: No tank should be entered unless certified gas free and personnel have taken Proper safety precautions. After each job the tank must be thoroughly cleaned out to prevent contamination of custom- ers crude and inaccuracies in volumes. Cone- shaped bottoms allow periodic drain off to remove solids that could plug off lines. Intemal coatings such as coal tar, epoxy resin, rubber, or galvanized can aid in the cleaning process. End of Job Status An end of job status report must be submit- ted to the Maintenance Supervisor. Surface Well Testing Page 2-88Transfer Pumps ‘Some areas dealing with low volumes may Transfer pumps supply oil to the bumner also have air diaphragm pumps. All units should when there is insufficient pressure for the well have relief valves and bypasses to recirculate e effluent to atomize and bum cleanly. HRS fluids if necessary. transfer pumps are designed with centrifugal type pumps and powered by electrical motors or diesel engines. ‘Transfer pumps can be controlled manually, by tank high/low level switches or by a level controller system. Diese! Transfer Pump MOTCR ROTATION ElectricTransfer Pump ‘Surface Well Testing Page 2-89 cccSPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS | Description Diesel Transfer Pump Deurit 4-53. 125 hp @2800 RPM | Satety System ‘Sentinet low oil pressure, ‘Vernier those, 445 psi @ 10,000 bbVday 97 in Lx 44 in Wx 60 in Dry Weight 6000 th “Mees requirements of NACE MR-OI-75 high coolant temperature, coolant loss and Amot crankcase pressure sensor ‘manual and emergency kill, and air sta valve (all panel mounted) ‘With Water: 560 psi @ 6,000 bbUday With Oil: 475 psi @ 6,000 boUday 150 hp, 1.15 Service Factor 200° F Maximum Operating ‘Temperature Contras Nontic Soft Start Controler ‘Solid State Series 26 Nema 7 Enclosure ‘Separate Field Termination Box Cent ifugat ‘Suno Model F3-BP) Pump 3550 Inpot RPM 8272 Output RPM 30 psig Maximum Suction Pressure 7160 peig maximum case pressure -20° F Ambient 250° F Fluid Temperature 3 in 600 tb RF Flange 2 in 600 Ib RF Flange With Water: 10,000 BPD@ 550 psi with ow: 495 psi @ 6,000 BPD@ 495 psi 465 @ 10.000 BPD@ 465 psi HS" am ‘width 48 in Din ‘Meets requirements of NACE MR-O1-75 Transfer Pump Specifications Surface Well Testing Page 2-90wa were eames Tenure + gam apuinatacaanerepmeer a! 10 pogrenweatt uy an cima sonumpnan (Se 80 on ena WILDEN® MODEL wea ne WILDEN PUMP & ENGINEERING CO. 22068 Van Buren Street / P.0. Box 845 6 FAX. 714-789-2692Inspection On receipt of equipment on location a gen- ral inspection of the transfer pump assembly should be made. This inspection should include: 1. Inlet and outlet connections. Ensure all threaded connections and sealing surfaces are clean and undamaged. 2. Operation of ball valves to ensure free movement. 3. Visual check of main badly for signs af structural damage likely to affect integrity of assembly. 4. Gearbox oil level. 5. Seal port configuration - ensure seal port configuration is as indicated on reference plate. Any repair or maintenace undertaken at this point should follow recommended maintenance procedures. Note: Before operation of the transfer pump, while in service or in testing, the entire installa- tion should be grounded by means of a cable which allows the static electricity to disperse and avoid flashes. The cable should have a maxi- mum resistance of I ohm per three feet. It should be connected to a place where there is no paint, either on the vessel or on the rig. In the case of onshore testing, the ground should be a copper earth electrode at least three feet long, driven into the ground and watered regularly to keep the earth wet and provide good contact. Rig Up ‘Transfer pumps are positioned at the outlet to the test tank(s). 1. Suction line(s) should be as short and straight as possible. 2. Inlet bore must be equal or greater than outlet bore, normally HRS utilize 2" outer with 3” inlet. 3. Eke qualiti’. »2rsonnel. 4, Check rotativ. 1% y-amp. In general siis 's anti-clockwise. (Av :»s«nt one 2400 bpd pump, (property number U2 40), "28s an offset gearing rotates clockwise). Pressure Testing Prior to the test program commencing the transfer pump will be pressure tested to ensure the integrity of the outlet valve. bypass valve and connections. This test is normally under- taken while pressure testing the complete surface package. 1. Prior to all pressure testing: Erect warming barriers around test area. Announce over P.A. system that pressure testing is about to commence. c. Ensure all non-essential personnel are clear of test area. ve 2. Valve configuration as follows (assuming no heater in line): Choke manifold valves open. Separator inlet valve closed. Main separator bypass valve open. Gas bypass valve closed. Oil bypass valve open. ‘Tank inlet valve closed. Tank bypass valve open. Pump bypass valve open. Pump outlet valve closed. x. Oil divertor valve (Port or Starboard) open. xi. Burner ball valves open (Port or Starboard as above). 3. Commence pumping slowly to flush lines. 4, Stop pumping. 5, Close Oil Divertor Valve. First test against Divertor valves and pump outlet. 6. Commence pumping slowly to test pressure. Visually inspect all connections for sign of leaks. Surface Well Testing Page 2-91Note: Report teuks immediately. Do not attempt remedial action whilst there is pressure applied. 7. Once at test pressure isolate test pump, if possible, and monitor for test period. 8. Bleed pressure via test pump vent to zero. 9. Close transfer pump bypass valve, open oil divertor valve. Second test on transfer pump bypass valve. 10. Commence pumping slowly to test pressure. Visually inspect all connections of sign of leaks. 11, Once at test pressure isolate test pump, if possible, and monitor for test period. 12, Bleed pressure via test pump vent to zero. 13, Open transfer pump bypass valve. Operational Information 1, Recommended maximum discharge pressure for 10,000 bbl/day pump is 500 psi. Rv Recommended minimum discharge pressure for 10,000 bbV/day pump is 330 psi. 3. Recommended maximum discharge pressure for 2,400 bbl/day pump is 350 psi. 4, Recommended minimum discharge pressure for 2,400 bbl/day pump is 250 psi. 5. Recommended ghinimum NPSH (Net Posi- tive Suction Head) is 10 ft H20 (4 psi). 6. Running load of 10,000 bpd pump is 171 amps, Starting current 1050 amps. (This may be reduced to 350 amps by introduction of soft start), 7. In the event of suction prime failure pump should be shut down iunediavely. 8. Do not allow fluid temperature to exceed 200 deg F. Post Test Inspection A fall inspection of the assembly should be made in between test periods. Any maintenance and repair should be carried out using recuin= mended maintenance procedures, End of Job Status ‘An end of job status report must be submit- ted to the Maintenance Supervisor. Flare Stacks Flare stacks are used to safely dispose of produced gas on land locations. All the stacks contain a continuous burning pilot with an ignition system. The assemblies, which range in height from 60 to 90 feet, have access lines for gas flaring and relief. Care should be taken in erecting and guy wires should be in place before any work takes place on upper sections. Always use a safety harness when working above ground. Flare Stack Surface Well Testing Page 2-92Burners and Booms ‘The CB-4 is nothing more than two CB-2s HRS utilizes the “New Bumer",CB-12A, _anifolded together. The CB-? is a single gun CB-4 and CB-2 burners. The “CB" stands for __a88embly used in areas with low oil rates, Modi- e clean burn and the number designates the thou- fied assemblies of the CB-12 are fitted with 5 sands of barrels of oil per day the burner is guns and can handle rates up to 20,000 bopd. capable of burning. Therefore, the CB-12A featuring three guns is capable of handling rates to 12,000 bopd at 350 psig (4,000 bopd per gun). New Burner CB-4 Burner CB-12 Burner HRS Burners Surgace Well Testing Page 2-93 _— eeeThe HRS “new” bumer uses four oil nozzles, each with orifices that direct oil through a swirl chamber. The oil is atomized as it exits the swirl chamber. An external air blast enhances the atomization process. The combination of the swirl and the air blast produces the atomization necessary for the most efficient burn. Changing the type or number of nozzles in use allows operating over a wide range of oil flows and pressures. An alternate, adjustable orifice oil nozzle may be used in place of the fixed orifice oil nozzle. ‘The bumer is modular in design allowing easy removal of the air and water housings for servicing. The compactness and serviceability of the burner allows the use of a minimal sized platform which is very functional. Around the burner head is a water spray ring that discharges a water blanket over the flame for cooling, black smoke reduction and improved combustion, The oil nozzles are replaceable inserts easily serviced while in place on the end of the boom. The air inserts and water nozzle are also easily serviced. Inspection On receipt of equipment on location a gen- eral inspection of the Burner assembly should be made. This inspection should include: 1) Inspection of all connections. Ensure all sealing surfaces and threads are clean and undamaged, 2) Ensure water nozzles are unclogged and water rings free of debris. 3) Check oi! nozzles for clogging and excessive erosion. 4) Operation of ball valves, ensuring free movement, 5) Check that correct rupture disc is installed in oil line, ©) Visual check on main body for signs of structural damage likely to affect integrity of assembly. General Information Disposal of crude oil, by burning, during well testing operations with minimal black smoke and unburned hydrocarbon fallout can generally be accomplished with proper proce- dures and equipment. The very nature of a well test is such that the variables important for efficient combustion are initially unknown and tend to vary during testing. The single most, important factor for efficient buming is proper fluid atomization. ‘The injection of water into the flame reduces black smoke and flame :adia- tion. Factors influencing atomization include oil nozzle geometry, fluid flow or pressure drop across the nozzle, the chemistry of the fluid and the addition of air. The smaller the nozzle discharge droplet size, the easier for air to surround it to complete the combustion process, Droplet size relates directly to the quality of burn, however, the infinite number of variables in well test systems makes droplet size testing prohibitive. Current HRS bumer system phi- Josophy is to produce the best burn possible tor given job conditions, The experienced operators Qualitative analysis during testing and ability to modify variables such as backpressure or condi- tion the fluid thermally or with additives allows us to produce efficient, fallout free burns. HRS bumers use modified simplex swirl nozzles. Orifices in the nozzle direct fluid flow into a swirl chamber and the conical discharge of fine particles is further atomnized with a sonic air blast from an external annular air gap. HRS burners have multiple nozzles which allow for operations over a wide flow range, by selecting the optimum number of nozzles to use. Factors upstream of the bumer, such as the separator or transfer pump dictate the system flow and maximum pressure limits, Burning with the fewest nozzles possible gets the highest backpressure at the bumer and the highest fluid velocities in the swirl chamber which produces the best atomization and the cleanest burn. The sonic air blast is a contributing factor to the quality of atomization, particularly at lower oil flow rates. ‘The chemistry of the oil is a major factor in the quality of a bum. Residual gas in the oil Surface Well Testing Page 2.94produces a hotter flame and typically a cleaner burn than dead oils. Lighter oils (higher API gravity) are easier to bum efficiently. The atomization process is a function of the surface tension of the fluid, Heating the oil reduces its viscosity and surface tension resulting in better atomization. Additives can be used to reduce surface tension or increase heating value. Sol- ids, drilling muds and other contaminants are common and must be handled by the burner. Heavier crude oils may require heating to physi- cally transfer the oil and this improves burn quality by reducing the viscosity. Safety Head A rupture disc type safety head is located in the short joint immediately upstream of the burner to protect the system in the event of oil nozzle plugoff and overpressure. The safety head is a hammer union type, easily serviced in place on the end of the boom. Boom Description ‘The boom structure is a u-shaped, truss type assembly. Each boom section is equipped with lifting lugs for individual or assembled suspen- sion and lugs for the vertical suspension and windstay cables. The cables supplied are spelter socket pendants and tumbuckles are supplied with all four cables, Windstay cables may be fabricated locally with cable and clamps to facilitate the varying lengths encountered on specific installations. The boom sections, oil and flare lines are all assembled by making up hammer type unions. ‘The oil and flare lines are located inside the “u" for easy servicing and replacement and serve as lower kick plates for the expanded metal walkway. Two vent lines and the air and water lines double as structural members to keep the structure as light as pas- sible. DIVERTER MANIFOLDS FOR BURNERS sumer Boom Surface Well Testing Page 2-95Kingpost Description ‘The kingpost includes three adjustable struts that conveniently stow against the main column. After hoisting into position and welding the Kingpost base in place, the struts are unpinned and extended into position. The kingpost func- tions similar to a u-joint allowing the boom to pivot about two axis, one vertical and one. horizontal. The rearmost crossmember on the boom serves as the horizontal pivot and is easily inserted into the mating receptacle on the kingpost during installation. The boom has a sixty degree angular operating range at rated conditions, it may be rotated to the side of the tig for storage. Igniter System The LPG pilot ignition system includes two ait/gas mixers, onc transformer box with two high energy ignition spark rods, one each for the burner and flare. The 110v, 50/60 cycle system includes provisions for continuous or intermit- tent operation and requires electrical and gas piping hardware for installation, The systems’ sensitive parts are easily removed for service, storage and shipping, Boom Kig-up Each installation will vary somewhat de- pending on the specific equipment used, logistics of cquipment transportation, the rig, customer requirements, etc... It is important to review your procedures and have a plan prior to rig-up. Yard assembly of the major components, testing, and inspecting the equipment prior to use is an effective exercise to insure a quick and profes- sional installation. Below is a typical rig-up scenario, 1. The kingpost with struts in their stowed position and vertical suspension cables attached are hoisted into place and its base welded to the deck with a 1/2" fillet weld. Extend struts and weld perimeter of pads at Jeast 147" from kp centerline with a 1/2” fillet weld. Make sure strut ends are screwed in as far as possible for maximum thread engagement and all pins arc in, 2. Boom sections may be assembled prior to going to, or at the rig, Be sure new seals are used and blanks are in place to prevent thread damage while handling. Refer to the boom lifting diagram for proper pick points. 7 Peep eel SSS Bumer ignitor Surface Well Testing Page 2-96 ———— rrr —— ————Most boom damage is incurred by improper lifting. Attach a guide rope to the kingpost end of boom, hoist into position and insert pins to secure boom to kingpost. Attach vertical suspensinn cables to boom and lower into position, which is normally inclined upward slightly to prevent inadvertant drain- age. Cold weather installations may require the boom slope downward to facilitate drain- age to prevent freezing. Vertical suspension cables should be preset with tumbuckles locknutted so time consuming adjustment at the rig is not necessary. Attach windstay cables and disconnect the rig hoist sling ‘Windstay cable of the size and type specified ‘on the assembly drawing may be field as- sembled with five cable clamps on each end. “The windstay cable should be attached to the rig in the same horizontal plane as the boom. ‘The bumer is secured to the boom at the outset of the job. The following items of supply are connected: il line -from transfer pump manifold system Water line -supply should be capable of 1.25 bbls of water per bbl of oil. Supply pressure of 100-175 psi. Air line -supply should be capable of 350-375 scfm per gun at 100 psi. Pilot gas -propane ignitor gas supply at a minimum of 5 psi. The ignitor requires 110vac. Operation ‘The typical well test is rigged up so oil either flows directly from the separator to the burner or from the separator to a test tank and the transfer pump supplies the bumer. Low separator operat- ing pressure or low oil flow rates usually require going to the test tank and pumping to the bumer. The typical rig-up also includes bypass valves, check valves and diverter valves that direct flow to either bumer on the rig. Two bumers are typically installed with the one down wind being used. Operator familiasity of the rig-up along with what valves do what and which pressure gauges monitor what is an absolute must. The general sequence is outlined below. 1, The pilot gas tumed on and ignited, Pilot flames are sometimes difficult to see from the rig, your pre-flow check of this system should include visual observation from the rig and assurance the flame is in the atom- ized oil spray path. 2. Tum on the compressed air, supply pressure should be at least 100 psi to be most effec- tive. 3. Direct oil flow to the burner slowly. Visual contact should be maintained with the burner to insure ignition and burn, Failure to ignite, lack of continuous burn or other obvious departures from normal operation should key the operator to immediately divert flow to the test tank or stop the pump and evaluate the problem. a ‘Tum on the water supply to a rate equal to roximately 1.25 times the oil rate or visually establish a water rate that produces the desirable gray smoke cloud indicative of aclcan burn. Monitor oil pressure, water pressure and air pressure during the job, Measure the pressure downstream from any throttling valves that may be in the system. Of course the oil linc should have as few flow restrictions as practical, since the fluid energy contributes to the atomization process. Changes in these pressures during the course of a job identifies potential problems and items requiring maintenance between burns, For example: 1. The oil pressure varies with the flow rate, especially with fixed orifice nozzles. Oil pressure decreasing during a fixed flow rate period may indicate nozzle erosion. Oil pressure increasing during a fixed flow rate period may indicate a nozzle is plugging off. Taw ail pressure and a poor quality burn indicates the need to use fewer oil nozzles if your job conditions will allow. Pump prob- lems, particularly cavitation problems, may result in lower oil pressures. 2. Increasing air pressure indicates air nozzle plugging, a decrease in air pressure signals a supply problem or an air leak. 3. Increasing water pressure indicates water nozzle or strainer plugging, decreasing water pressure signals a supply problem or a water Teak. Surface WellTesting Page 2-97[ "SPECIFICATIONS —__ =a = || Oil Flow Rate [Service |S || Oit Connection [ || Maximum Oil Pressure || Water Requirements Height Weight 26 in 180 1b P+ | ——— SPECIFICATIONS Oil Flow Rate 12,000 BPD Service HS" 1 Oil Connection 3 in Fig 400 | Maximum Oil Pressure 1,440 psi ‘Water Requirements 1,25 x Oil Rate Air Requirements 750 SCFM Length 86 in Wiath 83 in Height Weight 96 in 1,600 Ib “Meets requirements for NACE MRO1-75_ “Meets requirements of NACE MR-01-75 cB - 12 e { SPECIFICATIONS Oil Flow Rate 4,000 BPD Service HS” Oil Connection 2 in Fig 400 Maximum Oil 1,440 psi Pressure Water Requirements | 1.25 x Oil Rate Air Requirements 750 SCFM Length 60 in Width 90 in Height 45 in Weight 500 Ib “Meets requirements of NACE MR-01-75 cB- 4 Bummer Specifications Surface WellTesting Page 2-98SYSTEMS ENGINEERING ‘ BULLETIN ® Report No.: $89-01 Date: 21 July 1989 SURFACE [Approves TY [ofl le | | CB-12 Burner Modification Purpose of Bulletin The following items are available for use on existing CB-12 burners. The new air nozzle improves atomization which improves burn efficiency. The new oil nozzle will extend nozzle life considerably. Oil Nozzle Assembly CB-12 Burner Modification 111 LLL Ttem Part Number Part 1 685.22011 Air Nozzle 2 685,22012 Oil Tube 3 685,22013 Retainer 4 685.22015 ‘Tungsten Carbide Oil NozzleBRS, SYSTEMS ENGINEERING | BULLETIN 6 Report No: $89-01 Date: 21 July 1989 Item Descriptions The air nozzle (item 1) is composed of two plates bolted to the front of the existing air housing that form a 018 in. conical annular air gap. This nozzle requires 250 scfm air (100 psi) per gun. The sonic air blast directed perpendicular to the oil improves atomization, provides additional air for combustion, and reduces the oil cone angle. The wider oil cone angle impacting the burner can has been a source of fallout. Installation of the air nozzle includes match drilling twenty-four .125 in, diameter holes into the existing air housing and drilling and tapping six holes for 1/4 in. bolts to attach the parts to the air housing. ‘The new oil nozzle (item 4) is an insert of tungsten carbide. It will outlast current nozzles many times. The insert has a primary seal on the taper and an O-ring secondary seal. The new oil nozzle requires a new oil tube and retainer nut (items 2.and 8) which are reusable. The insert is easily serviced by removing the retainer nut. The O-ring (600.33638 91Q9VM1136) should be replaced when the nozzle is serviced. Torque the retainer nut to 150 ft-lb. Torque tho Atlas Bradford thread on the other end of the ll tube to 250 fvlb, Tt uses a 70,10340 (92H201) seal. This assembly ia a direct replacement for the current CB-12 oil nozzle. e Important Notes on Bumer Operation Burn with the highest oil backprossure possible, Higher proasures atomize the oil hotter which produces a more efficient burn. Oil backpressure is a function of the number of guns that are turned on, the oil flow rate, and line losses. We need to burn with the fewest guns possible. Rate Guns Up to 4000 BPD 1 4000 to 8000 BPD 2 8000 to 12,000 BPD 3 Monitor the burner oil pressure. Declining pressure means less rate or nozzle erosion. Increasing pressure means more rate or a plugging nozzle. The pressure must be less than separator operating pressure or separator fi will occur. ‘Adequate air supply is important. After rig-up, remove the air nozzle and blow out the lines, clean the air nozzles, and re-install. Blow through the maximum number of nozzles you anticipate using and make sure you can maintain 100 psi. none ELTTNG DALLAS CSSea Emerald Well Test Burner Sea Emerald Well Test Burner has an improved design which means less pollution. The potential for pollution during crude oil disposal while well testing includes smoke and hydrocarbon fallout. The Sea Emerald Burner has demonstrated its capabilities to perform fallout free over its entire flow range in engineering tests and field trials. The tendency to smoke was nonexistent or negligible up to 75% of the rated capacity and from there to rated capacity was tolerable and dissipated rapidly. With the addition of water, the smoke may be completely eliminated at the higher oil flow rates and stil perform fallout free. The Sea Emerald is a cleaner burning disposal system than any previous or current bumer system. It was rated by an independent environmental testing ‘company as having an efficiency rating of over 9.993%. Environmentally friendly well testing depends on appropriate well test designs and proper equipment operation as well as a superior burner for oil disposal. The Sea Emerald was developed specifically for simple, effective operation over the wide range of conditions expected during well tests. The burner development process included studying and testing numerous atomizers and burner arrangements. The Combustion Process Liquid fuel spray combustion is the hydrocarbon vapor surrounding the liquid droplet, mixing with air and burning when exposed to the ignition source. Two important factors for efficient combustion include fuel spray atomization and turbulence. The atomizer used in the Sea Emerald Burner produces the small droplets necessary to insure complete combustion of the liquid droplets. The usc of multiple tips discharging at high velocities in their unique array create the turbulence that maximizes air ingestion which is necessary for efficient combustion. ‘The chemistry of the crude is also significant to burner performance. Heavy crude requires heating to reduce the viscosity to a level adequate for proper atomization. Engineering tests with 18 Degree API crude oil were fallout free and smokeless with the ‘Sea Emerald. Of course during well testing we have litle control over the oil chemistry ‘but knowing the general nature of the oil expected, the process system upstream can condition the crude for optimum results during disposal. Flame stability is especially important in preventing fallout. The high nozzle exit velocities that produce the superior atomization and efficient combustion can be subject to instability, especially during startup and shutdown. The Sea Emerald uses a pilot system with remote ignition that includes an exceptionally stable pulot and gas jets directed to each nozzle. This arrangement initiates oil spray ignition quickly during startup and provides a stable ignition source during shutdown. During fallout tests conducted by an independent environmental testing company, no provisions were made to isolate startup and shutdown perinds since there was no detectable fallout during these periods.Burner Operation ‘The Sea Emerald is a series of compact, lightweight, 4,000 BOPD heads that may be used in multiples depending on the job requirements. This improves manufacturability and provides the flexihility to meet a wide mnge of capacities with the modular design. The typical arrangement will be three heads with a 12,000 BOPD rated capacity. The oil and air inlets are conveniently located in a vertical line to simplify header construction and ‘burner positioning. ‘The oil pressure required is only 200 Psi at rated capacity. High pressure pumps and piping are not required. During many jobs the separator pressure may be sufficient to flow directly to the burner without using pumps. Advantages to this are simplified well test operations and reduced maintenance. Also the oil temperature at the burner is highect in this scenario. The higher oil temperature reduces viscosity which improves atomization and combustion. ‘The final nozzle exit velocity from the Sea Emerald is high. The final mixing chamber bas an unobstructed exit eliminating the chances of plugging. The internal oil passages leading into the final mixing chamber are generously sized to reduce the oil pressure requirement and making erosion and plugging less likely. Since the Sea Emerald operates efficiently over a wide oil flow rate range, complicated controls are not necessary, All nozzles for which nese is au adequate air supply will be open for the duration of the bum. The pilots are lit, air is supplied, send the oil.Burner Head and Igniter Assembly Description Burner part numbers: (685.40642 2" Fig 602 union thread half oil and air inlets 685.40643 2" socket welds on Marpac ball valve oil and air inlets Igniter Assembly part numbers: 685.40700 110 Volt System 685.40701 220 Volt System Air Inlet. Igniter Connections G Oil Inlet ‘The bumer head includes three nozzles. Blank nozzles are supplied so the assembly may be pressure tested. Air and oil enter the head and exit through the nozzles as a finely atomized spray which is lit via the igniter assembly. ‘The igniter assembly has three significant parts. For igniting the pilot there is an internal sparking device connected to a remote control panel. The pilot it lights is the ignition source for the three gas jets. The gas jets are directed by the pilut and ward the nozzle. ‘The igniter lights the pilot, the pilot lights the gas jet and the gas jet lights the oil discharging from the nozzle.‘The nozzles screw into the bady. Since bath parts are stainless, it is very important to clean an lubricate threads and O-rings before assembly and limit maximum tightening torque to prevent galling. ‘ 12*Hex—$| Clean & lubricate ty Dror fo assemby. Ky 17:34005 O-F 2K228 Ke \ N 3 \ N o N ; 730060 O-Ring N 43rox 128K 1 eas.40611 6.40038 Blank ‘The pilot and igniter assembly slips through the tube in the center of the head and is secured in place with one set screw. Be sure the gas jets arc directed past the pilot and toward the nozzles. There are three connections at the burner, Pilot Gas - 1/4" FNPT, Gas Jets - 1/4" MNPT & Electrical - 1/2 or 3/4" conduit.Pilot & Igniter Assembly Parts 13 685.4078, Orifice Filter * 685.40705 Control Panel - 220 Volt 685.40720 (Ft) Wire - 12 GA High Temp Item P/N Qty Description 1 68540707 «1 Mixer & Electrical Assy 2 68540708 «1 «Ceramic Cup* 3 685.40709 1 Crimped Wire Assembly* 4 68540706 1 —_~Plasma Generator * 5 685407101 Micro Flame Front Tube 6 68540711 1 Diffuser/Cover 7 685.40712 1 Pilot Body Assembly 8 685.40713 2 Centering Mounting Brkt 9 68540714. 1 TriDirectional Nozzle 10 685.40715 3 Nozzle Jet Assembly 11 68540716 1 ‘Jet Feed Tube 2 685.40717 1 Orifice Assembly * 1 1 Items marked with an asterisk would be recommended spare parts. Periodic dissassembly and cleaning is required for reliable operation: ‘The gas supply must be clean, the orifices in both the pilot and gas jets are very small. ‘The pilot gas inlet includes a filter that may require cleaning or replacing if the pilot becomes erratic. Take precautions to prevent moisture and debris from entering unconnected gas lines. During disassembly, make sure the air holes about 1” from the end of the tube, Item 5, are clear. Salt plug here can prevent lighting. Use a backup on the orifice asseuibly, Item 12, when attaching the tube fitting. Excessive torque here can damage the mixer assembly, Item 1.Bumer Layout ‘The bumers may be used in multiples of 1 @ thm 4. Three is common for a 12,000 BOPD setup. Viewed from the top, the heads should be at least 24 inches apart and rotated 20 0 30 degrees from one another. ‘The separation between heads and the unique array of the nozzles is important for air ingestion and required for efficient combustion. Top View ‘The air and oil manifolds may be placed at the edge of the boom since easy access is available from the rear. The typical end of boom connections are shown below. Air ol Igniter Wiring Pilot Gas La Jet Supply ‘The air supply is extremely important for proper operation of the bumer. The absolute minimum acceptable airline size for uperating (wo or dee heads is 4” and for one head isa 3" line. Better performance could be expected using one size larger air lines. If the distance between the compressors and burners is greater than 250 Ft the piping from the ‘compressors to the kingpost end of the boom should be the next larger size.‘The overall system setup should be similar to the sketch below. Pilot Gas 9% Oil Compressors e@ Pilot Gas ‘The pilot gas supply 1s separate from the gas jet supply. Pilot gas is always propane. Gas useage for the pilot is low, 4 SCFH per pilot or about 1.1 Lb/Hr/Pilot. Stainless tubing , 1/4" diameter is acceptable. The remote ignition panel lights it. Experience has shown the pilot to be exeptionally stable and reliable in adverse conditions once it is lit. Best practice is to light pilots well in advance of burn periods. Having two bottles rigged with regulators, guages and flexible hoses that tie into a tee with valves allow uninterupted gas flow while switching bottles. Jet Gas ‘The gas jet supply is propane and a good practice Is to tap off separator gas for u dual source. Use two regulator/guage assemblies again with the propane for uninterupted gas flow while changing bottles. There are three jets on a pilot and propane gas useage will be around 8.6 Lb/Hr/Pilot with the 1/32" orifice at 15 psi. Use a 1/2” Stnls line to supply the three heads, As the liquid level in the bottle drops and cools, the vapor pressure in the propane tank lowers. During operation, bottles may have to be switched before they empty due to low pressure. After a while they may be reconnected and emptied. Using propane during startup and shutdown and process gas in between is most economical.Water Supply Note that the water curtain is shown 10 to 15 Ft behind the burner and directed in a vertical plane, The purpose of the water isto reduce the radiation and to be effective it @ ‘must be between the flame and the rig and have depth, Large flames require long water spray patterns which is best accomplished with a tew large capacity nozzles as opposed to many small capacity nozzles. Firefighting type nozzles are acceptable. ‘Compressors ways include a check valve inthis line, Bypass with check valve for lean shutdown, Flow Characteristics (01Pow vs Prssur Dep 250 a 7 [areas 0 } ae { I T { a er er rn Om soroPilot & Igniter System Installation Two regulators, gauges and valves along with the appropriate flexible hoses and fittings should be used on both the pilot and ‘gas jet supplies. Keeping an uninterupted supply of gas going to the pilots is important. Tum both bottle and line valves off before switching. Propane supplies should be kept out of the line of sight of the flame. First time installations should be checked out prior to use by placing temporary pressure guages at the pilot assembly and operating the system. Reliability of operation depends on a clean gas supply of adequate pressure. For every frst time instataton, temporarily place guages. (as tines must be ean stented In both gas it ines, record and Know what pressures. eee fare requred ath ark worn 18 to 90 pote pt i™ seam em pg ‘Toso are yur cope oprang pases Gas Jars ‘Set Regulator pressure 30 tho roseure atthe plots 15 0 30 Ps Gas Jot Propane Control panels should be mounted upright and in a weather proof enclosure. Be sure to run brown wire all the way to the pilot (u te desiguated ground terminal.wire okhere. [roa © A Pasne en, ‘Brown Wire to Ground @ Plot 5010 150: soto 15" The electrical conduit between the termination box and the igniter assembly must be sealed, Salt water in this line causes problems. This section of conduit is also exposed to intense heat. It may be shielded from the line of sight of the flame to protect the wiring Run 1/2" or 3/4" conduit between “termination box and igniter assy Below is a sketch showing an optional air purge setup. By pressurizing the termination box and flowing air through the conduit you eliminate moisture concems, keep the electrical conductors within temperature limits and also supply salt free air for pilot combustion. This should not be requited for uucuul operation but if moisture or salt buildup become a problem, this is an inexpensive solution. SGrHaS Ray Hara pan St esaR oe eee eee “JX. =\ Shaler Aways use abackup here when inetaling the tubing Bri. Dia Mole Cont Banet ting to provert damage tothe mating pat‘There are three items to check if the pilot fails o operate property. 1) There must be adequate pressure at the inlet. 2) The filter and orifice must be clear to allow the proper gas flow. Either of these would be indicative of a weak flame at the pilot. When operating properly, the pilot flame should be visible, extending 1/2" or so from the ports. After a short period of operation the the center section of the pilot should be red hot. 3) Restnicted air passages in the plot During dssassombly, make cre hese hole are ean, | $$$ ——————-~/ paricsicalycloan holes. ‘The holes on the left end of the assembly above will prevent ignition if they become plugged.Maintenance Maintenance before and during jobs is extremely important for proper use and safety of this equipment. Maintenance frequency and type will depend somewhat on usage, facilities and local practices. Important maintenance related recommendations are listed below; 1. Periodic inspection of cables per your local requirements for slings, etc. is required; replace as necessary. 2. Prior to each job, re-build the burner swivel replacing all the elastomeric seals, inspect the nozzle metal to metal seal area, install the test plugs without o-rings and pressure test the bumer head assembly to working pres- sure. 3, Between burns remove and inspect the bumer oil nozzles and replace with new o- rings. Clean the annular air gap. 4, Periodically disassemble the water ring, rupture disc holder and unions at the burner end of the boom; clean and replace seals as required. 5. Periodically inspect the air and water hoses; replace if necessary. Clean the strainers as required. 6. Periodically grease the rotating parts on the kingpost. 7. During infrequent use, unpainted surfaces, particularly threads and sealing areas should be protected with a light grease coating to prevent corrosion. Flush lines with rust inhibitor. Well Test Field Laboratory ‘The HRS Well Test Labs fall into two categories. One type is designed to support Electric Line and computerized data acquisition systems; the other as a workshop/office for well testing personnel. They are self contained units requiring 220 or 440 power supplies with load rating of 30A. Water and/or air may also be required. ‘The workshop is equipped to perform simple repairs and instrument calibrations plus the necessary field fluid analysis instruments and kits, Accessory equipment can include: Vises and Benches BlectricCentrifuge Deadweight Tester Hydrometers ‘Chemical Injection Pump Gas Gravitometer Downhole Sampler Kit HS Detection Kit Sample Bottles Salinity Kit Vacuum Pump Pressure Recorders Chart Scanner Tank Strap Calibration Bath Pressure Gauges Viscometer Inspection On receipt of equipment on location, a general inspection of the lab to ascertain no serious structural damaged was suffered during transit. Note: Before operation of the lab, while in service on testing job, the entire installation should be grounded by means of a cable which allows the static electricity to disperse and avoid ‘flashes. The cable should have a maximum resistance of ! ohm per three feet. It should be connected to a place where there is no paint, either on the vessel or on the rig. In the case of onshore testing, the ground should be a copper earth electrode at least three feet long, driven into the ground and watered regularly to keep the earth wet and provide good contact. Rig Up 1. Ensure correct tapping on transformer is selected prior to connecting power supply. 2. Tum off main and individual breakers at junction box. Surface Well Testing Page 2-103 Se a aaa\ exa.osion PROOF Ine eo 2 ie rm = 7 sai f ies I ie Ol sae = SPECIFICATIONS Description Field Laboratory | Heli-Lift Field Laboratory Height 108 in 108 in. Width 96 in 85 in Length 144 in 91 in Weight 10,000 Ib 4,000 Ib 220-480 V 110/220 V Field Test Laboratory Surface Well Testing Page 2-1043. Connect power supply. Connection of supply should only be undertaken by quali- fied personnel. 4. Tum on fan and check rotation. Correct rotational direction marked on pump hous- ing. Turn off pump. 5. Run air intake duct from fan inlet to a desig- nated zone outside the test area. (Some labs utilize a remote fan. In these cases the fan should be positioned outside the test area. 6. Switch on power to lab bypassing the purge system, 7. Tum on main breaker, lights breaker and 240 Y supply breaker. 8. Check supply voltage on main outlets with a digital volt meter. Voltage should not exceed 250 volts. Check for proper ground- ing. 9. Turn on 110 V breaker; check power supply. 10. If supply satisfactory, proceed to pressurize cabin as follows: a. Ensure inlet and outlet fire dampers are open. Ensure inlet and outlet ventilation grills are open. Ensure door firmly closed. Start fan - cabin will begin to pressurize. Turn key to engage purging cycle. Purging light will illuminate after delay of approximately 30 seconds. When purging light has switched off the purging cycle is complete. g. Press the main start button to bring power to the standard electrical equipment in the lab. h. Adjustment of the outlet louver allows pressure in the lab to be regulated (.25 inches is recommended minimum). ca reps 11. If pressurization is lost, the audible alarm will sound. If pressure is not restored within 30 seconds, the power to standard electrical equipment will be lost. Follow previous instructions to regain pressurization. 12. If smoke or gas is detected - a, Power to standard electrical equipment is lost. b. Fan stops. c. Inlet and outlet fire dampers close. To repressurize press ‘Reset’ and follow #10 instructions. Note: Gas or smoke detectors cannot be bypassed. 13. All cable runs must enter the lab via the “cable entry” with correct transit blocks fitted. Rig Down 1, All drawers and cabinets must be secured prior to transport. 2. Any other equipment should be on the floor and secure. 3. Ensure main cabling is secured. End of the Job Status An end of job status report must be submit- ted to Maintenance Supervisor. Data Acquisition Services A data acquisition system can help eliminate the "human error" factor that is always present. Because of unforseen circumstances, such errors can occur in chart interpretations, gauge readings and interrupted data collections. By the use of a computerized system, data can be gathered rapidly, systematically and simultaneously to measure: wellhead pressure and temperature casing pressure ambient pressure and temperature separator pressure and temperature (up to three stages) © gas, oil and water volumes flowed ( auto- matically calculated) Surface Well Testing Page 2-105 SSThe precise systematic acquisition, swurage and reporting of well test data make the subse- quent analysis of the well test data easier and more accurate and lead to greater confidence in results. Just as important as the ability to gather timely and accurate data is the ability of the automated system to meet or exceed approved industrial standards for operation within hostile environments. Therefore, due consideration is given to such areas as intrinsic safety and explo- sion proofing. Listed below is the standard overview of the hardware configuration currently being used in the HRS Surface Computerized Data Acquisition Network system. Operating systen Transit Case Safety Barrier Box Data Acquisition Unit Ruggedized IBM Compatible Computer system Epson FX-1050 Printer PeRE H/P 7475 Plouer with Serial Interface Rack Mount UPS System Cabling System Junction Box Pressure Transducer 10. Temperature Transducer 11. Flow Meter 12. Transducer 13. Rezpro Software eras HS Sweetening/Processing Systems Ih some locations such as offshore California and the Northeast United States near major cities, special H,S extraction systems are used. These vessal, tank, pump packages are large. Chemicals are used to react with the H,S and transform it into anon toxic gas. Operating pressure aud temperature have significant impor- tance in neutralizing the H,S. In many cases the neutralizing chemical has a useful life and must be replaced during testing. Surface Computerzed Data Acquisition Network System Surface Well Testing Page 2-1063 Problems Fluid Processing & Production A spccialist will often face problems of well performance, equipment malfunctions or safety. ‘These problems must be solved, safely and effi- ciently, with solutions based on knowledge and. experience. This section will be broken down and ordered into three sections: © Well Producing Conditions Special Processing Requirements 2 Separator and Servicing Problems Removal of Water In instances where water is produced with oil, conditions warrant scparation of the water from the oil in the separator. Free water may be re- moved from the well fluids by use of a three- phase (oil-gas-water) separator. ‘Separation of oil and water in oil and gas separators usually is accomplished by “settling” and the use of chemicals. Separation of emulsi- fied oil and water is sometimes difficult to accom- plish, and in such instances an emulsion treater or similar equipment is used for this purpose. ‘Treat- cers may use various combinations of improved settling, heat, electricity, and chemicals. Electric- ity charges the H,O molecules, thus increasing their attraction and ability to coalesce. Emulsions are more common with high density crude oils with a low API gravity. Separating Foaming Crude Oil If the pressure is reduced on certain types of crude oil, tiny spheres (bubbles) of gas are encased ina thin film of oil when the gas comes out of solution. ‘This results in foam, or froth, being dispersed in the oil and creates what is known as ‘foaming’ oil. In other types of crude oil, the viscosity and surface tension of the oil may mechanically lock gas in the oil and cause an effect similar to foam. Usually, oil foam will not be stable or long-lasting unless a foaming agent is present in the oil. Crude cil is more likely to foam if: 1) API gravity is <40 2) Operating temp is <160 3) Oiliis viscous (>53cp) Foaming greatly reduces the capacity of oil and gas separators since a much longer retention time (up to 20 minutes) is required to adequately separate and stabilize a given quantity of oil. Foaming oil cannot be measured accurately with positive-displacement meters or conventional volumetric metering vessels. These problems, combined with the loss oil and gas due to im- proper separation, emphasize the need for special procedures in handling foaming oils. Oil and gas separators of special design are available for handling foaming crude oil. ‘The size and shape of the separator and the size, location, and configuration of the internal pparts can be such that the foam will be broken within the separator. ‘The main factors that assist in “breaking” foaming oil are: 1) Setding 2) Agitation 3) Heat 4) Chemicals ‘These methods “reducing” or “breaking” foam ing oil are also used to remove entrained gas from oil. Retention Time too Short The following procedure could be adopted: 1) Puta second separator in parallel with the first or outfit pressurized tank as a “super separa- tor”. 2 Inject a demulsifying agent. 3) If there is no improvement. decrease flow rate of the well. Paraffin Deposition Paraffin deposition in oil and gas separators Surface Well Testing Page 3-1 Nenereduces their efficiency and may render them inoperable by partially filling the vessel and/or blocking the mist extractor and fluid passages. Paraffin can be effectively removed from separa- tors by steaming or by use of solvents. How- ever, the best solution is to prevent initial depo- sition in the vessel by heating or chemically treating the fluid upstream of the separator. Another deterrent, successful in most instances, involves coating of all internal surfaces of the separator with a plastic for which paraffin has little or no affinity. The weight of the paraffin will cause it to slough off of the plastic-coated surface before it builds up to harmful thickness. Liquid Ioad up in gas wells The occurrence of liquid loading up in the flowing tubing or annular string is usually associated with wells of low to moderate gas productivity and high water or oil to gas produc- tion ratios. Initial indications of liquid in the hole may be an unusually low shut-in wellhead pressures and/or a large difference between tubing head and casing head pressures if there is no packer in the hole. Frequently, no further production problems arise in producing the loaded well after an initial unloading or well bore clean up se- quence. However, if the condition persists, it will be characterized by a decreasing wellhead flowing pressure, accompanied by corrésponding decreasing flow tate, while the static side of a well without packer (cas when flowing through the tubing, or vice-versa) remains relatively constant or even increases. It is at this point that the operator must use his best judg- ment and all possible related information to determine whether the well is loading up, or beginning to hydrate or “freeze up”, si wellhead pressures alone have the same initial trend in both cases. The flowing temperature at the wellhead must be observed frequently, and carefully, since loading up does not usually result in a marked decrease in temperature, while hydrating promotes a choking of the flow string with a subsequent rapid temperature drop. It may not be possible to run a standard. increasing four point test on a low productivity well which tends to load up, since each rate is increasingly affected by a back pressure compo- nent, the flow string, caused by the raising liquid column. In this case, a minimum deliverability level test is sometimes possible. ‘The test is then performed in decreasing flow- after-flow rate sequences, starting with high drawdowns, where the liquid can he untoaded continuously, and decreasing the flow rate by increasing the back pressure, in a step-wise fashion of no less than 4 to 6 hours and prefer- ably longer durations per rate, in fairly small (9% to 10%) pressure increments until the well begins to load up. Where it is practical to carry ‘on each successive decreasing flow rate to stabilized conditions a valid back pressure test is also obtained, together with the minimum deliverability test. Hydrating conditions in gas wells The formation of hydrocarbon ice crystals or hydrates will occur at any point in a gas or liquid hydrocarbon flow system, where the temperature reaches the hydrate point for the pressure condi- tion and the nature of the fluid in the systems, ‘Hydrates may occur at temperatures as high as 120°F but the normal danger zone is tempera- tures less than 70°F. Hence, hydrating, or “freezing”. as itis also named. is not an unusual phenomenon, and should always be expected as a possibility. As a general rule, the hydrating temperature tives with higher pressures, and starting with methane, also raises with the higher carbon components. To elaborate on this trend, for a given stream composition, lowering the pressure of the system will, at equal temperature, tend to prevent hydrating. Since the throttling of a stream causes a drop in temperature by expan- sion, some of the common hydrating points on a surface flow system are: 1) Chokes 2) Valves 3) Orifices 4) Sharp bends or restrictions in piping Hydrating in the subsurface well flow string may begin before any sign of hydrates have been observed at the surface testing system, The first indication of hydrates forming in the tubing or annular flow string is a drop in flowing wellhead pressures, followed by an initially slow, then progressively rapid drop in wellhead flowing temperature. It is of utmost importance to check the wellhead temperature at frequent intervals as ‘Surface Well Testing Page 3-2soon as the gas rate or flowing pressure are observed to decrease in an unusual fashion. Hydrates may be prevented to form, where the conditions are controllable, by lowering the pressure, increasing the heater temperature, or preventive injection of hydrate inhibitors, such as methanol, which is the most effective, or glycol, upstream of the points where hydrating is expected to set in, In the well flow string, hydrating may be prevented to occur for a limited time, by previ- ‘ous injection of methanol. Where a well has been completed with a tubing, but without a packer, hydrate inhibition by methanol injection on the shut-in wellhead valve (either tubing or casing) can be carried out during the whole flow period. Chemicals injected at the flowing wellhead side will be blown by the gas stream into the surface flow line and assist in preventing hydrates in the surface flow system. But this will not prevent hydrating of the flowing tubing or casing. In cases of wells with severe hydrating tendency, the test procedure may have to be modified in an attempt to prevent hydrating. This can sometimes be achieved by an initial flow sequence at a high rate in order to warm the subsurface flow string up or by conducting the test in the range of high pressure drawdowns, where it is permissible to do so. Tested determination of the minimum hy- drate free deliverability may be carried out safely, and reliable, by a procedure somewhat similar as the one proposed for liquid loading wells, with the difference that itis the wellhead flowing temperasare which becomes the critcal factor. ‘The test is of the conventional flow-after- flow decreasing rate type. It begins with spot- ting some methanol (onc barrcl at the most) into the tubing, and opening the flow for the largest permissible draw-down. Rates should be long enough to reach complete flowing temperature stabilization at the tubing head and preferably all of the same duration, but no less than 8 to 12 hours each, The rates are decreased in small step wise fashion, with continuous frequent temperature checks, until the onset of hydrating in the tubing Is indicated by a noticeable pres- sure and temperature drop. ‘The well is to be immediately shut-in before a solid hydrate plug is allowed to form. A barrel of methanol should then be injected into the tubing to remove the hydrates which have begun to form on the tubing wall. A wellhead pressure and temperature recorder is of valuable assis- tance to conduct this type of test. In order to prevent hydrating in the surface flow lines, methanol should be injected slowly and continuously near the tubing head wing valve. Where it was possible to carry on each rate to the point of flowing pressure stabili tion, this type of test will also be a valid back pressure test. Every attention should be given to prevent the tubing from freezing up completely, and to closing in the well in time, where the casing is packed off, since it becomes difficult and expen- Sive to remove a hydrate plug once it has set in. ‘Where wells have an opened casing, pumping of hot oil in the clear annular space will thaw hydrates in the tubing. However, application of hot oil or methanol on top of a hydrate plug is usually of little effect. If the plug happens to be very short, it may be pushed down by the allow- able overpressure of the pump dependant on the wellhead pressure rating. Sand, Mud, Salt, Etc. Sand production is more likely to occur with high productivity wells. The sand may originate from the formation rock and be “sloughed off” into the wellbore, or it may be sand recovered following a frac stimulation job where sand was used as a propping agent. Sand production will ‘cause rapid erosions of chokes, elbows and coil bends in the heater or heat exchanger. ‘The risk of sand production increases with higher drawdowns. In order to determine the recommended drawdown for a particular zone, the log data and sand production history of other wells in the field must be reviewed. By using the calculated maximum drawdawn asa guideline, the risk of sand production will be reduced. Surface Well Testing Page 3-3Underbalanced perforating is believed to produce perforations which are cleaner and less prone to sand production because of reduced differential pressures at the perforations. Sand production can be monitored at surface by: a) BS&W samples at the choke manifold Centrifuge samples should be checked for sand content at regular intervals, b) Erosion probes at choke manifold Small erosion probes just downstream of the choke give an early indication of sand production, however, may be knocked out by the force of the gas flow or fluid slugs. °) Erosion probe lubricators are placed between the choke manifold and heater and are the main early indicators of sand erosion. Erosion probe lubricators enable one to withdraw an erosion probe from the wellstream during flowing operations. The erosion on the probe can be observed to give an indication of sand production and its effects on surface equipment. d) Sand detectors measure the acoustical noise created by sand impinging cither on a probe in the flowstream or on the side of the flowpipe. The produced volumes of sand can be estimated from the sand detector readings. These tools are used primarily on producing wells where a baseline for background noise can be established. On short duration drillstream tests, it is difficult to establish a baseline before the test is over. ©) A portable ultrasonic meter will provide a quick and reliable check on the presence of any metal thickness loss in the flow piping. ‘Metal thickness at various elbows should be checked and recorded at regular intervals during the flow period. ‘Tf a well test is to be performed on a forma- tion that is known to produce large volumes of sand, or if a sand frac stimulation treatment has just been completed, then specialized eqnipment should be used during testing operations. It is often not economical to supply high pressure sand traps, installed upstream of the choke, with sufficient volumetric capacity. With ‘Most installations, some produced sand will be recovered in the separator, and may have to be discharged at regular intervals through the separator’s clean out valves, which should have a ceramic gate. If sand and other solids are continuously produced in appreciable quantities with well fluids, they must be removed by settling, centri- fnging, or filtering before the liquid enters the. separator. Medium grained sand in small quanti- ties can be removed by settling in a vertical sand separator with a conical bottom and periodically raining the residue from the vessel. ‘The least damaging way to handle produced sand during well cleanup, or testing, is to use fixed choke nipples replacing the adjustable choke. Positive chokes can take more erusiun, and cost considerably less to replace. Elimination of unnecessary bends in the piping system, as well as, using targeted elbows or tees is advisable. In addition the well should he produced with the minimum drawdown compatible with the flow- ing operation. Salt may be carried in suspension in the oil. ‘This salt may be removed by means of centrifug- ing, settling, or fresh water. Mixed with the oil the water absorbs the salt then the water can be removed by an appropriate means, ‘Surface Well Testing Page 3-4RELIEF AND RUPTURE DISK DRAIN AND BLOWDOWN GAS OUTLET tote PRESSURG Sand Separator Surface Well Testing Page 3-5CO, Testing Problems 1) CO, phase changes caused by temperature and pressure changes. 2) BTU/HR heat requirements to accommodate these phase changes. 3) Make-up of fuel requirements to allow combustion of the bumable effluents. 4) Potential danger of H,S being present and therefore SO, emissions from the combus- tion of H,S. 5) Chemical corrosion of metal is greater with CO, than H,S. CO, exists both in a liquid form and a gas- cous form. The CO, shouid be kept in a liquid form until the heater chokes and in a gaseous state from the heater chokes to the back pressure valve. The critical point of CO, is 1,071 psi and 90°F. Preferably, the upstream flowing pressure should be maintained above 1,300 psi to keep the CO, in liquid form. ‘There may be times when the upstream pressures will not reach 1,300 psi. If this happens, freezing downhole is more likely because of phase changes occurring there. Inside the heater all liquid CO, is changed into a gas and this phase change causes a tre- mendous energy loss. To have gaseous CO, downstream and allow operations to run smooth ~ attempt to keep the well effluents exiting the heater at 110°F or greater with a back pressure from 600 - 900 psi. ‘The best pipe seal rubber material to use at present according to elastomer engineers is a saturated Nitrile with a 90 durometer, Each union and rabber should be coated with a Hi- ‘Temp teflon grease before final knock-up. Use large LD. pipe and eliminate all bends and chokes in flowline not needed, upstream and downstream, Chemical pumps with discharge lines pump- ing methanol and inhibitor may be installed at the wellhead and upstream of the back pressure valves). With flowing wellhead temperatures below 100°F, heat requirements of approximately .5 MMBTU/HR per 1.0 MMCP/D are required e because of the phase changes occurring. As the wellhead temperature increases less BTU/HR. will be needed. A heater bath containing triethylene glycol allows the bath to exceed 300°F. Fuel gas used should be propane gas in a gascous state not liquid. If the temperature drops, liquid CO, can flow to the separator causing the dumps to discharge liquid CO, to the tanks. Separator pressures between 600 - 900 psi are preferred. Tempera- tures at the separator or gas run should be be tween 110 - 150*F. Do not go over 150°F as stainless steel has @ fatigue failure problem with corrosive gasses over 160°F. If the temperature gets below 10°F in the separator, some CO, gases will phase change back to liquid. In the sightglasses it will look like water, but when dumped to the tank, the CO, will phase change and flash off to a gas expanding at 65 fold and possibly blowing the tanks. ‘Water dumped through the meters may contain some CO,. If temperatures drop and liquid CO, is dumped, the possibility of freezing the internals of the meter exists. Be extra cau- tious when using positive displacement meters. Grease the Daniels gate and internals fre- quently. Only teflon plate holders should be used. Be aware of possible poor sealing in- volved with teflon holders and the meter run line bore. Back pressure valve(s) with controller(s) should be placed in line as close to flare end(s) as possible. This is done on CO, wells so that the pressure drop and subsequent phase change takes place as close to the disposal point as possible. While temperatures upstream of the back pressure valve should be 110 - 120°F, downstream temperatures may be 60°F colder. Flare stacks used should have automatic ignition. Thermocouples should provide back- up ignition of the pilot and warning if the pilots g0 out. A make-up fuel of a low combustible temperature is needed for lighting the combina- tion of combustible natural gas and non-combus- tible CO,.. The make-up fuel (propane ) has to be in a gaseous state not liquid to operate properly. Surface Well Testing Page 3-6Correct amounts of air and gas have to be in- jected for the system to work properly. Too much air or gas can cause poor ignition. Separator Operating Problems Variation in Static and Differential Pres- sure on the Barton ‘The following summarizes the main inci- dents and their causes which may arise and which can be detected by examining the static pressure (Pf) and the differential pressure (Hw) recordings on the chart. Differential rising - A) Choke flow cutting (additional indication - WHDP dropping) B) Liquid in LP Barton line ©) Leak in LP Barton line or bellows housing D) Ambient or separator temperature increase Differential dropping - A) Choke plugging (additional indication - ‘WHP increasing) B) Liquid puddle in front of orifice plate ©) Liquid in HP Barton line D) Leak in HP Barton line or bellows housing E) Ambient or separator temperature decrease Static steadily rising (causing a high pres- sure condition) - A) Back pressure valve malfunction, restricted, etc. B) Downstream valving or piping restricted or closed (check burner manifold valve position and any sign of coolness) Static will not increase (causing a low pressure condition) - A) Back pressure valve/controller malfunction (check valve movement) B) Relief valve or burst disc is leaking (check for pipe coolness and/or bum at relief outlet) ©) Restriction upstream of inlet at choke or valve D) Valve on separator open such as a drain line Irregularities in the Flow Rate This phenomenon is a great problem during well testing since it leads to inaccuracies in the gas flow rate readings and significantly reduces the separator’s capacity. It should also be noted that samples taken from the separator on a irregularly flowing well are incompatible from the point of view of representativity. Several reasons can be found for irregular flow rates: ‘Well slugging: the heading phenomenon which is characteristic of wells with a high G.OR. and oil wells with a botiomhole pressure lower than bubble point pressure. In these conditions it is possible to increase the separat- ing pressure or even decrease the flow rate in order to reduce the size of the phenomenon and stabilize flow, Blockage in pipes due to hydrates: a heater must be installed or the existing heater dupli- cated and/or a hydrate formation inhibitor (such as methanol) must be injected by means of a chemical injection pump. Regulation incorrectly set: a bad choice of proportional band may give rise to the cycling phenomenon in the regulating valves, resulting in pulsation of flow rates of the various fluids. ‘This phenomenon may be suppressed by the choosing a greater proportional band setting. Abnormal Separation Separator flooding: too much liquid tlow ‘olume fr capacity of separator ax evidenoed by significant liquid exiting the gas flare, Fre- Gquenly occurs during clean-up, especially when swabbing or coil tubing. Possible solutions include allowing well to clean-up more before going through unit, providing more or larger stages of separation, reducing rates, etc. Carryover: entrained liquid mist droplets exiting with gas to the flare. Gray smoke indi- cates water carryover, black smoke - oil, orange flame - condensate. Possible reasons could be liquid levels too high, mist extractor damage, or drain line leaking. Slight carryover is common due to the downstream pressure drop and ensu- ing gas phase change. Surface Well Testing Page 3-7Blowby: gas exiting with liquids. Possible causes include - low liquid levels, gas vortexing at liquid outlet, level control failure and normal solution gas breakout. Gas-liquid mixtures can easily be detected (flare which smokes or makes a deadened noise, whistling sound in the meters), but this is not the case with liquid mixtures which can only be detected by examining samples. Its strongly recommended that liquid BS&W samples be taken regularly. Operating at Low Flow Rate With low gas flow rate it is sometimes difficult to get good control since the pressure is controlled by a back pressure valve which is too large to give stable control whatever propor- tional setting is employed. Besides replacing valves or units, there is very little that can be done in this instance. Conducting Safe Operations ‘An integral and foremost part of testing procedures is the specialist’s duty, and responsi- bility to conduct these operations under safe conditions. Under no circumstances, including demands of the clients representative, is our specialist to allow flowing operations to be initiated or continued, if, in his judgment, there is any doubt that it can be carried out safely. Some possible unsafe conditions, which are by no means a complete list, are mentioned below. 1. Any component of the flow system between the wellhead and the heater choke having a rated working pressure below the maximum possible wellhead shut-in pressure. 2. Any leak in the complete flow system found during initial static pressure testing with water, or developing later during the flowing operations. 3. Insufficient heater capacity resulting in hydrating at the choke or at the back pressure valve. 4, Malfunction, freezing, or seizing up of a back pressure valve. 5. Insufficient venting capacity of storage or metering tanks. 6. Separator burst disc stamped rating of more than 1.25 the equipment’s rated working pressure. 7. Separator’s safety relief valve setting at pressure above the equipment rated pressure. 8. Plugging from hydrates, waxes, or solid in any part of the flow system. 9. Danger of, or noticeable erosion of the flow system from sand production, 10, Insufficient distances between wellhead, heater, storage tanks, and flare stack burner, resulting in fire hazard. 11. Working on a HS well without proper equipment and trained personnel. 12, Night time operations without sufficient lighting for the work area. Safety ‘There is no such thing as a routine pressure job and nothing is more important than safety. ‘Well trained personnel and proper equipment are prerequisites for all pressure jobs. Company safety regulations must be strictly observed on all well testing operations with particular regard given to this aspect when wildcat and/or sour gas HLS wells are involved. Some safety practices incfude the following: 1. Work clothes- Coveralls, hard hat, gloves, Slee} toed boots wom. Safety goggles and approved ear protection should be on hand and worn when necessary. 2. Hold a spot safety meeting. Include client and rig crew if possible. 3. Emphasize the emergency duties assigned to each crew member for the operative period. 4, Be aware of the dangers of working with high pressure. No line, valve or equipment should be worked on until all pressure is relieved. Watch for trapped pressure. Surface Well Testing Page 3-85. When possible use spark resistant tools, 6. Donot smoke around the well or equipment at any time. Leave all matches, lighters and cigarettes outside the work area. 7. When opening a valve under pressure, open the valve gradually. Gate valves should be fully open or fully closed. 8. Wear safety harness when working on high structures. 9. Wear life vest when working above water. 10. Secure all flowlines, relief lines, hoses, etc.. 11. Use common sense and proper safety procedures. Equipment 1) Select proper equipment for the pressure and service expected. H,S equipment can be used for non-H,S service; however, non-H,S equipment canfiot be used for H,S service. 2) Check pressure rating and compatibility of all connections. Do not exceed working pressure of the equipment. Note that the lowest pressure rating of a part, piece of ‘equipment within a flow stage determines the rating of the rest of the equipment within that stage. 3) Do not weld, file or use metal stamps on pressure equipment. H,S Overview Hydrogen sulfide, HS, often called “sour gas,” packs a double barreled punch. First, there is its direct effect on humans. H,S is a poison- ‘ous gas~it kills. Sccond, there is the indirect threat to human safety caused by HLS attack on metals, especially steel, used in pressure control equipment, H,S can literally destroy the strength of steel, causing it to fracture while under pressure with disastrous results. Effects on Personnel 1. Physical and Chemical Characteristics H,S is a colorless, flammable gas having an offeniive odor and sweet taste. Itis highly toxic. In fact, it is almost as toxic as hydrogen cyanide and is between five and six times as. toxic as carbon monoxide. Another hazardous feature of H,S is that it is heavier than air (den- sity 1.19). When ignited, H,S will produce another toxic gas: sulphur dioxide (S0,). This gas is also extremely hazardous if i H,S is soluble in water and liquid hydrocar- bons. It will mix with most liquids and free itself at ambient temperatures. 2. Toxicity As stated, HS is an extremely toxic gas. The sense of smell is lost after two to fifteen minutes of exposure in concentrations as low as 0.010 to 0.015% volume of the gas. Exposure to higher concentrations for less than a minute dulls the sense of smell completely and gives the person a false sense of security. 3. Symptoms Exposure results in irritation, principally ‘smarting of the eyes, a persistent cough. tighten- ing or burning of the chest, and skin irritation. Recovery from subacute poisoning is usually complete. Tn high concentrations of ILS, the results are almost instantaneous resulting in asphyxia (or strangulation) with seeming paralysis of the respiratory system. Symptoms of acute poison- ing are neavy breathing, pallor, cramps, paraly- sis of the pupil, loss of speech, and almost immediate loss of consciousness. Death may follow with extreme rapidity, caused by respira- tory and cardiac paralysis. The reason for the speed with which HS reacts is th: is very quickly absorbed by the bloodstream. Experience has shown that there is no pre- dictable pattern to any one person’s exposure to HLS and any departure from normal behavior in a Suspected environment should be checked. Remember, one sniff of a sufficiently high concentration of H,S can cause acute poisoning. Surface Well Testing Page 3-9Goncentration if 1 to 10 ppm 100 200 500 700 1,000 ppm 0% HS Toxictty H,S TOXICITY e Effect Offensive Smell Safe for 8 Hours Exposure Kills Smell in 3 to 15 Minutes May Stings Eyes and Throat Kills Smell Rapidh Stings Eyes and Throat Affects Ability to Reason and Balance Respiratory Paralysis in Minutes Administer Prompt Artificial Respiration Rapid Loss of Consciousness Cessation of Breathing Death Immediate Loss of Consciousness Permenant Brain Damage Death Surface Well Testing Page 3-104. Treatment ‘There is no known antidote for H,S. How- ever, prompt and safe action may save many lives. Victims should be removed to fresh air immediately by rescuers who are protected by gas masks. Artificial respiration should be administered if breathing has stopped. Although breathing is paralyzed, the heart may continue beating for ten minutes after the attack. If breathing is slow. labored, or impaired, artificial respiration should be supplemented by the administration of diluted oxygen with hose and face mask. Note: Do to poor sealing of gas mask, men with beards are not allowed to work on H,S jobs. Operating Procedures Find out as much as possible about the conditions in and around the well. Check spe- cifically for: Concentration of HS Type of well fluid Presence of any other corrosive source such as CO, Check the site for hazardous areas such as cellars, mud pit, etc. where H,S might accumu- ate, Remember, H,S is heavier than air; be cautious of low areas. When it is necessary to enter confined areas, such as tanks, cellars or pits, always use self-contained breathing appara- tus and station a rescue man outside. Also, be cautious of ice; H,S is soluble in water and high ‘concentrations may be frozen in water surround- ing the well. When such ice melts, the H,S will be released. Use “buddy system” - at least two men should be alert and looking out for each other during each shift’s operations. If someone should go down: first, don mask then attempt rescue. Safe areas should be upwind and uphill. Don mask during any operations where release of HS is expected or conceivable. These include obtaining samples, shrinkage tests, orifice plate and choke changes, etc. Make certain that gas masks and breathing apparatus are in proper working order and that air or oxygen tanks are full and free of oil. Have spare masks and apparatus in case of failure or if additional personnel are required. In the event of sudden gas release with no advance warning, personnel should take the following general actions: 1. Do Not Panic! 2. Hold breath. (Do not breathe.) 3. Put on protective breathing gear. 4, Proceed to the designated safe area and report any person in distress. Secure instructions from supervisor. Contingency Plan Any contigency plan should include the following: Local maps and emergency telephone num- bers should be prominently displayed in several accessible places. Emergency numbers should include. Ambulances Hospitals Doctors Veterinarian Helicopters All local law enforcement agencies State civil defense agency State air and water conservation agency Surface Well Testing Page 3-11A current copy of these numbers should also be prominently displayed in the radio dispatcher’s office in the district where the service work is being performed. Effects on Equipment HS attacks steel in three ways 1) Corrosive attack: When water is present along with H,S, the iron in steel reacts with sulphur forming iron sulfide (FeS) and releases free hydrogen. Carbon dioxide (CO,) combines with water to form carbonic acid (CH,CO,) which in tum attacks the steel. In cither case, water is necessary to permit the reaction to occur. 2) Carbide attack: Once liberated by the corro- sive action or furnished from any source, the hydrogen atoms may unite with the carbon in the steel to form methane gas, CH,. This eaves voids making the steel spongy and greatly weakened. 3) Hydrogen embrittlement: The most spec- tacular effect of hydrogen on steel is known as hydrogen embrittlement. It occurs when hydrogen atoms invade the steel lattice structure along planes of stress and once. inside, combine with other free atoms to form molecular hydrogen, H,, The molecu- Jar hydrogen is much larger than the atomic hydrogen and exerts tremendous pressure against the steel structure causing it to crack and eventually fail. Failure can be quite sudden and can occur at stress levels far lower than the material’s normal yield strength. Temperature, pressure and H,S concentration affect the rate at which the free hydrogen invades the steel. ‘Tensile strength of the stcel and the stress level to which it is sub- jected determine its susceptibility to attack. Generally, steel with relatively low hardness (Rc22 or less) and low yield strength (say less than or equal to 75,000 psi) are ductile enough to resist permanent damage. Surface Well Testing Page 3-12Wee bowie Mer eer CH UNLIO couraNT [SOUR SEPARATOR NO. | SWEET SEPARATOR NOL | DATE (YYHAIOO) FOREMAN TESTING SUPERVISOR so WELL CLASSIRCATION ary | ai ; PERSONNEL & CERTIFICATES Ee ees DAY SUPERVISOR eo = NIGHT SUPERVISOR = acoenes aan ees ae — Saeee ee a caer | poner rs a Welt Tesang on si0, ee Wing Flags - Guy tines Danae Smowng avd Porro! Beyer = is — ES Separunr Area rank Aro Adequate Floodlights | Work Derm on ‘ocaon Approved Firat Aid Kit Projo Saley Mawang rats Surface Well Testing Page 3-13‘MOTE: ANY -NO" ANSWERS MUST WAVE AM EXPLANATION “SEPARATORS ~ Free Wom dora, bonds & -Adenutied tor required 7 * Fgh arom Fla toe amen + Sight lanes clean wet ro inecranen! saree Sgr gan ow wr pee e oe = Sample pore ped wit ‘nmecge ook nae “Roliet valve contorme to regulations ~ Choke sem and seat checked A tarwced ~ Ores pain roe rom ware, ines, and oroaon “i meter Liga Flomines| =tommon game L "Minimum Pressure fare lot Separator Mot sotason pos Ra imenarot aah char derweee ‘Heaiar oat at axa \omoaranre beer owe - ~ ir ft aa Doser Durer soumzes ‘Supa gas toe of wate ane ‘equate town som Surface Well Testing Page 3-14HOTE: ANY "NO" ANAWERS MUST HAVE Aw EXPLANATION mom |g) commenrarexrrananions sidentitied for required 7 ‘donut Lovet conte operavonas ~ Sano porta apa Bes oa rt wud “toad com area ~ae onane (Cita emaen aot ~fiate ae ed vey [Sros tea rarorawr veaiee a Literary “Lower seo sally accesible ~ Atached w raed anton pee vate rena en ~ Usper patorm soasonea wt] wo eter ree inerior art wasted -Froe of aarage e Valves oooratons Hoses not leaking or samaged a Surface Well Testing Page 3-15MOTE: AMY -NO" ANSWERS MUST HAVE AW EXPLANATION 2 “Minimurn prosoure rating required “Tagged tor required service —— yews poo mann eit tes saa wet overseas Propane soage fi aaa openness [Copy of customers operating Propane vaponze operator! lbrocedure manual on location [Phare vaparaw free rome Sia spout OP entecasen rom Seago tra ane Som tom Store ‘tare eopeabi) srr = 271 Tetra pear on 07 Tsang ara! Fire port poste MSQS web ore coerce @ Face sila Foaea an Gave semen cit iease ranaorasonavaabie soi on eae Loca Eargency shone umbers poatae ‘arometw wana (requred) ‘Rtaciometer avai i ] Wetnead 10 soparaer 25m Renee Gas Toc and bes avaanie Separator to tarontacx 25m a Separator producien anes [A equoment purged ® 15 ores 25m ‘oture & chested win JW tetoe Seoarate to prepare vasonze 2m Propane swrageraooncer oase vaiers a Surface WellTesting Page 3-16Overall Effects (wa) WHP/Rate/Other . Trends Different Trends Erratic Extreme Trend Distinctive Trend Change Time ReadingsFlow Effects Evaluation of Rate/Pressure Trends Choke Size WHP q Rate Time te Flow Conduit/Too Small Flow Fighting Effect Bottleneck WHP i: a q TIME ® GasVelocity at MaxFlow Conduit/Too Large q ae Flow Fallback Effect (Temperature Drop) WHP Uigid Lesa q Gas q Liquid 7) X 1 4@ High Capacity Well Over Achievement Effect WHP TimeLow Pressure/Capacity Well Under Achievement Effect WHP —_—_—_—__ Time® Multiphase Flow ® Cycling Effect “~~ ~~. Gas & Liquid WHP Separate q Oil >< Time cc = (=Heavy Oil/Paraffin Flow e Plug Flow Effect <—-Paraffin Build-up WHP Low Velocity @ Oil q Oil Time@ CO, Production = Refrigeration Effect (Temperature Drop) WHP Liquids Condense ae Velocity creases . | | Time | RK — e CaNPerforation Plugging Restricted Rate Volume Effect WHP Start Plugging Time ———— Perforations Choke FlowCrossflow or Lost Rate Effect Formations with Different Capacity & Pressures WHP New Flow Channeis Opened eae ceaeta aN Te rat CE — ——Enhanced Flow Improved Flow Channel Effect WHP | ‘After Improvement | eo Time New Flow Channels Openede@ GENERAL WELL TRENDS Clean-up Phase Wellhead Pressure ‘+ Wellhead pressure will drop from the shut-in pressure as the well is opened to flow. ‘© Wellhead pressure will increase as the fluid cushion and extraneous fluids are replaced by lighter reser- voir fluids. © Wellhead pressure will eventually stabilize, ‘* Wellhead pressure will slowly decrease with depletion ofthe reservoir. Wellhead Pressure Time Wellhead Temperature Wellhead temperature will increase with the flow of hot reservoir fluids, ‘© Wellhead temperature will stabilize with well flow stabilization. Wellhead Pressure @ Timees Annulus Pressure ‘+ Annulus pressure may be altered for the operation of annulus pressure responsive (apr) tools. ¢ Annus pressure will increase with the flaw af hot reservar finds ‘* Annulus pressure will stabilize with well flow stabilization, Annulus Pressure Time BS&w ‘* Extraneous fluids will decrease and eventually dissipate © Water cut will stabilize BS&W TimeSalinity ‘© Salinity will stat near formation water Salinity Time PH © Aller acidizing, water pH will steadily move wward 7. Hs * HS levels will increase then somewhat stabilize co, © CO, levels will stabilize Downstream of Choke Pressure ‘* Pressure downstream of the choke will be dependent upon wellhead pressure, choke size, fluid flow rates and test system. ‘© Critical flow conditions should exist.ea) e Downstream of Choke Temperature ‘* Downstream temperature will be less than wellhead temperature due to expansion at the choke causing a cooling effect. Tank Volume © Extraneous liquid return will be initially high. Rates will be whp/choke dependent © Asreservoir fluid production increases, tank bypass will generally occur. Flare/Burner © Quality of bum will initially indicate tne retum of extraneous fluids. © Quality and intensity of fire will improve the production of higher percentages of reservoir fluids © Oil bumer line pressure will be dependent upon flow rate and naz7le(s) arrangement; stabilizes with well flow.eS e Problem Solving Abnormal Trends Clean-up Phase Symptom Cause Action: Wellhead Pressure Increasing Choke Plugging Adjust Choke Choke Hydrates ‘Use Heater Choke ‘Use Heater Chemical Injection Increase Rate Low Productivity Well Nothing--Normal Continuing Clean-up. Unloading of Liquid in Increase or Decrease in surges Choke Setting Decreasing ‘Well Loading Up ‘Normally increase Choke Size e ‘Choke Cutting Inspect Wellhead Pressure Timeea Sunpiom Cause Action Wellhead Temperature Decreasing Tubing Hydration Reduce Rate ‘Chemical Injection Shut-In Wellhead Temperature Time Annulus Pressure Increasing Test Stuing Leak Bleed Off Possible Shut-In Decreasing Test String Leak Abort If Necessary Packer Leak @ Annulus Pressure Time BS&W Increasing ‘Water Coning Reduce Rate Sand Production Reduce Rate BS&wW waa @ TimeSymatom Cause Action Downstream of Choke Pressure Increasing Choke Cutting Check Flow System Downstream Restriction Check Flow System Decreasing Choke Plugging Adjust Choke Hydrate Formation Determine Hydrate Point, Adjust Choke, Use Heater Chemical Injection Downstream Pressure Time Downstream of Choke Temperature Decreasing Larger Pressure Drop Stage Chokes, Remain in Critical Flow, Use Heater Choke Plugging Adjust Choke Downstream Temperature e Timeeae ‘Symptom Cause Oil Burner Pressure Increasing Nozzle(s) Plugging Decreasing Nozzle(s) Cutting Rate Declining Oil Burner Pressure Time Clear Nozzle (s) Replace Nozzle(s) Reduce Nozzle(s)Stable Well Flow Wellhead Pressure & Temperature © Will have stabilized at the end of clean-up Annulus Pressure © With stabilization of well flow; will have stabilized BS&w ‘* Basic sediment should be insignificant ‘+ Water cut should be relatively constant Salinity * Should be relatively constant Downstream of choke pressure + With stable well flow and critical flow at choke, downstream pressure will be dependent upon separator pressure Downstream of choke temperature Will increase with decrease of pressure drop across the choke; will decrease with increase of pressure drop. Heater Temperature ‘© Ifnecessary, will be stable provided stability of well flow and thermostatic control Separator Pressure ‘© Will be stable after final setting of controlsa Separator Temperature ‘© Will be relatively constant provided heater temperature andor well flow are stable Gas Measurement Pressure Upstream of Orifice © Effectively equal to separator pressure Pressure downstream of orifice (static) ‘* Slightly less than separator pressure; with stable flow, will increase with higher separator back pressure andjor larger orifice plate size Differential Pressure ‘© With stable flow, deviation of pressure upstream and downstream of orifice is dependent upon separator pressure and orifice size; variance will increase with decrease of separator pressure and/or smaller orifice Downstream Gas Temperature ‘Will be less than separator temperature due to expansion Gas Specific Gravity ‘* With stable well and separator conditions will be relatively consistent; may be seen to vary inversely with separator pressure HS ‘* Will be increasing or constant co, © Will be relatively constantOil Measurements Oil Flowrates ¢ With stable flow, will be relatively constant Oil Temperature © Will be close to separator temperature Olt API Gravity * With stable rate, will be relatively constant BS&w © Water cut should be negligible Shrinkage © May be seen to vary directly with changes in separator pressure Water Measurements Water Flowrates ‘* With stable flow, will be relatively constant GOR Saturated Oil Reservoir ‘* Will initially increase then stabilize Other Reservoirs * With stable flow, should be relatively constant,aes) Separator GOR ‘+ Will be affected by separator conditions; increases with decreasing separator pressure increases with increasing separator temperature Problem Solving Abnormal Trends Stable Well Flow Symptom Wellhead Pressure Increasing Decreasing Wellhead Pressure Choke Plugging ‘Choke Hydrates Low Productivity Well Continuing Clean-up Unloading of Liquid in Surges Choke Setting Well Loading Up Choke Cutting Time Verify Pressures and Rate ‘Changes; Adjust Choke Use Heater Choke Use Heater Chemical Injection Increase Rate Complete Clean-up Increase or Decrease ‘Nomnally Increase Choke Size Verify Higher Rate Inspect Choke& e ‘Svmatom Cause Action Wellhead Temperature Decreasing Tubing Hydration Reduce Rate Chemical Injection ‘Shut-in Wellhead Temperature Time Annulus Pressure Increasing ‘Test String Leak Bleed Ott Possible Shut-in Decreasing Test String Leak Abort if Necessary Packer Leak Annulus Pressure Time Bsaw Increasing Water Coning Reduce Rate ‘Sand Production Bsaw e Timecs) Svmpiom Cause Action Downstream of Choke Pressure Increasing Downstream Restriction Check Flow System Decreasing ‘Choke Plugging Verify Pressure and Rate Changes; Adjust Choke ‘Hydrate Formation Determine Hydrate Point, adjust Choke, Use Heater, Chemical Injection. Downstream Pressure Time Downstream of Choke Temperature Decreasing Larger Pressure Drop Stage Chokes, Remain in Cnitical Flow, Use Heater Choke Plugging Verify Pressure and Rate Changes; Adjust Choke Downstream Temperature Time&& Symptom Cause Action Separator Static Pressure Increasing Back Pressure Problem Examine Controller/ Valve Action Downstream Restriction Check Flow System Decreasing Back Pressure Problem Examine Controller/Valve Action ‘Wrong Valve Open Check Relief, Drain,Liquid ‘Valves for Exit Point Upstream Restriction Check Flow System Erratic Back Pressure Problem Examine Controller/Valve Action; If Cycling, Increase e P B.; If Hunting, Decrease Below Bubblepoint Reduce Rate; Put More Back Pressure on Well Static Pressure Time Separator Differential Pressure Increasing ‘Choke Cuuting Verify WHP Drop Replace Choke Liquid or Leak in Drain or Inspect e Barton Downstream Line With Soapy Water ‘Temperature Increase Ambient or Heater‘Symptom Cause Action Decreasing ‘Choke Plugging Verify WHP Rise ‘Adjust Choke Liquid or Leak in Drain or Inspect Barton Upstream Line With Soapy Water Temperature Decrease Ambient or Heater Differential Pressure Time Separator Oil Meter Rates Increasing Passing Gas Raise Level; Prove Meter at Tank Decreasing Damaged Meter Use Secondary Meter Repair/Replace Pants Erratic ‘Wrong Sensitivity ‘Adjust Proportional Band Setting Oil Rates BS &W Time Increasing Water Level Height Lower Water LevelSymptom Separator Water Meter Rate Increasing. Decreasing Tank Readings Ematic Oll Burner Pressure Increasing Decreasing Flare Visual Abnormal Bum. Passing Gas Damaged Meter, Foamy Oils. Emulsions Liquid Densities Nozzle(s) plugging Nozzle(s)Cutting Rate Declining ‘Separator Liquid & Raise Level; Prove Meter at Tank ‘Use Secondary Tank Repair/Replace Parts Allow More Retention Time, Use Two Compart- ‘ment Vessel Drain off Heavier Liquid to Improve U-tube in Sight Glass Clear Nozzles) Replace Nozzle(s) Reduce Nozzle(s) Lower Liquid Levels, Check Separator Valving for Exit Point4 Hydrocarbons Gases Gases are classed in the same manner as liquids, according to specific gravities, but the densities of gases are compared to the density of air rather than fresh water. A 0.7 gravity gas weighs 0.7 as much as an equal quantity of air. Although air is not of uniform density, itis interesting to note that atmospheric pressure is caused by the weight of the column of air above a point, just as hydrostatic pressure is caused by the weight of a column of the fluid. At average sea level, the pressure of one atmosphere amounts to about 14.7 psi. Atmospheric pres- sure becomes less at a higher altitude because there is a shorter column of air above such a point. | Atmosphere = 14.7 psi = 30 in, of mercury = 408 in, of fresh water (these comparisons will help explain the basis of gas flow mea- surement in section 6) The density of air is 0.0764 1b/cubic foot at 60° F and at 14.7 psia. ‘The density of any gas = specific gravity of gas x 0761, ‘The specific gravity of air = 1.0 ‘The principal difference in working with gas as compared 10 liquid is dhe fact hata liquid for all practical purposes is non-compressible. Gas is compressible up to the point where it becomes liquified. Temperature affects liquid volume to a small degree in comparison to a gas. As we deal with well pressures and temperatures, in varying conditions, its necessary to understand the laws governing expansion of gases. ‘The physical condition of any stable fluid iguid or gas) for most purposes is completely defined by the pressure, volume, and tempera ture. If the conditions are far removed from the conditions corresponding to the liquid state, the fluid is called a “perfect” or “ideal” gas. Most gases approach ideal conditions at low pressures or low densities and high temperatures. For such gases these three variables are closely connected to each other in their respective changes by the three fundamental gas laws described in the following. Boyle’s Law states: When the temperature is kept constant, the volume of a given mass of an ideal gas varies inversely as to the absolute pressure to which it is subjected. Note particularly that this law applies only when the gas temperature is maintained constant. The law means that, with a given weight of gas, if the absolute pressure of the gas is doubled, its volume will be halved; if its absolute pressure is tripled, its volume will be one-third of the original volume, etc. Likewise, halving the pressure doubles the volume, etc. Expressed mathematically: V = Volume P = Pressure Boyle’s Law is: V,=P, at constant temperature Final volume: Final pressure: Charles’ Law states: When the absolute. pressure is kept constant, the volume of a given mass of an ideal gas will vary directly to the absolute temperature of the gas. Note particularly that this law applies only when the pressure is kept constant. ‘This means that with the pressure held constant, if the absolute temperature of a given weight of gas is doubled, its volume will be doubled; if its absolute temperature is tripled, its volume will be three times the original volume, etc, Surface Well Testing Page 4-1Likewise, halving the absolute temperature halves the volume, etc Expressed mathemati- cally: V=Volume T= Temperature (Rankine) Charles’ Laws: V, =, at constant pressure aa Final Volume V,=V,T, fi Final Temperature T, = T,Y, Tye jay-Lussac’s Law states: If the volume of a given mass of an ideal gas is kept constant, the absolute pressure will vary directly as to the absolute temperature of the gas. Note that Gay Lussac’s Law applies only ‘when the volume is kept constant. This means that when the volume is held constant, if the absolute temperature of a given weight of gas is doubled, its absolute pressure will be doubled; if its absolute temperature is tripled, its absolute pressure will be tripled, etc. Likewise, halving the absolute temperature halves the pressure, etc. Expressed mathematically: P=Pressure T= Temperature (Rankine) Gay Lussac’s Law is:_P, =, at constant volume mT P,=PT Pa T,=TP, Te Final Pressure: Final Temperature: General Gas Law: Any two of the three gas laws can be employed to derive the general gas law which applies to all combinations of changes in a perfect gas relating to volume, pressure and temperature for a given weight of a gas. Expressed mathematically: Initial P,V, = Final P,V, for a given mass of gas. ee ‘The Fundamental Gas Law as it applies to well testing is simply a combination of Boyle’s Law, Charles Law, and Avagadro’s Law. Boyle’s and Charles’ laws have been defined. Avagadro’s Law states: At any pressure and temperature equal volumes of gases contain the same number of molecules. ‘The Fundamental Gas Law, in its most useful form, becomes: Py=ZaRT or 2xien, alk DART, P= Absolute Pressure (psia) V= Volume in cubic feet T= Absolute Temperature in degrees Rankine (F + 460) Compressibility Factor, or the devia tion factor of an actual gas from ideal gas behavior ‘Number of Pound-Moles of the gas Universal gas constant. Its numerical value is the same for all gases when used in this form and is equal to 10.73 (when the other terms are expressed in the units given) Pressure In using the fundamental gas law, pressure may be expressed in (psia) pounds per square inch absolute, or in (psig) pounds per square inch gauge; however, it is important to be con- sistent in one or the other, It is generally better to use absolute pressure since atmospheric Pressure may vary according to the earth’s surface altitude, ‘Temperature ‘Temperature is expressed in degrees Rankine, which is absolute in the Fahrenheit scale. It is equal to degrees Fahrenheit plus 460. Surface Well Testing Page 4-2“Z” Compressibility Factor This is the deviation factor that corrects the real gas to the ideal gas condition. The “Z” compressibility factor is a function of gas com- position, temperature and the pressure to which the gas is subjected. It has been found by ex- perimentation that natural gas is more compress- ible than would be indicated by the perfect gas aw. ‘This means that, if a certain amount of natural gas were measured at some low pressure and thcn compressed to some higher pressurc, the volume actually measured at the higher Pressure is less than the volume that would be calculated using the perfect gas law to correct the measured volume from the lower to the higher pressure. This also means that, with a decrease in pressure, natural gas is more expan- ‘nn than would be indicated by the perfect gas law. ‘The amount of deviation of a natural gas upon the relative quantities of the various hydrocarbons and other gases that constitute the natural gas. Experiments have shown that the deviation is greater for the heavier hydrocarbon gases than for the lighter hydrocarbon gases, For this reason, no one set of definite values can be used which would apply to all natural gases. Individual values must be determined for each natural gas, Mole A“mole” of any gas may be defined as a weight of that gas equivalent to its molecular weight. The molecular weight is determined by the atomic weight of each chemical element of which the gas is composed and the number of atoms of the various elements constituting one molecule of the gas. For example, the atomic weight of carbon is 12, and the atomic weight of hydrogen is 1. Then, the molecular weight of ethane (C,H), since each molecule is composed of two atoms of carbon and six atoms of hydrogen, is 2 X 12 + 6X 1 or 30. Note: One pound-mole of a gas at standard conditions occupies 379.5 standard cubic feet at 14.70 psia and 60 F. In the English system, as used in the USA , mole signifies “pound- mole”. In the metric system mole signifies “Gram-mole”. As an example a pound-mole of methane (CH,) means 16 pounds of methane, while 2 gram-mole of methane means 16 g. of methane. Mole “fraction” is the fractional part of the number of moles in any component gas that is part of the total moles that go into a gas mixture. Example; a mole “analysis” shows that 2 gas is made up of 85% methane, 5% propane and 10% ethane at standard conditions (14.7 psia and 60 T.). The mole fraction of ethane equals 1/10 or 10 of the total mixture, Law of Corresponding States In presenting the pseudocritical method for calculating gas deviation, it will be necessary to define some fundamental terms. The term “pseudo” merely designates a gas mixture, as Gistinguished from a pure single component gas. For example, a single component gas has a constant critical pressure and temperature, (ic. hand book value), whereas the gas mixture has a critical pressure and temperature which depends on the composition of the gas. “Critical Temperature” may be defined as the temperature above which a gas cannot be liquitied by application of pressure. “Critical Pressure” is the absolute pressure required to lquify agus ats erica empers- * edtuced Temperature”, in this discussion, is the ratio of actual absolute temperature to absolute critical temperature. “Reduced Pressure” is the ratio of actual pressure to absolute critical pressure. “Compressibility Factor Z” is the gas devia- tion factor. ‘The principle of corresponding states has been useful in correlating the properties of gases. In the application of the principle of correspond- ing states to single-component gases, the critical state of the gas is used as the reference state, In the application, the following terms are used: ‘Surface Well Testing Page 4-3P. = critical pressure Pr=P T, = critical temperature P = critical volume, e Tr=T 7, ‘See Compressibility factor for natural gases chart below. vr=¥ Wi ‘The deviation from ideal gas laws or com- pressibility factor Z is used in conjunction with P_ = reduced pressure reduced temperature and reduced pressure. T, = reduced temperature V. = reduced volume ono 88 5 cn e@ Surface Well Testine Compressibility Factor for Natural Gases Pace dodm ry r ike 730) r : = = ° i , i 5; f : i 1 i i F Ht 3 : ' w 700) - - E oe te : r aan 3 MISCELLANEOUS Gases = 60) . as 5 Wey Fwuios 8 g 600} < : ini [ : Ai e 8 500} i & g = z 2 0 z 4 we ; Soe 5 . cot 8 o t 3 : i a Z g 350) aarer Saree ae GAS GRAVITY AIR=1 PSEUDO CRITICAL PROPERTIES OF MISCELLANEOUS NATURAL GASES @ From Grown, Katt, Obertell and Alden (1968) tavern fom Cen nd Bere 1958) Pseudo Critical Properties of Miscellaneous Naturai Gases Surface Well Testing Pave 4-5Viscosity Generally, the viscosity of gas increases with increasing pressure, except at very low pressures where it becomes more or less independent of the pressure. At low pressures, the viscosity of as, unlike that for liquids, increases as the temperature is raised. Hydrocarbons ‘The make-up of the hydrocarbon molecules will cause the fluids to exist in different forms at surface standard conditions, For the most part the following is true: Hydrocarbons of C, through C, are gas at surface Tydrocarbons of C, through C,, are liquid at surface Hydrocarbons of C,, are classified as heavy paraffin Natural gas is composed primarily of light molecules of methane (CH,) with minor amounts of etane (C, H,), propane (C, H,), and butanes (C, H.,,). Although natural gas occurs as gas under pressure in porous rock beneath the earth's surface, often it it in solution with crude oil or condensate. Liquid crude oil is made up of a majority of heavier, more complex compo- nent molecules. Nonhydrocarbon constituents include nitrogen, hydrogen sulfide, carbon dioxide, helium, and water vapor. Boiling Crude point, *P. Chemical fractions (Nelting pt.) composition Use Hydrocarbon gases Ca-cq Natural gas, bottled fuel gas e Petroleum ether to 160 5-C6, Solvent, paint thinner, cleaner (igroin) Gasvaine 200-400 cy-tg Motor fuel, solvent Kerosene 400-575 Cr0-Cig Tluminating oil, diese fuel, jet fuel, cracking stock Light gas oi1 575-850 Crg-C30 Lubricating oil, medicinal oil, transformer oil, mineral 031, cracking stock avy gas oi] 850-1,100 ©30-C50 ing oil, bunker fuel. (12s) : Residuum 1,200 + Ceo+ Ters, asphalts, bitunens, (residue) (2,200+) waxes, resins, pitch, mineral oil. wood preservatives, roofing compounds, road oil, paving asphalts, coke fypical Crude Oil Fractions Surface Well Testing Page 4.6Tampere Phase Diagram of a Pure Substance Phase Diagrams Understanding the phase changes that occur to produced hydrocarbon fluids with changes in pressure and temperature is an important tool in monitoring well conditions and preparation of sampling. Phase changes that occur at the surface and reservoir are brought about by the properties of the fluid, the production rates, and the flowing ‘temperatures. A phase diagram is a graph of pressure plotted against temperature which shows the conditions under which the various phases of a substance may be present. They are also called Pressure-Temperature Diagrams. Vapor Pressure Line The line Tis known as the vapor pressure line. This line divides the region where the substance is a gas or liquid. Pressure-Tempera- ture points which fall exactly on the line indicate conditions under which both gas and liquid exist. If one were to have a pure substance (like propane) in a cell at a pressure of P, as shown on the figure, the propane would be in the liquid phase. ‘As mercury is removed, the pressure will decrease until it reaches a value of P,, the vapor pressure of the propane. At this point, a gas phase will begin to form as molecules leave the liquid. Pressure, which has forced the molecules together, has been reduced such that those molecules with the highest kinetic energy can escape the liquid and form a gas phase. As mercury removal continues, the volume of the gas phase will increase and the volume of the liquid will decrease; however, the pressure will remain constant at a value of P, (see figure on page 4-7). Once the liquid phase disappears, further mercury removal will cause a decrease in presrure as the remaining gas phase expands. Eventually, the pressure will reach the point P, ‘on the phase digram. This description only applies for a pure substance. Critical Point ‘The point labeled C on the phase diagram is the upper limit of the vapor pressure line and is called the Critical Point. The temperature and. pressure represented by this point are called the Gieal ‘Temperature (T..) and the Critical Pressure P.). For a pure substance, Te is defined as the temperature above which a gas cannot be liquified regardless of the pressure applied. Similarly, the P. of a pure substance is defined as the pressure above which liquid and gas cannot co-exist re- gardless of the temperamre. ‘The lower figure on page 4-8 gives some of the physical properties for common occuring hydrocarbon components. Surface Well Testing Page 4-7Liquid Density Eat. Pan Eat Pan (Chitin! Conmans QO°F,147 pin Volumeat Volume at Compeuad @ Le RMT ete Tempentun yer per Pain Gal pain Gal TR e Gal per MCF per Limo 302038290 146 383 9 ous 4 196 4H e660 sosor? 423 m8 war 46 SOSca 4695 26 12380 7687 Nobu 4ar? aha na Bac ose 8 209 3080 sic2—ossi2 8.282 sen oi? ogo aos vas nee 8738 4603 7008 aay? 310 oni7 eon 123 Beene on 6121 mer AT 401 = 1030702 400 asa 32 aoe 9 “ana tao 3408 =765 12065 ma -304 a8 mo =e 738.9 1802 2120 320051168. 0.0000 “Basis partial volume in elution SAC babblnpoine pramureand 80°F, Physical Properties of the Paraffin hydrocarbons and Oiher Compounds Surface Well Testing Page 4-8Phase diagram of a low-shrinkage crude oi, The vertical line shows a reduction in reservoir pressure: Gt constant reservoir temperature. The dashed line simulates the change from reservoir conditions fo Separator conditions as the fluid is produced. ‘Multicomponent Mixtures Phase Diagrams Pure substances are not common to reservoirs. Reservoirs do not contain just one component of hydrocarbon. A multi-component mixture of hydrocarbons will have a phase diagram similar to the one shown above. Matter of fact, this phase diagram is typical for low- shrinkage crude oil. When mixtures of components of hydrocar- bons are considered, the vapor pressure line becomes a Bubblepoint Line and a Dewpoint Line. The bubblepoint is the point at which the first few molecules leave the liquid and form a small bubble of gas. The dewpoint is the point at which only a small drop of liquid remains. For a pure substance the pressure at the bubblepoint and dewpoint are equal to the vapor pressure of the substance at the temperature of interest. Low-Shrinkage Crude If the initial reservoir pressure and tempera- ture are at point 2, the oil is at its bubblepoint and is said to be saturated. The word saiuratcd. is used in this sense to indicate that the oil contains as much dissolved gas as it can hold and a reduction in pressure will cause the forma- tion of a gas phase. If the initial reservoir pressure and temperature are at point 1, the oil is said to be undersaturated. As oil is removed from the reservoir, the pressure will decrease and point 3 will eventu- ally be reached. At point 3, the fluid remaining in the reservoir consists of 75 mole % liquid and 25 mole % gas. ‘The point which indicates the pressure and temperature in the separator lies close to the bubblepoint line. It indicates 85 mole % of the produced oil remains as a liquid in the separator. ‘This is a fairly high percentage; therfore, this oil is called a low-shrinkage oil. This type of oil contains relatively more larger molecules than smaller molecules. When produced, low-shrinkage oils usually yield gas/oil ratios (GOR) at the surface of less than 500 SCE/STB with oil gravities of 30° API or less. The produced liquid is usually black or deeply colored. Surface Well Testing Page 4-9 eePhase diagram of a high-shrinkage crude ol The vertical line shows a reduction in reservoir fant reservoir te Pressure af const. temp. . Th Conaiitions 16 separator Conaitions as the fluid is pr High-Shrinkage Crude (Volatile Oil) ‘The phase diagram for a high shrinkage crude oil is shown above. Points 1 and 2 on this diagram have the same ‘meaning as in the low-shrinkage cude oil diagram. Notice that as the pressure is reduced below the bubblepoint, a large amount of gas is formed. By the time the pressure has reached point 3, the reservoir contains 40 mole % liquid and 60 mole % gas. Approximately 65% of the fluid remains liquid at separator conditions. This is consider- ably less liquid than for the low-shrinkage crude cil. The high-shrinkage crude oil contains rela- tively fewer of the heavier molecules than the low shrinkage crude oil. The stock tank oils produced from reservoirs containing high-shrinkage crude oils are usually deeply colored with gravities less than 50* API and GOR’s less than 8000 SCF/STB. Retrograde Condensate Gas Occasionally, the reservoir temperature lies just above the critical temperature giving a condi- tion as shown on page 411. About 25 mole % of the produced fluid remains liquid at the surface. The liquid produced from this type of hydrocarbon mitures is called a 1@ dashed line simulates the change from reservoir roduced. condensate (sometimes distillate) and the gas is called a condensate gas. The liquid formed in the reservoir is commonly called a retrograde fiquid ‘When the reservoir conditions are at point 1, a single phase gas exists in the reservoir. As the reservoir pressure declines during production, retrograde condensation takes place in Wie reser= voir. When the pressure reaches point 2, a 200.000 cater Water nite! Biack oF Deepiy oe Lightly | Water Waite | sone @ tigie | Deeply Colored} Colored tence Hydrocarbon Table Surface Well Testing Page 4-12eunyesadway 4 Uf - - ee - Fa ee 7 ‘ 7 a ssoud vor. osuapios 4 te 7 7306 puo jo 77 30149509 pi409 77 a Zt ; apesbovias jouey Osi ! aed ajqnog— 4 ALS. . - Uke eae MV,” 2 Goyotuodon- ~ uc -3pb4603434 jouisayjosyX | UL ~ _ 2pp.sb044a3 eo oe 21:24) “ured jobip VRS spgos;_ = - - Pressure-Temperatuire Phase Diogrom Page 4-13 Surface Well Testing="3unsssva 100g s180N0 Junssies smiod 370800 M01 owe sro. 40 S3904Km NOREYDOBIIN TRUDLIN 10 $31u300UE Dawes Properties of Natural Hydrocarbon Mixtures of Gas and Liquid--Bubble Point Pressure Page 4-14 Surface Well Testingresedieg qateneen e1us0rTi°9 keer wrtseos = 0017 smog 9 ¢8NG 4% HOTA NoLLEMEOS soureosco Morr Ne rmseaTYD 20 eiviar ao Panna FON Amis 376808 1° 3wAI0A NoKMBCS OM001 ONY S¥9 50 S2UALEIN NOBUYDONDAH MunLeN 40 S7LuId0uS Surface Well Testing Page 4-15 Properties of Natura! Hydrocarbon Mixtures of Gas and Liquid-Formation Volume of Bubble Point Liquids5 Surface Data Recordings & Fluid Measurements ‘The information obtained from a production test is used to evaluate the well’s performance. The information is basically pressures, tempera- tures, rates and composition of the produced well effluents. Information is the essence of the test. The equipment hook up, controlling the flow, the wastage of valuable reservoir products, the inevitable resulting pollution, supplies, work and costs are carried out only to enable the gathering of the flow performance information. The equipment must function properly and the operations must be carried out in a safe manner with the primary objective of the test being to obtain and record reliable information at regular time intervals. To do this, all measurement instruments must be properly connected and calibrated. The tours of observing and recording information must be carried out deliberately, on time, with- out haste, and all pertinent additional observa- tions must be recorded clearly and briefly in the notes. As the test progresses, the specialist reviews the accumulated information, by use of preliminary plots and calculations, in order to continuously assess the well’s performance and detect early indications of possible difficulties with the test equipment or the well. The following should be either noted on the test report at the appropriate times or frequently ‘monitored to ensure proper equipment function- ing. Measurements Upstream of Choke 1. Bottomhole pressures (BHP gauge) 2, Wellhead pressures (transducer, deadweight, recorder) 3. Casing pressure (transducer, gauge, recorder) 4. Bottomhole temperature (BHP, BHT gauge) 5. Wellhead temperature (transducer, thermom- eter, recorder) . ESD (emergency shut-down) supply pressure by gauge . Chemical injection rate (if applicable) Choke Sizes . Wellhead choke sizes 64ths . Manifold choke sizes 64ths Heater choke sizes 64ths Post Choke Measurements . Downstream pressure (gauge) .. Downstream temperature (thermometer) . Basic sediment and water (BS&W) by centrifuge . Mud weights (mud scale) 5. Liquid viscosity (Marsh funnel) . Heater temperature Fluid Measurements |. Gas flow rate (SCF/D). ‘Separator static pressure (Barton meter - psig downstream flange tap) . Differential pressure (Barton meter - inches of water) Gas meter run temperature (thermometer or Barton - Degrees F) . Gas gravity by Ranarex Surface Well Testing Page 5-1. Orifice plate size f. Gas meter run size . Hydrogen sulphide content of gas (if present) by Draeger or tutweiler Atmospheric pressure and temperature Oil and/or condensate rate (BPD) Oil meter readings (BBLS) by turbine, Rotron, or Floco . Oil and/or condensate gravity API @ 60°F with hydrometer . Oil meter run temperature (thermometer - Degrees F) Shrinkage (shrinkage tester) Oil BS&W (centrifuge) Oil tank readings . Water rate (BPD) Water meter readings (BRIS) hy turbine or Floco . Water salinity by salinity kit, resistivity meter, or refractometer . Water acidity, alkalinity by PH paper . Water tank readings . Gas - condensate - oil - water samples taken for analysis . Oil bumer supply pressures by gauges Oil supply . Air supply . Water supply 4. Ignitor gas supply 6. Comments a. Occurrence of anything pertinent to test b. Test procedural changes c. Rate estimates d. Equipment malfunctions Well Effluent Tests Each of the following measurements should be made at least twice during each choke size, and possibly more, depending on customer requirements, 1) Gil Shrinkage Specific gravity (A.PI. gravity) BS.W. 2) Water Salinity Specific gravity 3) Gas Specific gravity HS, CO, ete. (if applicable) Determining Shrinkage ‘Measurement of Shrinkage with Shrinkage Tester A diagram of the shrinkage tester appears on page 5-3. It operates as follows: 1) Close liquid inlet valve. 2) Open liquid bleed valve. 3) Close gas decompression valve. 4) Open gas inlet valve slowly, purge shrinkage tester by allowing gas to flow out oil bleed valve. Surface Well Testing Page 5-25) Close oil bleed valve and allow shrinkage tester to reach separator pressure. 6) Open oil inlet valve and allow oil level to reach zero on graduated scale. 7) Close oil inlet and gas inlet valves. 8) Record tester pressure and temperature. 9) Allow tester to decompress by opening decompression vaive (this should have @ 1/64th calibrated orifice in the valve). 10) Leave it 30 minutes to decompress. 11) Read the shrinkage percentage and tempera- ture. 12) Close decompression valve and drain oil. Gas inlet Valve Liquid Bleed ———] Vaive Gas Decompression Sightgloss ‘Calibration Bar 70% Liquid Inlet Valve Note: Calibration Bar Marked for Individual Shrinkage Tester Shrinkage Tester Surface Well Testing Page 5-3Meter Test and Shrinkage Measurement in Tank ‘The following measures should be taken at least once during each flow rate where conditions permit. 1. Divert flow to tank. . Allow stroke of oil dump valve to stabilize. Simultaneously take tank and meter readings. AYP |. Wait (allow sufficient volume to significantly reduce any errors - larger volume smaller the error), Note oil meter run temperature, 5. At the exact end time, take the meter reading. 6. Simultaneously operate the tank bypass valve to direct oil to the bumer. 7. Wait until the surface of the liquid in the tank is calm and there is no froth i.e. until liquid is fully degassed. Take tank level. 8, Take mean tank temperature. If necessary, take a sample to measure gravity. 9. Meter Factor = Tank Reading x K(tank) __ Meter Reading x K(meter) Note: The above applies to an atmospheric test tank and the meter factor calculated in this wary will include shrinkage. Note: A pressurized vessel should be depres- surized to atmospheric pressure to calibrate ‘meters accurately. Determining API Gravity Hydrometers are used to measure the API gravity of the oil and condensate produced. Hydrometers include a thermometer to register the temperature of the fluid at the time the gravity is measured. This temperature is necessary to correct the oil gravity to an API gravity at a standard 60°F, “Hydrometers can also measure the specific gravity of water and in turn the approxi- mate percentage of salt saturation. rometers are available in ranges of -1 to 101" APT and 680 to 2.000 specie savy, ‘COMBINED . WITH THERMOMETER PLAIN Hydrometer Surface Well Testing Page S-4Procedure ‘The sample to be tested for gravity is poured into a clean clear graduated cylinder without splashing. This is to avoid the formation of air bubbles and to reduce to a minimum the evapora- tion of the lighter oils, The cylinder should be placed in a vertical position in a place free from air currents. The hydrometer is carefully lowered into the sample to a level two smallest scale divisions below that at which it will float and then released. When the hydrometer has come to rest, floating freely away from the walls and bottom of the cylinder, the gravity is read at the point the surface of the sample cuts the hydrometer scale. The reading obtained is comrected by an arbitrary deduction of 0.1° API. The thermometer is read at approximately the same time as the hydrometer and the temperature determined to the nearest I°F. ‘The observed gravity and observed tempera- ture obtained is corrected to the API gravity at 60°F. Tables are available for the necessary correction. Determining Basic Sediment and Water A centrifuge uses rotary movement to apply centrifugal forces to a well production sample to determine its basic sediment and water (BS&W) content. A centrifuge separates the sample into levels of solids, water, and oil with each group being a percentage of the total. Various chemi- cals can be applied to facilitate this operation. when heavy crudes or emulsions are encoun- tered. Also heating the sample may assist in the separation. Centrifuges help evaluate the effectiveness of the well cleanup operation, determine the efficiency of oil and H,O separation, metering accuracy, and verify stock tank barrels per oil produced. ‘Three types of centrifuges are available: 1) manual, 2) electric and 3) air. Electrical centri- fuges may have a heating bath. Various sizes of graduated centrifuge tubes are possible depend- ing on the apparatus. ers & Electric and Manuai Centrifuge Surface Well Testing Page 5-5Procedure 1. Take sample in a clean container. 2. Fill 50% of a clean centrifuge tube with a solvent (toulene, benzene, varsol). 3. Add three (3) drops of Tret-O-Lite and shake tube until solvent and Tret-O-Lite are well mixed. 4. Shake sample container vigorously and pour in the additonal 50% of crude into the centri- fage tube with the chemicals. 5. Shake centrifuge tube thoroughly. Heat sample to 140°F. 6. Centrifuge for approximately 3 minutes. 7. Read BS&W content to the nearest .05 ml and multiply by 2 to get the proper percent- age. Note: Be certain to enter the BS&W mea- surement in the appropriate report column to avoid confusion between pre-separator BS&W and separator oil metering BS&W. Determining Salinity ‘The salinity of water can be determined cither by a resistivity meter, by a salinity kit using a titration method or by a refractometer. Resistivity Meter The determination of resistivity is essentially the measurement of resistance to flow of electri- cal current through a known configuration of a sample, Measured resistance is converted to resistivity by use of a cell constant, The cell constant is fixed by the configuration of the sample and is determined by calibration with standard solutions of known resistivity. The resistivity is expressed in ohm-meters, which when applied to a graph for NaCL solutions, gives an accurate reading. In general, the lower the resistance the higher the salinity content and vice versa. For all resistivity meters the manu- facturers’ instructions for current source, calibra- tion, measurement and calculation should be followed. Salinity Kit ‘The salinity kit is used to measure the chloride content of the produced water by means of titra- tion. This method is performed by applying potassium chromate as an indicator to the sample water: Then the sample is titrated with a silver nitrate solution until a change in color occurs. Measuring the amount of silver nitrate quantity used against a multiplication of the silver nitrate strength yields the chloride level in parts per million. ‘The following apparatus and reagents are used in the salinity kit titration method: Pipette, 1 ml Pipette, 10 mi Silver Nitrate Solution, 1 mil equivalent to 0.01 or .001 gram Cl Distilled Water Potassium Chromate Titration Dish Stirring Rod Saray TEST RIT Surface Well Testing Page 5-6Procedure 1. Pipette 1.0 ml of sample into the titration dish and dilute to 40 or 50 mi with distilled water. Note: distilled water does not effect the concentration amount of chloride to be determined for the I ml sample. 2. Add four or five drops of potassium chromate indicator solution. 3. Add silver nitrate solution from the 10 mi pipette by slowly dripping, stirring continu- ously until the sample just tums from yellow to orange or brick red. 4. The number of ml of silver nitrate used to obtain this end point is multiplied by 10,000 when the 0.01 g silver nitrate is used or by 1000 when the .001 g silver nitrate is used to obtain parts per million (ppm) of chloride (C1) ion. Note: Normally, .O1 silver nitrate is the most efficient and expedient solution to use especially when high ppm are involved. (if the sample salt content is to be expressed in ppm NaCI mutiply ppm Cl x 1.65). SP GR CHLORIDES DIS. SOLIDS RESISTIVITY —LB/GAL (ppm) * (ppm) * ohm/meter* e75° 9,240 15,400 68 8.40 13,620 22,700 49 8.44 18,000 30,000 +30 8.50 22,260 32,100 225 8.53 26,520 44,200 +20 8.575 30,660 51,100 19 8.615 34,800 58,000 +18 8.650 38,530 65,050 17 8.69 42,260 72,100 +16 8.75 46,995 79,200 245 8.769 51,730 86,300 +13 8.825 55,865 93,150 12 8.865 60,000 100,000 ell 8.90 63,660 106,100 105 8.94 67,320 112,200 8.98 71,140 118,550 095 9.03 74,960 124,900 +09 9.075 79.160 131,450 075 9.215 83,360 138,000 085 9.15 91,200 152,000 08 9.23 98,800 164,800 207 9.325 106,680 177,800 066 9.40 114,120 190,200 063 9.48 121,560 202,800 -06 9.575 229,000 215,200 9.65 136,440 227,800 9.73 143,880 240,200 9.825 151,320 252,600 +055 9.90 158,760 265,000 9.98 166,200 277,400 10.075 173,640 289,800 05 10.15 *NOTE- VALUES ARE APPROXIMATE Salinity Table Surface Well Testing Page 5-7Refractometer allowing some sample to squeeze out the vent. After wiping off the cup’s exterior place the A refractometer is a small, hand-held instru- scale on the base’s fulcrum rest. Move the rider ment used to measure the amount of NaCl until the scale is in balance, as determined by the dissolved in a water sample. The instrument spirit level. Read the density at the edge of the consists of a focusable eyepiece, refracting rider nearest the fulcrum. prism, internal scale and zero adjustment. Determining Liquid Viscosity Procedure ‘The most common means of determining a 1. Apply a small sample of distilled water to. rd viscosity (resistance to flow) in a field the prism end of the refractometer. Close location is the Marsh Funnel. The funnel is 6" in lid. While viewing towards alight source, diameter at the top and 12" long. A mesh screen use the zero adjustment wrench to line up the fitted across one-half of the top removes foreign ‘base line with the 0 scale, material from the mud to be tested. 2. Apply a small sample of produced water to Procedure the prism end of the refractometer. Close lid. While viewing towards a light source, With a finger plugging the lower outlet, pour determine the point on the scale that a color the sample through the top screen until the level change occurs. Teaches the under side of the screen. Remove finger immediately from outlet and measure the 3. Using the refractometer’ calibration table, number of seconds for a quart of sample to run determine the NaCl content. To determine out. Report funnel viscasity in seconds. choride content divide by 1.65. Note: Time for a quart of clean fresh water at 70°F is 26 (+.5) seconds. Marsh Funnel Refractometer Determining Mud, Water Density Primarily used during clean-up operations the mud scale provides a means of determining the density of a mud or water. The normal scale available is used for 8-18 pounds per gallon ‘fluic The simple procedure is to fill the scale’s cup with the liquid sample and replace the lid Mud Scale Surface Well Testing Page 5-8Determining Gas Gravities The specific gravity of separator gas is determined by the RANAREX gravitometric method. The instrument operates on the prin ciple that the kinetic energy of the gas is com- pared to the kinetic energy of air impinging on counter rotating impellers. The unit has a specific gravity measuring scale for light gas of 52- 1.03 and for heavy gas .970 - 1.90. For HRS using a gas “as is” to dry air com- parison is required. We wish to determine the specific gravity by comparing the gas being metered in its natural state to an air at standard conditions. A more accurate gas flow rate will be achieved if the actual gas specific gravity is known. Procedure The silica gel crystals used in the air drier should be in an active state (deep blue). If the crystals are pink they should he dried in an oven at 250°F for two hours or until the dark blue color returns. 1, Check that the pointer and lock knob are in a “lock” position. .. Put sclector valve in “O” position. ‘The instrument should be connected to 110 volt 60 Hz or with an inverter to a 12 volt source and operated on air only (selector on “O” setting) for at least few minutes before conducting a specific gravity determination. . Unlock the pointer and check the zero Position (1.000 SG) at the beginning and end of this warm up period. . If the gas gravity is known to be less than 1.0, gas will be admitted to the upper cham- ber and reference air to the lower chamber. If the gas gravity is known to be above 1.0 gas will be admitted to the lower chamber and reference air at the upper chamber. If gas gravity is not known to be above or beiow 1.0, it can be determined by admitting gas either way and view the indicator scale for proper movement. Generally, the “LG” selection (upper chamber) will be acceptable for most applications. |. Connect a gas vent hose to the appropriate outlet. This is especially important when dealing with 1125 or confined spaces. RANAREX Gas Gravitometer Surface Well Testing Page 5-9Introducing Gas Sample 1. Connect gas hose to flowmeter inlet. Turn selector valve to “LG” or “HG” position. 2. Adjust inlet flow valve so float rises to approximate specific gravity of gas. With the instrument in operation the source gas flow should be approximately 12 CF/Hour at a pressure not exceeding 15 psig. (Just barely audible flow out of 1/4 inch rubber tubing produces an ideal flow rate). 3. Allow the instrument to operate on this gas for 20-30 seconds or until the pointer reaches a steady reading. 4. Read the specific gravity on the lower (red) scale when the gas is admitted at the “LG” inlet and read the upper (black) scale when the gas is admitted at the “HG” inlet. Note that the gravity decreases from right to left on the red scale and from left to right on the black scale. Purge the Instrument with Fresh Air When the specific gravity determination is complete, shut off the source gas flow, discon- nect the gas sample hose, turn to “O” setting on inlet selector valve, and allow the instrument to purge free of gas until pointer returns to 1.000. This will prevent corrosion and leave the instru- ment ready for the next test. Determii Hydrogen Sulfide Content ‘Three kinds of H,S detectors may be used during a well test. HS Liquid Kit This process uses a kit containing lead acetate paper, a defoamer, Alka-Seltzer, and sulphoric acid to determine the H,S content in water or mud, The test paper is applied into the sample and the defoamer, sulphoric acid and one Alka-Seltzer tablet are added. Once the tablet is dissolved, the test paper is removed and its discoloration is checked against a supplied chart to determine ILS level. H,S Detector Kit Surface Well Testing Page 5-10Hand Pumps This process uses a hand vacuum pump (Bendix/Gastec, Draegar) to measure the H,S content in a gas. To operate, simply break off the tips of a fresh detector tube, insert tube into pump and pull a fixed volume of gas. The absorbing media in the tube will immediately react to the gas being analyzed, producing a constant color stain which will vary in length according to the concentration being measured. The discoloration is checked against a ppm or percentage scale on the tube. By using different reagent tubes the units can be used to measure various types of gases (CO,, SO,, etc.). Tutweiler The Tutweilcr applics a titration method. using starch and iodine solutions to determine the HS content in a gas. This process purifies the gas sample , allowing the H,S volume to be measured accurately. The Tutweiler consists of: Tutweiler Burette marked at 100 and 110 ml, with a 10 ml Iodine Chamber (D) graduated in 0.01 ml divisions. Levelling Bottle, 250 ml capacity Iodine Solution, 0.10N Starch Indicator (made by dissolving 2.5 grams of starch in 1.0 litre of boiled distilled water). Procedure Fill the graduated cylinder (D) at the top of the burette with 0.01N Iodine solution. Ensure the bore of the stopcock (B) leading to the burette is filled with Iodine. Record the reading. Fill the levelling bottle with starch solution and connect to the bottom of the burette. Open the lower stopcock (C) and raise the levelling bottle to fill the burette with starch solution. Close the stopcock (C) at the bottom of the burette. Flush the gas sample tubing with gas and attach it to the inlet of the burette (A). Open the lower stopcock (C), lower the levelling bottle D. IODINE BURETTE LEVELLING BOTTLE Tutweiler Apparatus Surface Well Testing Page S-11and fill the burette with just over 100 ml of gas sample. Close the top (B) and bottom (C) stopcocks and disconnect from sample source. ‘Open the lower stopcock (C) and raise the starch solution level to the 100 ml mark on the burette, close the bottom stopcock (C). Open the top stopcock (B) momentarily to bring the gas sample to atmospheric pressure. Open the lower stopcock (C) and lower the starch level to 110 mi mark on the burette to place the gas sample under a partial vacuum. Close the lower stop- cock (C) and disconnect the levelling bottle from ‘the burette. Introduce small amounts of Iodine from the graduated cylinder and shake vigorously after each addition. Continuc the addition of Iodine cone drop at a time until the starch solution assumes a permanent blue color. Record the volume of Iodine used for titration. Record the barometric pressure and ambient temperature for titration conducted. If extremely accurate analysis is required it may be desirable to back titrate the starch solu- tion to a clcar color endpoint with 0.01N sodium thiosilphate, The hydrogen sulphide content in Mol % is calculated by using the following formula: HLS, Mol % =m Iodine x 1.73 x (460 +t) / (Bar P) t'= Temperature of sample in burette (ambient emmperature *F) Bar P = Barometric Pressure in millimeters of mercury (mmHg) Note: 1 ppm = 0.0001 mol % mol % x 10,000 = ppm Sampling of Well Effluent An accurate determination of the characteris- tics of the reservoir fluids is essential for engi- neers to set the parameters on which future production will depend. This section describes methods by wiiich satisfactory samples of the well reservoir fluids can be obtained. The pertinent properties of the samples are deter- mined by subsequent laboratory testing. The prime objective of reservoir fluid sam- pling is to collect from a hydrocarbon reservoir a sample that is representative of the fluid present in the reservoir at the time of sampling. The two methods for sampling reservoir fluids are described: ) Subsurface sampling b) Surface sampling ‘The choice of method is influenced by the type of reservoir fluid the producing characteris- tics and mechanical condition of the well. Conditioning the well before sampling is almost always necessary. Well conditioning is especially important when the reservoir fluid 1s saturated at the prevailing reservoir pressure because the reduction in pressure around the well bore which results from producing the well can alter the fluid composition before it reaches the well bore. The objective of conditioning the well is to remove the altered (non-representative) oil. Conditioning normally requires: 1) Minimum rate 2) GLR constant 3) Separator pressure and temperature constant. Conditioning Oil Wells for Sampling Deciding when the well is adequately condi- tioned for sampling requires an interpretation of the trends in the wellhead and bottomhole pressures, the rates of oil and gas flow, and the gas oil ratio, Obviously the well to be sampled must have the necessary equipment in good working order and properly calibrated if these measurement are to be accurate. Conditioning an oil well prior to sampling is necessary because changes usually occur in the reservoir oil properties as a result of producing the well. When the bottom hole flowing pres- sure is less than the saturation pressure (bubblepoint) of the original reservoir oil, gus breaks out of solution from the oil around the well bore and is produced. Since the gas had been a part of the reservoir oil its loss alters the properties of the oil left behind in the formation Surface Well Testing Page 5-12“The greater the drop in pressure around the well bore, the greater is the extent of the gas release and the farther from the well bore the altered oil extends. ‘The well is conditioned by producing it at successively lower rates (reducing the amount of, bottomhole pressure drawdown) until the non- representative oil has been produced. When the oil production rate is decreased the ‘gas oil ratio could change as follow: (assuming constant separation conditions) When the gas oil ratio remains constant after a reduction in flow rate, it usually indicates the oil flow into the reservoir is under-saturated, which means the phase state and composition of ‘the reservoir oil have not been altered as the oll. moves through the formation and into the well. When the gas oil ratio decreases after a rate reduction the presence of free gas saturation in the formation around the well bore is indicated. ‘The gas saturation can result from: a) The coning of a gas cap into the oil bearing strata around the weil bore, b) The flowing bottom hole pressure is reduced toa point where it is less than the oil reser- voir saturation pressure. When this behavior of the gas oil ratio is observed the well is conditioned by reducing the production rate in stages until the gas oil ratio becomes constant. When the gas oil ratio increases after a rate reduction the simultaneous production of gas from a gas bearing zone and oil from an oil bearing zone is indicated. The increased gas oil ratio could be caused by the subsidence of an oil cone. Although a representative sample of the reservoir fluid can be obtained, it is better to use a well which does not indicate oil conning, because it is difficult to determine when the well is adequately conditioned. Oil well condidoning is the means of climi- nating any gas conning and for flushing from the vicinity of the wellbore reservoir oil which has been altered in composition by being subjected toa pressure less than its saturation pressure. Conditioning Gas Condensate Wells ‘The same procedure applies to conditioning of gas condensate reservoirs as described previ ously for conditioning oil wells. One prolem with this type of well is the changes in state that can occur as a result of changes in well bore pressure. When the pressure on a gas condensate type fluid is reduced below its dew point pressure, a liquid phase is formed. As a result the vapor phase, which is the fluid will have a lower concentration of condensible hydrocar- bons and is said to be “leaner” than the original reservoir fluid. This loss of condensible hydro- carbons results initially in an increase in the producing gas oil ratio. Since the largest part of the pressure drop occurs in the area close to the well bore, retrograde liquid saturation in that area can build up enough to allow the liquid to become mobile. This mobile liquid can causc unpredictable but significant short term changes in the gas oil ratio to accompany changes in the producing rate. The producing rate should be maintained high enough to prevent “heading”. When a well flows by “heads” itis difficult to achieve the required accuracy in the gas-oil ratio measure- ‘ments, In addition the gas and oil compositions in the separator during the time the “head” of oil flows into it may be different from their compo- sition between “heads”. Itis therefore difficult to obtain separator gas and oil samples that are representative of steady flow conditions. Duration of Conditioning Period ‘The length of time that is necessary to condition the well depends upon: a) The volume of the reservoir fluid which has been altered as a result of the well with a flowing bozom hole pressure lower than the original fluid saturation pressure (bubblepoint or dewpoint). Surface Well Testing Page S-13b) The rates at which the altered reservoir fluid is produced. Since these volumes and rates could vary widely it is not possible to state a general rule for the time required to condi- tion the well. Note: Accurate fluid measurements during the well conditioning and well sampling tests are essential for accurate recombinations, Sampling Operations Subsurface Sampling Subsurface sampling is generally not recom- mended for gas-condensate reservoirs, nor for oil reservoirs producing substantial quanities of water. The liquid phase standing in the tubing of a shut-in gas-ondensate reservoir would definitely not be representative of the reservoir fluid. A large water column would prevent sampling at proper depth and could create a situation where collection of representaive subsurface fluid would be impossible, For this reason, a static pressure gradient should be run and interpreted to determine the gas-oil and/or oil-water interface in the tubing. After the well has been conditioned for subsurface sampling, it may be shut in com- pletely or left to flow at a low or bleed rate. The chaice. as to which procedure is used is left to the operating company or those taking the sample. The subsurface sampling method consists of lowering a device, usually called a bottomhole sampler into the well bore to a preselected point. A portion of the oil at that point is trapped in a pressure tight section of the sampler. The sampler is then pulled to the surface with the oil sample inside. The sample cither transferred at the site into a suitable container or the sampler (with the sample trapped inside) is transported to the laboratory. Sampling Procedure After the sampler has been run to the desired depth and the valves closed to trap the sample the sampler is returned to the surface, The sample can at this point be transferred into a container or it can be done in the laboratory. Duplicate samples should always be obtained for duplicate purposes and to provide at least one g00d sample should either of the containers leaks during transit. When sampling an oil well, it is always advisable to check for duplication of the two samples while at the well. Checking for sample duplication is referred to as “sample quality check”, ‘The ambient temperature bubblepoint of fluid may be measured either while the samples are in the samplers or the storage containers. The two samples are usually considered to be duplicates if the saturation pressures agrec within two percent or 20 - 30 psi. The data collected during the well conditioning period will usually permit the saturation pressure of the samples to be estimated. If the samples show a much higher or lower pressure than the esti- mated one the sampling procedure should be reviewed to find an explanation. Note: If the sampler is accidentally closed at 4 point high up in the tubing the sample satura- tion pressure could with many oils be lower than the estimated pressure or higher if foamy oil was present. ‘Checking Sample in the Sampler ‘The measurement of the saturation pressure (bubble point) at atmospheric temperature can be made with the sample still in the sample cham- ber. One method of doing this requires a cali- brated mercury pump and a pressure gauge. The procedure is as follows: Connect the sampler to the calibrated mercury pump and purge the connecting line with mercury. Pump a volume of mercury just sufficient to open the sampler valve and then read and record this pressure. Then proceed to inject a small volume of mer- cury into the sampler, agitate the sampler until the pressure becomes constant. Record this pressure and the volume of mercury injected Repeat the previous step until the pressure change becomes very large indicating that all the gas is now in solution. Now plot the pump volume readings against pressure on graph Paper. At the saturation (bubble point) pressure a significant change in slope will occur. This is the bubble point or saturation pressure at that particular temperature. Surface Well Testing Page 5-14Sample Transfer to Storage Container Via Pump ‘One method of transferring the sample from the sampler tn the storage container, consists of pumping mercury into the sampler to displace the sample. During this transfer operation it is important that the pressure is maintained above the sample bubble point pressure. ‘The figure “Sample Transfer" shows a schematic ofa typical hook up to do this. The sample bottle (1) is filled with mercury and then supported on a stand. (2) Its volume. should be at least 10 percent greater than the volume of the sampler. The sampler (3) is connected up as shown in figure 1. With valves 4,5, & 6 open the pump (7) is used to pump mercury through the con- necting line until it appears at the loosened connection at valve 8. With valves 5,8, & 9 closed and valves 4 and 6 open slowly pump mercury until the sampler valve opens. Read the pressure at which the sampler valve opens and record, continue pumping mercury until the pressure is 500-1000 psi above bottom hole ‘Pressure of the well at sampling depth. Alterna tively agitate the sampler and apply pressure, ‘until the sure remains constant at some puisit 500-1000 psi above bottom hole pressure. This condition then indicates that all the gas is now in solution and the sampler is full of liquid. Open valve 5 slowly while pumping mercury to maintain pressure and then open valve 8 slowly while maintaining pressure. Crack valve 9 and drain mercury into the measuring cylinder while maintaining pressure by pumping mercury. ‘When the volume of mercury displaced frum the sample bottle exceeds the volume of the sampler close valve 9 and then valve 8. Make a record of the transfer pressure and temperature. In order that a vapor or ullage space may be provided in the sample container (1), drain a further amount of mercury from the sample container equal to approximately ten percent of the sampler volume. Alternatively if desired all mercury may be withdrawn. Extreme care however should be exercised to ensure that no part of the sample is removed. With either method the volume vapor space should be recorded. The sample container can then be removed, plugged, and checked for leaks tagged and then made ready for shipment. Sample transfer Surface Well Testing Page $-15Surface Sampling Surface sampling is generally satisfactory for nearly all types of reservoir fluids. Recombined separator samples from gas-condensate wells are considered more representative of the original reservoir fluid than subsurface samples. ‘This method consists of taking samples of oil and gas in equilibrium from the field separation unit, while simultancously recording the gas and oil production rates. ‘When more than one stage of separation is being used, the samples are taken from the high pressure separator. ‘The samples of oil and gas obtained are then recombined in the laboratory to produce the original reservoir fluid. This type of sample may be taken as soon as it has been determined that the well is properly conditioned. The gas and oil samples should whenever possible be taken at the same time, to eliminate any possible change in the content due to changes in the separation condi- tions. Be particularly careful of separator tem- perature changes, Both oil and gas samples should be taken in uplicate to ensure that at least one good sample ofeach is obtained. Methods of Obtaining Separator Gas ‘Samples There are available three methods which will obtain a satisfactory separator gas sample. The volume of gas to be collected will depend upon the operating company and the laboratory require- . The sample containers and tubing should be rated such that their working pressure is not exceeded during sampli ions, Care must tis be exreisel when senping stuns containing hydrogen sulphide to ensure that all materials are certified for use with this gas, ‘The same gas sampling point can be used for all three methods. The best point to obtain a representative sample of separator gas is the highest point downstream of the separator vessel ‘on the gas meter run upstream from the back pressure valve. It is inadvisable to draw a sample from the separator shell, for the walls of the vessel are covered with liquid which will contaminate the gas sample. imple BOTTIe Surface Well Testing Page 5-161) Filling an Evacuated Container--The evacu- ated cylinder method is recommended for all separator gas sampling. The evacuated sample bottle is filled with gas by connecting itto the source, purging the connecting line with gas and then allowing gas to flow into the bottle until the separator pressure and temperature is reached (5-10 minutes) and then closing the bottle. The sample bottle is ‘gt purged. The evacuated method is used when the separator temperature is much higher than the atmospheric ture. Be aware that conditions of ambient temperature below the separator tcmperature may cause liquid hydrocarbons to condense inside the sample bottle. ‘The main disadvantage of this method is that a vacuum pump is required to evacuate the bottle before transportation to the well site (it could Teak and lose its vacuum) or that a vacuum pump be provided at the wellsite. The bottle should also be checked to ascertain that it is evacuated just prior to sampling by attaching a vacuum gage to the bottle and checking the pressure. Helium Filled --This technique is identical to filling an evacuated cylinder. A helium filled cylinder may only be used for compo- sitional analysis. Note: Do not use helium or air filled cylin- ders for catching PVT samples. Any component introduced by sampling other than separator products will destroy a PVT sample. facuum Pump 2) Purging the Sample Bottle with Gas --If no evacuated cylinders can be obtained, the purge method is the second choice. Before connecting the sample bottle to the sampling line, the line should be purged of any air or liquids. Generally if the sample point is on the high point of the gas meter un, liquids will not be a problem, provided the separator is functioning correctly. The sample container must now be purged and this can be accomplished in two ways. a) Place the botile in a vertical position. Con- nect the top valve to the sampling point. Open the inlet valve fully and throttle the flow with the bottom valve of the bottle. ‘The container should at this time be kept as warm as possible to prevent the condensation of liquids inside. The sample will not be representative if hydrocarbons condense inside the container. With the bottle in a vertical position any hydrocarbons condensa- tion may be detected and eliminated from the sample bottle. When several container volumes have been purged through the system the sample is collected by closing the outlet valve on the bottle, allowing the bottle to reach separator pressure and then closing the inlet valve. The bottle is then removed from the sample line, the valves tefloned, plugged and then checked for leaks by immersing in water or soap solution. b) The bottle may also be purged as follows. Connect the sample bottle as previously described. Fill the bottle with gas at the sampling pressure and then release the entrapped gas. ‘This filling and emptying cycle is repeated until all the gas (air) originally present in the bottle has been removed. The opening of valves is done slowly to keep rapid pressure changes from the sample bottle which cause condensation and gives an abnormally rich sample not indicative of actual well condi- tions. The minimum number of purge cycles required is dependant upon the separator pressure , see following tabulations: Surface Well Testing Page 5-17Gas Pressure Minimum PSIG Cycles 10-14 16 15-19 13 20 - 29 10 30-59 8 60-84 5 85-149 4 150-450 3 over 450 2 3) Displacing a Liquid ~This method consists of filling a two valve sample bottle with liquid and then displacing the liquid with gas. The liquids that can be used in order of preference are: a) mereury Note: Extremely dangerous and banned in Some areas b) saturated brine solution ¢) glycol 4) water The container is placed in a vertical position and connected to the sampling point (the bottle is connected at the top valve). The top valve is then opened to the sample source. The liquid is then slowly displaced by the gas by cracking the lower valve. When all of the liquid has been displaced the bottom valve is closed, the wp valve closed, the bottle removed from the sam- pling point, the valves tefloned, plugged and checked for leaks. Note: If the gas being sampled is known to contain either carbon dioxide or hydrogen sulphide, only use mercury since both these gases are soluble in water brine and glycol, and thus @ representative sample would not be obtained. Liquid Sampling Methods 1 Displacing a Liquid-- This method consists of displacing a liquid that is insoluble in the oil and that no part of the hydrocarbon fluid is soluble in the liquid. If water soluble mixtures like hydrogen sulfide and carbon dioxide are present water displacement is not suitable. ‘The two most suitable liquids are mercury and saturated brine solution. ‘The method hook up of the sample bottle is shown below: quid Sampling Method Taking the Sample First determine the exact volume of the sample container, it may already be marked with a nominal valve i-e. 500 ccs however the exact volume needs to be known. Fill the bottle completely with mercury or saturated brine solution. Connect up as shown in Figure 2 to valves 2, 4 and 5 will be closed with the connection of valve 4 loosened. Open valve 2 and purge the connecting line 3 tighten the connection and allow the line to reach separator pressure. Surface Well Testing Page 5-18.Upen valve 2 fully and the valve 4. Now slowly crack valve 5 and allow the oil to dis- place the liquid. Maintain a oil liquid level in the sightglass. This procedure should be per- formed very slowly to ensure the minimum pressure drop through the system. Measure the volume of liquid displaced in the measuring cylinder 7. When 85% of the bottle 6 has been displaced close valve 5 and then valve 4. Now slowly open valve 5 and allow a further volume of liquid equal to 10% of bottle volume to be displaced. Then close valve 5. This procedure leaves a vapor space in the bottle for expansion, should the bottle become heated. Disconnect the bottle, teflon plug the valves and check for leaks. tag and make ready for shipment. All relevant data pertaining to the sample must be recorded on the sampling tags and if necessary duplicates prepared for the customer. Note: Be particularly careful when handling ‘mercury. It has a poisonous vapor and can be absorbed through the skin or inhaled causing mercury poisoning. It forms amalgams with ‘most metals, so when working with mercury remove watches and rings, etc. 2) Displacing Separator Gas- ‘this method consists of displacing separator gas from the sample container with equilibrium separator oi. Similar to procedures involving a shrinkage tester. First, connect with purged tubing the upper valve of cylinder to the upper sightglass valve. Fill the sample bottle with separator gas to sampling pressure by using the evacu- ated or purging method. With the lower sightglass and cylinder valves connected, purge the tubing of any air by allowing oil to Icak from a looscned conncction at the container lower inlet. Open the lower sightglass valve completely. Open slowly the lower container valve, then the upper outlet valve. U-tube the oil into the container using the sightglass as a guide so that a 10% gas cap remains for possible expansion during storage and transport. Disconnect the bottle, teflon plug the valves and check for leaks, tag and make ready for shipment. Additional Information 1) Gas, oil and water samples must be taken during the same flow rate to ensure ability to recombine elements of the wellstream if requested by the customer. Duplicate back- ups should be taken to ensure sample data will be available. 2) It is desircable to obtain samples from the lowest rate tested. However, the customer may want samples from all rates. If the customer is in doubt of the necessity of samples, always take some anyways, 3) Completely fill out the sample tag informa- tion. This information is vital for the labora- tory. Stock tank samples should be marked with a) customer name, b) well info, c) type of sample, d) location of sample, e) separator and rate information. Stock tank samples should be in sealed plastic containers (allow- ing for expansion). 4) Samples should not be left in the sun. Tem- perature increases could cause the bottle to rupture or valves to leak. Surface Well Testing Page 5-19r SUMMARY OF FLUID SAMPLING est) tale gst | ld ele a SAMPLING POSSIBILITIES AND PROCEDURE 22" | poten Cocca rounnes cowmronserminy | Sat Some On Gon constant i Pi eee Wall tlownng with ow! > Bb ‘Stabinzes flow wit pet > eb # i He Seu ceeds i ora oer ese oe ae g GOR> Gor = Well closed unt stabs at Pl») Re al = tative tn oan | cot ane e g 3g] 8 “Sp3 nin se | E | a | sergegzontan feted = | mw | con>con vt connote : ea ere occenn m2 Seca att I | ip jo» | ze omnes souoiiy | Renin nmin |. Sas tmtncin nee A ete gms owt Be I | dome eleelldcbl conc oa cot os ena ot men Beceem | setae eg, | MSE [a eee IL i | fe Le |e awa # iH FE | a | con>con te air of sen wm } i snoe ain Sires |6 Gas Flow Measurements There are numerous applications of ges flow rate measurement, among the most important of which are: 1) the accurate measurement of gas volume produced by a gas well 2) the determination of Gas-Oil Ratio (GOR) for a well. Note: GOR is a very important measurement. Inis required by most state and national authori- ties in order to check that the well is producing within acceptable limits. It is also used by reservoir engineers in evaluating well and reservoir performance: engineers use the GOR to determine fluid properties for analysis calcu- lations. 3) the GOR determines the volumes of gas and oil to be recombined. This volume recombi- nation, performed at various pressures and temperatures, allows a phase (change) envelop (graph) to be developed. The phase envelop provides the basis for knowing when the well will begin production decline with- out secondary recovery techniques. All meters consist of two distinct parts: the ary element, which comes in contact with the fluid to be measured, and the secondary clement, which registers or records the results. The primary element in gas measurement includes the orifice plate, the orifice holder, the pressure connections and the meter tubes (adja- ent sections of pipe). An important advantage over other types of elements is that these do not require calibration even for accurate measure- ments. This is duc t the great number of studies and tests which have established the characteristics of the primary element. The majority of gas measurement is at present carried out by orifice meter because ot its low cost, ease of fabrication to necessary accuracy, flexibility and simplicity of operation. Because of these features it will probably con- tinue indefinitely to be used as the primary element. The secondary element measures and records the differential pressure across the orifice and other parameters required for determination of flow rate. siich as static pressure and temperature. ‘The bellows type Barton 199 with associated 202A recorder has conditions for correct instal- lation and operation, errors, and other character- istics which are independent from those of the primary element. Elements of an Orifice Meter Orifice Plate ‘The orifice is a circular hole in a thin flat plate of stainless steel or other non-corrodible material. An orifice plate produces a change in velocity of the gas, causing a measurable pres- sure differential. ‘The orifice is the most critical part of the primary element. Be sure that the orifice is clean, free from nicks, flat and that the inlet edge is sharp. A bevelled 1/8" thick orifice plate is required in meter runs which are 8 inches and smaller. The bevelled orifice should be installed with the bevel downstream. ‘The orifice should be scrapped and replaced if any erosion, como- sion or other damage such as a rounded up- stream edge is observed. Example: If the radius of curvature of the edge of a 2 inch orifice is 0,040 inch the erfie wil give a flow rate 4% low. Orifice Holder or Fitting When the flow rate varies the Daniel “se- nior” orifice fitting provides a fast, safe and simple method of changing the orifice plate without interrupting the flow. It comprises of two compartments separated by a slide valve, The slide valve cannot be closed unless the orifice is concentric with the bore of the fitting. ‘The orifice carrier is raised and lowered by a double rack and pinion mechanism. All parts can be replaced or repaired without removing the fitting from the line. Surface Well Testing Page 6-1NOWASTT “TWNOUDIS 3016 one [peste & vei NOVARTIS “TWNOLDaS Wiluwa INDUS Bumry ay roMag faINEC Page 6.2 Surface Well TestingPressure Connections Pressure ports for attaching differential and static pressure lines are integral with the flanges, so that the difference in pressures upstream and downstream of the orifice can be measured. ‘The pressure tap locations generally used in gas measurement are known as “flange taps”. Flange taps arc centered onc inch upstream and one inch downstream from the relevant faces of the orifice plate. ‘Thermowells ‘Thermoweils are small recepticles that secure thermometers, allowing them to be exposed to the wellstream during a test. The thermowell protects the thermometer from the direct pressure of the wellstream. Thermowells should be so located as to sense the average temperature of the gas at the orifice plate. The wells should be placed about 4 pipe diameters downstream of the orifice plate. Tremometer and Thetmawell ‘Meter Tubes and Straightening Vanes ‘The term “meter tubes” refers to the up- stream and downstream straight sections of pipe between the orifice and the nearest fittings. Eddies due to some fixed obstruction or irregu- larity, such as a valve or bend, may affect the pressure measurement. One method of eliminat- ing this is to have a sufficient length of straight pipe ahead of any section where the static pres- sure is to be measured. However, other meth- ‘ods, such as straightening vanes can be em- ployed to assist in straightening the flow. Straightening vanes consist of a number of parallel passages of relatively small transverse dimensions installed in the pipe (see figure on pages 6-4), For maximum efficiency, no passage through the vane should have an area of greater than 1/16 of the cross section area of the inside of the pipe and the length of the vane should be at least 10 times the maximum transverse dimen- sions of the passages. Note: The straighiening vanes are often held in place by a plug located upstream of the Daniel - -Do not remove. Operating Principle The increase of fluid velocity through the reduced cross sectional area of the orifice devel- ops a differential pressure which can be mea- sured. This difference in the pressures at the two sections is used to evaluate the difference in velocities and hence to calculate the rate of flow. For computation of rate of flow through a differential pressure meter the amount is ex- pressed in the equivalent inches of water at a defined temperature (60 degrees Fahrenheit is used by the AGA although 68 degrees Fahren- helt 2D degrees Celius is often used commer. cially) ‘The static pressure in a stream of fluid is the pressure that would be indicated by a gauge if it were moving along with the fluid so as to be at, rest or “static” with respect to the fluid. Obviously, its measurement in accordance with this definition is impracticable so that some equivalent substitute method must be adopted. ‘The usual procedure is to use a small hole perpendicular to the wall of the pipe. “The pressure measured at this hole is called the “static pressure.” Surface Well Testing Page 6-3 a eeDaniel Carbon Stee! Straightening Vanes TOOL — Line Type #1100F ~ Flange Type FLANGE MODEL /ALL sizes Daniel Straightening Vanes TYPE te 192.96 Con- cere Bunce fr ROSS SeCTON SE VEW Surface Well Testing Seppe PLU Maur couPLNG SOCKET SET sonew WELD 10 PPE. me wa Courensuac Hote eS mS Page 6-4 Line | pppronimate i A 8 {een ; tang | 00 Humber | te | simie | ume | “OR |S Aecste | mange | ne os | "he | tot | wine | se cricees_| Woon docu | vasa ites [oer [Trees | tet toe a esr] 8 | iat 2 i | ise | 6 foe 2 3 w 3.068 8 tt | 3 B00 | 8 rom | S| ; feat |e a ‘Sian [a | aa ce ass | to | Se ‘Sow | | oe a ‘eoos | te 36 tanta | 20%) 78%) sr | | Se time | aon | taFor static pressure measurement purposes the edge of the hole where it breaks the inner sur- face of the line must be completely burr-free; otherwise, due to velocity pressure, the reading will be too high. Flow Pattern Near an Orifice Below is a figure of a sharp edged orifice plate flow pantem. Note the smoot flow up- stream of the orifice, the minimum flow area just past the orifice, and the eddies either side of the jet downstream of the orifice. Flow Pattern for Snarp Edged Orffice Plate ‘Since with an orifice the section change is abrupt and there is no guidance of the stream the cross section of the steam continues to decrease for a short distance after passing through the orifice. That section where the fluid occupies the minimum area is called the “Vena Contracta”. Its location and area depends upon the orifice diameter and the flow rate. Since there is not guidance of the stream either side of the orifice, the flow is accompa- nied by turbulence, particularly on the outlet side, Eddies in a stream are simply whirling currents superimposed on the general motion and they cause local variations of static pressure. But they do not change the average static pres- sure which can still be accurately measured at a side hole. Differential Pressure Tap Location A point to be emphasized is that the mea- sured differential pressure across an orifice is not simply dependent on the orifice diameter, but also on the location of the pressure taps. Flange taps are most widely used, but pipe taps may be standard with some companies. Pipe taps are located 2.5 pipe diameters upstream and 8 diameters downstream of the orifice. ‘The location of the upstream tap is relatively unimportant; the increase in pressure is slight and even negligible for diameter ratios (d/D) below 0.5. However, the location of the down- stream pressure tap is of particular importance. ‘The best measurement is obtained at a point where the pressure curve is flat; for example, between the orifice and the vena contracta, as is the case with flange taps for pipe sizes of 2” and Jarger. It should be noted that at this section the channel area is less than the orifice area. This infers that the fluid velocity is greater than thrangh the orifice and consequently the differ- ential pressure is also greater. Downstream of the vena contracta exists a very unstable region in which pressure taps should be avoided. For flange taps with pipe size less than 2 inches the downstream tap may be in this unstable region. For this reason where D <2" either comer taps or pipe taps are recom- mended. Stability is restored at a point before 8 pipe diameters downstream or before the downstream tap of a pipe tap installation. Therefore, pipe taps actually measure the total pressure loss in the primary element. Data for both flange and pipe taps are given in AGA Report No. 3. The HRS standard is flange taps Which are most commonly used in industrial flow measurement for the following reasons: 1. Flange taps allow more accurate measure- ments. 2, Flange taps require a simpler pipe layout than pipe taps. The tolerance in meter tube diameters is greater with flange taps than with pipe taps. ‘The expansion factor Y2 varies less for flange taps than for pipe taps. ay Surface Well Testing Page 6-52 gz 3s |. — Plane of vena contracta Diagrammatic Representation of Pressure change and permanent pressure loss. Flow rate is Proportionalto J”hw = !P,-P, e Location of pressure tops covered by A.G.A report no. 3 Surface Well Testing Page 6-6Static Pressure Near an Orifice ‘On the inlet side, the static pressure increases slightly and reaches its maximum value at the orifice. ‘The pressure of the gas drops abruptly as it flows through the orifice and on the outlet side it continues to decrease and reaches a minimum valuc at the vena contracta plane a short distance beyond. The pressure then increases again; slowly at first, rapidly for a short distance, then again more slowly until its second maximum is reached several pipe diameters beyond the orifice. The static pressure of the flowing gas may be measured either at the upstream or downstream pressure tap. More accurate measurement will result if the static pressure is taken from the side requiring the smallest correction for expansion factors. In all cases this is the downstream. Pressure for which the maximum range is from 1.0000 to 1.0272, while that for upstream pres- sure is from 1.0000 tw 0.9422, The standard HRS connection for measuring static pressure is the downstream flange pressure tap. Flange (Throat) taps Pressure Profile (Orifice! Flow Through an Orifice Surface Well Testing age 6-7Maintenance Orifice Plates After use, orifices should be cleaned and replaced in the boxes provided. If any erosion, corrosion, flow bend or rounded edges are visible, they should be scrapped and replaced. Daniel Orifice Fitting Allessential maintenance can be carried out with the fitting in the line. Ideally the fitting should be operated and lubricated every 30 days. Routine maintenance consists of the following: When a Daniel is in continuous service, liquid blow down valves fitted on the bottom and should be bled as often as necessary. The plate carrier should be raised before blowing down. The pressure ports should be periodically checked for clear passage. When the Daniel is left unused the upper chamber should be filled with diesel oil and the plate carrier raised. Daniel Type 1 Lubricant is expressly made for use in “SENIOR” Orifice Fittings for lubri- cating the all-important slide valve, insuring maximum operating performance. The'cylinder shape grease sticks fit neatly into the grease fitting which comes on the Daniel. Instructions for lubricating 1. Before lubricating, close both the slide valve and the equalizer valve and open the bleeder valve, 2. To lubricate, remove stem from grease fitting, insert lubricant stick, replace stem and slowly tum. 3, Inject lubricant slowly. If done hastily, high pressure from the lubricant may rupture valve seat gasket or force apart the valve and seat. 4. Crank stem all the way in to grease fitting. If more lubricant is required, repeat steps. To clean out dried or cracked lubricant when fitting has not be operated for long periods of time, close slide valve, de-pressure line and fill top chamber with a grease solvent. Also, solvent may de forced through grease fitting with a large chamber grease gun. After cleaning, replace with new lubricant. COMME PLATE (A) Open No.1 (os, Two Turnt Oniy (8) Open No. 5 TO nenact ‘onmice rare 1A) Clove 108, 1) feta No 7 lowy watt 1 eousuizen waive Daniel Operating Instructions Surface Well Testing Page 6-8FRom DANIEL FLOW PRODUCTS To gi2zid4183010 =P. e API/AGA 14.3 UPDATE FROM DANIEL FLOW PRODUCTS, INC. | "14.3" ISSUED DANIEL “LOGATORS' SOLVE #f'A"Is less than 025, there are no Pans 1,2, and 3 of the iatest revised ~=CONCENTRICITY PROBLEM recess APYAGA 143 standard on office New Daniel SENIOR® tings use tabs If *A' fe between 0.25" and 0.50" rmaasuremert have been pubished; on the plate cater, a ‘postioning again the seal clameter "B* cannot pan 4, coalng wih implementation, button and plnie carer projections protrude Into the fiting bore “D" — Is expected by yearend. for exact metalto-metal aignment nor can any and concertricty, A tapered pin, with exceed 0.25% of ‘DIR dove, adl- PRINCIPAL CONCERNS OVER Peet Ameaeass OV" ape ee. soe vom mu me AND CONCENTRICITY PES eee ‘Tecomely with the revised standard, ten Button" and smal mat be con ua {ered much more accurately. a Tecesses must meet much tighter Pence liad specications, wth no prouusions — Projec- ‘alowed. H these requirements are ton not met, timbations may be f fequired on maximum beta ratlo \ andjor additional uncertainty must 7 Impact of the new revisions is begin- tbe added to orifice measurements; |, ‘ing fo be discussed throughout the some ofthe Increased accuracy of Fin industy. new coefficient misun- thu be negated. Ne eebrsatn mn a prsanon Samendings andhatanate sranty ANYONE CAN CLAIM TO MEET locating dowel and the sealing bar important THE NEW STANDARD and plate caier machined to new, —$1and Compe Neen oe enalor ‘Tha new standard does not say how protrusions excel Detwoen a plate anc saa sen fa lent understanding of require: line-up, or handing. 4 Peet tions of the new revisions. We ‘Thay also meat 50.8167 sccentrichy brasted & specie! team to moat specifications with no restcéons or Win custohers for an open, added uncertainty. complete ‘cards on the tabi ‘CONCENTRICITY MUCH TIGHTER: discussion of how - IN SMALL SIZES: ion might affect your operations To comply win the new standard, conceniricty of the onfice plate 10 ‘ioe ting must meet these require- ments. For example, using Schedule is 49 pipe: with this team. ca, dla nap fees NI = gar cone PI — & = -,1820.018 (*) Flow Products, inc. ae er, (*) May be increased to 0,020 with PO Box 19097 © ay omni oe ee (713) 487-6000 DFP-1190-7.5M-1292 “DANI 4 pcasrenco macWARFROM DANIEL FLOW PRODUCTS Sr aMaNa Caen ree oe API/AGA 14.3 Standard, ar gies eres ti Semen nares crreN DANIEL PLATES, FITTINGS. AND METER TUBES MEET ALL “14.3” REQUIREMENTS WITHOUT ANY COMPROMISE, Specifically, Daniel Sonior* Orica Fitings: Allow using plates with beta ratios fom 0.1 19 0.75 {although operation within 0.2 to 0.6 is recommended for ‘optimum accuracy) IW Require no uncenainty added to published values 1M Retain the use of elastomeric DS sealing Wi Continue to meet requirements of applicable standards with field interchangeabity of plates, plate caress, and seals ‘Deniet plates and ftings can also meet 190 3167 eccentricity speuiicatiog wits oy retro ur ede waverly. ‘PRINCIPAL CONCERRS: ‘PROTRUSION/RECESSES, ECCENTRICITY comply with the revised standard, plates must be centered much ‘more accurately than before — particularly small sizes - and seal recesses must meet much tighter specifications, with no protrusions into the fiting bore allowed. Hf these requirements are not met, limitations may be required on maximum beta ratio and/or uncertainty must be added to the published values for orifice flow measurement. This can negate She value of ineronred measurement sesuneay for whieh the standard revislons were created inthe first place. ECCENTRICITY MUCH MORE CRITICAL ‘To comply with the new standard, eccentricity of the orifice plate ‘must moet extromely tight requiremants, For example, with ‘Schedule 40 pipe and 0.75 beta: uncsize |... FCOENTRICY,_ ee ts x 0.062" 3” 0.008" () « o121" 0.012" C1 e 0.182" 0.018") o 0.2397 0.024" (7 ay be creased t 0.020 wih an ned uncer clmess fel oritice fittings meet these requirements without added uncertainty. To 912144183010 P22 allow the fitting to meet *14.3°: Tobe or the plate cartier ‘WA “positioning” button on the plate cartier |B)Projeations on the carer that match mating notches on the ‘plate seal ring and allow for direct centering on the plate O.D. BEA conical centering pin in the fiting mates witha tapered seat in the plate carrier. ‘This combination of engineered design modifications guide, center, and hold firmly the plate in precise alignment and concentricity. In the Daniel Senior® Fitting, for example, several ie Paserts Pending) Danie! Simplex® Fittings use a similar approsch to meet “14.3” requirements by eraploying a precision lorating dowel and fighter (elerenee an mnchining forthe sonling bar and plate carton ‘The rugged Daniel design insures that rough, demanding field service will not result in Gamage to critical Components. Orifice plates, for example, are well protected during vse in the Senior Fitting.Secondary Element of Orifice Meter The output of the orifice meter is two pres- sures - (1) a static pressure, which is the average pressure in the flow stream over the cross- section of the pipe at a certain point, and (2) a differential pressure, the difference between the Pressures at a certain distance upstream and downstream of the orifice. It has been stated that HRS’s standard is flange taps and static pressure is downstream of the orifice. Tu recur these parameters the standard in HRS is the Barton Flowmeter. This instrument combines in one housing, elements to measure static pressure and differen- tial pressure and a temperature pen can be incorporated. The outputs are recorded on a rotating chart in different colored inks. The components parts are described below. Barton Flowmeter Surface Well Testing Page 6-9Static Pressure Element ‘The static element consists of a spiral wound Bourdon tube whose movement is transmitted to the pen by means of a simple linkage. Static Calibration © Apply 50% pressure, . ehlisait am sac and offset arm to form 90° angles at pivot points. . Release pes and reset eo wth 20 . ly 1h natic pressure and set pen tn fll shar with range adjusting screw. Release pressure and reset 2ero, Continue steps to pen is correct at zero and full scale. © Apply 30% pressure, Ifpen is low, shorten ‘pen is high, lengthen static link, . Release pressive and reese by loosning clamp block or static pen shaft. © Set precise zero with zero adjust. e to static is accurate at zero, Sena Differential Pressure Element The differential element consists of an assem- bly in which the upstream and downstream pres- sures are applied to either side, ‘The assembly Consists of two bellows systems in communication via a passage, the whole being filled with a fluid. ‘The end plates of hoth bellows are connected by a push rod which is free to move horizontally within Timits of travel provided by stops. As the push rod moves it displaces the torque tube arm, thereby turning the output shaft. ‘The bellows are marked High Pressure and Low Pressure indicating the way the instrument should be connected to the primary element. ‘The differential pressure acts to compress the high pressure bellows and displace the fluid to the Jow pressure bellows, thus displacing the push rod. This movement is resisted by the spring assembly. There is a damping adjustment in the fluid passage in the form of a needle valve and over pressure protection is provided by ‘O” ring seals on the push rod shoulders, Which thus double as travel stops and pressure seals. ‘The rage ofthe clement is changed by fiting ‘spring assembly with springs of different strength or number. Normal ranges in HRS are 100, 200, and 400 inches of water. ‘The output shaft is connected to the pen by a simple system of linkage allowing adjustment for zero, angularity and linearity. Note: At 100 inches the standard test chart, the entire range is equal to 3.613 psi differential across the plate. Differential Calibration Calibration is carried out by using a manom- eter (bourdon tube, mercury or water column) applied to the “ “high pressure” chamber to refer, cence the differential pressure. The “low pressure” chamber is left open to the atmosphere. Cut away part of the chart to have access to the adjustment screws. Chock that the differential pen follows an are of the chart, if not, adjust the pen mount base. plate. Apply 50% of nominal differential to the -P, chamber. Adjust the linkage and regulating screws until the linearity and angularity are as nearly at right angles as possible . Note: As in Bourdon tube pressure gauge calibration, it will be seen that this position is that which will give equal arcs for the linearity adjust- ment. By setting this position first it ensures that Subsequent adjustments to the linearity, if neces- sary, are very small, this being the most dificult art of the calibration, © Remove differential pressure and set the pen to zero using the zero adjusting screw. Apply 100% of differential pressure. Adjust pen to halve the error by altering the range adjustment screw. ® Release pressure and reset zero. © Continue above operations until recorder is correct at zero and full scale. Apply 50% nominal differential. Allter the linearity adjustment for any error, @ Iferror is high - turn counterclockwise until travel is 20 times error upscale. If error is low - turn clockwise until travel is 20 times error downscale. @ Reset zero and full scale indications using angularity adjustments (zero and range). © Continue adjusting angularity and linearity altemately until the recorder is correct at zero, 50% and 100% of nominal pressure. Surface Well Testing Page 6-10ce INSTRUMENT TO BE CALIBRATED o a |» Fuexiste nose REGULATOR BLOCK VALVE BLEED VALVE TYPICAL DIFFERENTIAL CALIBRATION SET-UP INSTRUMENT TO 8 CAaUlRATED VENT L.P, HOUSING \ INSTRUMENT TO ATMOSPHERE INSTRUMENTS HIGH PRESSURE FLEXIBLE HOSE ae SQUEEZE BULB TO GET SIMULATED DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURES TYPICAL PORTABLE DIFFERENTIAL CALIBRATION SET-UP Calibration Set ups Surface Well Testing Page 6-11Changing Recorder Differential Range The differential range is effected by chang- ing the spring support assembly. Note: Ensure that the Pen is Zeroed © Remove the chamber fixing bolts. © Remove the lock-nut, retainer nuts and finally the spring assembly by pulling out- wards and turning counterclockwise. The Ben will move from the ero position, crew the new spring assembly onto the threaded push rod. Fix the eight spring post pins into the holes in the spring assembly plate and tighten the retainer nuts. © Using the special spanner provided, turn the spring end cup, do not adjust the tension in the springs until the pen retums exactly to zero. Replace the lock-nut, being careful not to move from zero. Replace the housing end-caps and rebolt. Calibrate Change the stamped plate indicating the differential pressure range. Bellows Unit Assembly Note: After changing springs, apply full working pressure to the housing cell and check for leaks. Note: Never unscrew the rod connecting the “low pressure” bellows and the spring support plate. If air enters the bellows, the apparatus is rendered useless. Temperature Element (if fitted) The sensor bulb, of the vapor pressure type, is inserted in a thermometer well downstream of the orifice and flow tube. ‘The bulb is connected by a capillary line to the Bourdon tube assembly in the housing. As temperature changes modify the vapor pressure in the system, the Bourbon tube uncoils and the movement is transmitted through Linkage to the pen. Chart Drive ‘The standard chart drive is clackwork and rotates the chart one complete revolution in 24 hours. The differential pen should be registering the correct time. Surface Well Testing Page 6-12Installation of Secondary Element The Barton Recorder is usually mounted on a support made from a. ” Tine pipe. Itis equipped with a ‘vewalse manifold for starting up and is connected by lines and isolating valves to the flange taps on the Daniel. Liquid traps, fitted with drain valves, may be inc in the manifold. Tubing and valves should be of adequate ID's (3/8" or greatet) to prevent any plugging possibilities. Maintenance Periodically, the bellows assembly caps should be removed and the inside carefully cleaned with a solvent. Check for broken springs. After reassembly, always pressure test housing joints and then recalibrate, not only the differential scale, but also static pressure and scales. A good general rule isto frequently check and/or ‘Tecalibrate the instrument, preferably before and after each operation. ‘The manifolds should be pressure tested at the same time as above and periodically dismantled for cl ‘The inside of the instrument housing should be kept clean and dry, the hinge and caich oiled regularly and the weather seal strip kept in good condition. NOTE: If either bellows is pierced or if air sets Into the bellows ser, it il be necessary to replace the whole cell and return the inoperative unit to the manufacturer for repair. Operating Instructions Close bleed valve lose full opening valves on Barton manifold Open equalizing valves on Barton manifold ‘Open isolating valves on Daniel Open liquid wap bleed valves to drain any lose liquid trap bleed valves Check zeros of differential and static pens en full opening valves on Barton manifold hock stalit pressure recording against separa- tor gay; Select an orifice plate feoe cooce Note: Measurements using a choke as the primary element is the best way to estimate flow rate during clean up of gas well, determine orifice late size and, if necessary, io check on the ity of measurement. ing a test. © Close equalizing valves and install orifice. if pen goes off the chart, remove the orifice and ‘choose a larger one. If reading is too low, choose a smaller orifice. © After a few minutes check rotation of chart and satisfactory operation To change an orfice plate Chart Surface Well Testing Page 6-13Barton Cell Equalizing Valves Low Pressure Fully Opening Valve ——> Opening Valve ro Bleed Valve ~~~ Fully Opening Isolating Valve Liquid Traps Daniel ‘e-Dunicl Bleed Valve Barton Daniel Connection Surface WellTesting Page 6.14Model GFC-332 Gas Flow Computer Application ‘The Halliburton GFC-332 Gas Flow Computer presents the newest technology in the area of Electronic Gas Measurement. The GFC-332 combines all features of the latest in orifice measurement and turbine flowmeter measurement to provide ‘lexibity and functionality required in today's custody transfer ‘applications. ‘The GFC-332 is extremely user- fiendly and can be installed ina matter of minutes to measure and record flow data. All report options and data storage required by API IPMS Chapter 21.1 are incorporated in the operation of the: GFC-332, ‘The GFC-332 measures and ‘ecords flow data for both gas and liquid over a user-detined logging interval. All flow information is stored in non-volatile memory and ‘can be downloaded via ‘accompanying software or industry ‘standard SCADA software through the GFC-332's Modbus interface. Features Local Readout The GFC-332 allows the user to monitor all flow parameters and calculated valume totals an its 4- Line by 20-Character Liquid Crystal Display (LCD). Parameters may be viewed individually or may be displayed in scan mode to view only those Parameters of interest Continuous Flow Totals ‘The GFC-332 continuously updates the flow calculations and volume totals to provide the user with continuous access to roduction volume totals. The flow rates and volume totals are calculated each second, In addition, the gas compressibility is calculated at least once every fifteen seconds. This assures that accuracy in the calculated volume totals is maintained. Data Security ‘The GFC-332 has two levels of ‘security for entering setup {information and retrieving flow data. The GFC-332 also maintains unique intemal circuitry to assure that flow data cannot be altered in the event of a loss in primary power. All flow data, alarm fogs, ‘and event logs are stored in battery-backed CMOS static RAM ‘and will be maintained for fve years, The GFC-322 contains up to 512kBytes of data storage memory with an option to expand storage to more than 1MByte. Th provides the GFC-332 with the ‘capability of storing flow data for much a much longer period than the customary thirty-five days. Sensor Inputs ‘The GFC-332 allows for a variety of transducer and transmitter inputs to measure flow parameter Gas Slatic Line Pressure Differential Pressure, or Gas Turbine Flowmeter Gas Temperature or Mutti-Variable Transimter Ligue Liquid Tartine FlownieterDigital inputs The GFC-232 contains four (4) discrete switch inputs for use with alarms. These can be used in conjunction with discrete outputs to Provide ON/OFF control features, Digital Outputs ‘The GFC-332 contains four (4) discrete contact closure outputs. These have a two-fold operation: ‘one as alarm outputs, the other as volumetric pulse outputs. In alarm output mode, these are used in conjunction with the alarm inputs to ‘acknowledge alarms and ON/OFF control. In pulse output mode, the user defines the pulse width and volume per pulse to use with ‘neremental counters. ‘SCADA Support ‘The GFC-332 can support off-the- shelf SCADA software provided tough the Modbus ‘communication protocol. This provides easy remote access to the GFC-222 through a central ‘operations location. All ‘setup/caloration parameters may bbe modified through this interface 88 well as monitoring real-time flow data and retrieving data logs. Functional Description ‘The GFC-332 incorporates the most recent advances in gas measurement and the recording of gas flow data. All flow calculation and data storage is per the most recent revisions of American Petroleum institute (API) recommendations. ‘The GFC-232 stores data for average static pressure, average differential pressure (for orifice meter runs) or uncompensated gas volume (for turbine flowmeter runs), average gas temperature, total compensated gas volume, uncompensated liquid volume, total compensated liquid volume, ‘and no flow periods to present the user with all information necessary to evaluate production. This information forms the basis of hourly transaction records and daily transaction records discussed in API MPMS Chapter 21.1. In addition to flow parameter data, the GFC-332 stores information related to alarm conditions within ich logging period and event information related to overall ‘operation of the measurement instrument. The GFC-332 contains 2 list of over seventy (70) possible events. This information. coupled with the flow record data, provides ‘the most valuable audit trail of any Electronic Gas Measurement instrument. Operation begins with setup/calibration, The GFC-332 makes calibration simple to perform by providing a user- friendly menu structure which guides the user through the setup Process. All setup/calibration ‘menus are structured according to the type of information entered. For example, all information related tu the cumposition of the gas Is contained ina menu called "Gas DATA". This allows the GFC-332 to be calibrated quickly and easily ina matter of minutes. There is no more need to have a bulky handheld interface; all setup can be performed from the front panel keypad. Upon completing setup/calibratio of the GFC-332, flow totals will ‘commence to be updated and will reflect any modifications to the ‘setup. During this period, all flow Parameters may be vewed in real. time using the keypad and LCD on the front panel. Specialized modes of operation like stacked differential pressure transducers or bi- directional flow are easily ‘accommodated in the GFC-332, Flow information may be downloaded using accompanying ‘software or off-the-shelf SCADA software through the Modbus interface of the GFC-332. Data may be viewed in realtime or logged data may be downloaded to view historical data. All this leads to the most valuable Electronic Gas Measurement instrument available,Specifications Enclocure NEMA 4X Weatherproof Power 120/240 VAC 50-60Hz, or 42-30VDO, or Solar Panel Operating Temperature 40°C to +85°C. Sensor Inputs Gas- Static Pressure: 0-50mVDC, or 1-8VDG, or 4-20mA Differential Pressure #1: 0.8-3.2VDC, or 1-9VDG, or 4-20mA, Differential Pressure #2: 0.8-3.2VDG, or 4-SVDC, or 4-20mA Gas Temperature: (0°C to +150°C) 1000 Platinum RTD, or 4-SVDC, or 420mA Turbine Flowmeter: Frequency: 0 - 2000Hz Amplitude: 20mV - 3V, o Contact Closure guid ‘Turbine Flowmeter: Frequency: 0 - 2000Hz Amplitude: 20mV - 3V, or Contact Closure Digital inputs ‘Software Catculations Contact Closure: - Gas Compressibiity is Frequency: 0 - 4000Hz computed using PAR Research Project NX-19 or Digital Outputs ‘American Gas Association Rolay Option - (AGA) Report #8. Other ‘Contact Voltage: 100VDC methods upon request. Contact Current: % A - Gas Flow is computed using ‘American Gas Association (AGA) Report #3, 80-5167, or ‘Contact Voltage: 30VDC AGA Report #7. Contact Current: 100mA - Liquid Fiow is compensated ‘according to API MPMS Accuracy Chapter 11.1, Volume Il, 0.25%FS for all sensor inputs Table 6A. 0.19%FS repeatability Electrical Certification Display UL Class |, Division | ‘A-Line by 20-Character Groups ¢ & D. alphanumeric LCD. ~ Operating Temperature -20°C 10 +70°C Keypad 24-key membrane switch Provides for all parameter viewing and setup/calibration. Communication —- ‘Two Independent Ports: ~ One 9600 BAUD RS-Z32C DCE or RS-485 Master on front panel for ‘setup/calibration or data data download. - One RS-232C DTE for use with a modemiradio at selectable BAUD rates of 1200, 2400, 9600, or 14400. (One Synchronous Port: For use with multivariable transmitters (ASP).‘Standard Unit Description Optional Features Name: Halliburton GFC-332 Power Supply: ‘Gus Flow Computer 110/240VAC 50-00Hz Solar Panel Enclosure: NEMA 4X Weatherproof Digital Outputs: Please Specify either Power Supply: Reed Retay of Optotsotator 12-30VDC, Electrical Certification: Rate Indicator: Optional approval upon request Gas in MCF/Day Liquid in BPD (Other units optional) ‘Signal Cables: ‘Two 15 ft. with weatherproof adaptor for gas and liquid turbine flowmeters, . HALLIBURTON Ordering Information Halliburton Energy Services Flow Measurement Systems: P.O. Drawer 1431 Duncan, OK 73536-0602 Inside Oktahoma Phone: (405)251-442 Toll Free: Phone: (800)654-3760 Teletax: (405)251-2154 ‘Salo of Haliburton products and services wil be in accord solely wth the terms and condlons. ‘Contained in the contract between Haliburton and the custome tha s appicable tothe eae.Model GFC-200 Gas Flow Computer ‘The GFC-200 (Gas Flow Computer) made by Halliburton Special Products is designed to replace the Barton recorders with a technology that provides accurate flow calculations. Inputs from a self contained differential pressure transducer, a static pressure transducer and a temperature option are used to compute volume and flow rates using AGA-3 and NX-19 specifications. Pressure inputs are sampled five times per second and total flow is updated once per second. Data storage is adjustable from 1 storage per minute to one storage every 99 minutes. The 24K RAM memory stores 35 days of hourly data. A bi-directional RS-232 serial communica- tion port enables the operator to program and retrieve data from the gas computer via a MS- DOS PC compatible computer, Programming of the GFC-200 is made simple by the user-friendly software supplied. A 24 button keyboard with LCD allows inputs for orifice plate sizes, in or out of service changes and viewing of data. The GFC-200 has three levels of security keeping all data secure and insuring an accurate audit trail. The intrinsically safe component is powered by 6.0 V, 20 amp hour, rechargeable battery This will provide the unit with 10 days of con- tinual operation. An optional Solar Panel Bat- tery Charger will re-charge the GFC-200 in remote areas. An optional AC Power Module will keep the battery charged in areas with uccess t 110 VAC. Model GFC-200 Gas Flow Comouter Surtace Well Testing Page 6-13Practical Application to Gas Measurement “The gas flow raw is determined by de use of the following formula: Quyy = Mh p, x Fu x Fg x Fb x Ftf x Epv x Y, Symbols hw =Differential pressure in inches of water pf =Absolute static pressure (psia) 4 =Diameter of orifice Fu =Conversion factor for standard conditions and rate G =Specific gravity of gas (dry air = 1) Fg =Specific gravity factor ="1/G Fb =Basic orifice factor Ftf =Flowing temperature factor A ee ‘TF =Temperature of flowing fluid expressed in °R. Degrees Fahrenheit + 460 degrees = Rankine . Fpv=Supercompressibility factor pf2=Downstream pressure Y2 =Expansion factor: D =Inside diameter of pipe B =d/D = Ratio of orifice diameter to inside pipe diameter Unit Factor Fu Unless otherwise instructed by the customer, always choose 14.73 psia and 60 degrees Fahr- enheit as standard conditions and report flow rate in cubic feet per day. This gives Fu = 24 for rates resulting in SCF/D. For comparison, for rates in M3/hour and standard conditions of 15 degrees Celsius and 760mm Hg; Fu will equal 0.02833. Specific Gravity Factor Fg Specific gravity factor is given in the tables. It may also be calculated using the relation: Fg TS Basic Orifice Factor Fb ‘The value of this factor depends upon: the location of the differential taps; the diameter of the orifice, d; and upon the intemal diameter of the pipe, D. For standard orifices and meter tubes and for flange taps the value of Fb is given in the table. Be certain to use the correct line bore which is stamped on the Daniel housing and flange. Temperature Factor Ftf Flowing temperature factor corrects for absolute temperature which differs from 60 degrees F. Fif is given bur may be calculated as follows: Fif = [604460 TF + 460 Supercompressibility Factor Fpv In obtaining the relation it was assumed that the specific weight of the gas would increase directly with the absolute pressure and inversely with the absolute temperature, which is the case for a perfect gas. However, real gases may deviate markedly from this relationship and thus introduces the supercompressibi account for the deviation of natural gas from the: ideal gas laws. Fpv “iz Several procedures have been developed for empirically determining the supercompressibility factor, Fpv. The AGA has published tables in the “Manual for the Determination of Supercompressibility Factors for Natural Gas - Project No. 19”, covering the following ranges: Pressure - from 0 to 5000 psig ‘Temperature - from -40 to +240 degrees Fahrenheit Specific Gravity - from 0.554 to 1.000 Surface Well Testing Page 6-16Expansion Factor Y ‘The expansion factor Y may be taken from upstream (Y1) or downstream (Y2) pressure tap whereas some intermediate pressure of the gas passing through the orifice is required to obtain the correct density of gas to be used in the flow equation. The expansion factor is included to ‘compensate for this. More accurate measure- ment will result if the static pressure is taken from the side requiring the smallest correction for expansion factors (downstream flange tap). ‘The expansion factor depends upon: © The ratio of differential pressure to static , hw/pt © The ratio of the diameter, B= d/D © The location of the pressure taps (HRS uses, flange taps) ‘© The location of the static pressure tap (down- stream is standard) Chart Computation ‘A period is chosen small enough to permit averaging of differential and static pressure by eye. Shorter or longer periods may be used according to conditions of flow rate and duration of test. However, on oil well tests it is best not, to use periods of less than 30 minutes. In this, case a difference of one minute gives rise to 3.3% error in flow rates, Gas well tests usually begin with 15 minute readings and are extended as stabilization occurs. Setting the Gas Flow at a Predetermined Value Often the customer requests that the flow choke be set to obtain a pre-determined flow rate. In this case, it is necessary to determine the differential pressure required for a certain separator pressure, gas temperature and gas Minimizing Errors ‘The orifice meter should be used only on clean fluid. J should never be used during |. For gas wells, during this phase the production may be estimated using the choke nipple flow equation. Condition of orifice edge ‘The orifice is the most critical part of the primary element. Check to be sure that the orifice is clean, free from nicks and that the inlet edge is sharp. The orifice should be installed with the bevel downstream. ‘The orifice should be scrapped and replaced if any damage is observed. Types of orifice plate seal Orifice seals are available in various materi- als and sizes. The most common seal materials are nittile for standard service, teflon and viton for sour service. Teflon seals may have more difficulty providing an adequate seal depending upon condition of meter bore surface and the seal itself. Orifice plate seal sizes must be matched with the schedule of meter run pipe. This means that 6.065" (schedule 40) Daniel requires a differ- ent size seal than a 5.761" (schedule 80) fitting. ‘The appropriate pipe schedule is typically found cn the seal’s outer edge. ‘STD Schedule 40 Nominal OD ID Allowable Sze we ] 1315 2110 2 2375 1470 25 2875 1850 3 3.500 1640 4 4.500 1440, 6 6625 1210 xH Nomina! OD 1D Allowable Sze ‘WP. 1 1315 957 3470 2 2375 1.939 2490 25 2875 2323 2820 3 3.500 2.900 2560 4 4500 3.826 2280 6 6625 5.761 2070 Line Pipe Dimensions and Worklino Pressure. Surface Well Testing Page 6-17 et eee ce‘Condition of Meter Tubes Some errors in measurement can be intro- duced as a result of variation in the inside finish of the meter tubes. The accepted coefficients were obtained with meter tubes constructed of commercial iron pipe with the inside surface roughness corresponding to such. This should be clean and free from deposits, bumps or other irregularities. To improve smoothness (rough- ness not to exceed 300 microinches) the walls may be machined, ground, coated and/or pol- ished. Measurements would be low with too rough an inside surface, and high with wo smooth an inside pipe surface. Choice of Orifice Diameter The effect of pipe diameter and roughness, upstream disturbances the length of the meter tube, tap hole size and lucation, flange recess and other sources of measurement variation are magnified as the diameter ratio = d/D in- creases. For the most accurate measurement, as needed for surface sampling purpose, for in- stance, the importance of keeping the diameter ratio low cannot be too greatly emphasized. On diameter ratins helow 0.15, however, the diffi- culty of inadequate data is encountered. For this, reason extremely low diameter ratios have to be avoided. As recommended by AGA the orifice should be sized so that: 0.15 , 50 oF 6U minutes. his feature makes the date entry simpler to enter than typing. NOTE: For the time based calculations, iis important that Excel recognizes the data in Column ‘Aas a Date/Time value (Not Text).CColect in Reportin ales Units Calculate In Report in BHP cosod [ERO E] [ARE] cosrow [rma S| [TRC] ext cas sate ory oe eaten Gas enw warn [Ba] PoE] shea Pla coz Gas Voure [amet] [ee 5] war bat —§] wre ae Has [Re] wae veumel ss — | [BT] Meter un PE] con free] [=] Once Dia es surerPress [P30 TE] [FTE caneter [BT ca emrarPess [P83] [PE] cutenp veomees [ET rene d FP 3 ae il z = E ey ale real all (Data Enty Interval po] vn i d ! i | Data/Time Range ‘The cells under‘“Range for the Report and Chart” (F10:G11) allow one to determine which range of data will be used in the report and chart. One should refer to the FieldData sheet for the desired start and stop of the report and chart. The first row that any data may be entered in FieldData is the 10". Therefore, the beginning row on the Setup sheet may be 10 or greater. The ending row depends upon the amount of data ‘gathered. Once the row number is entered for the range, time in next column is automatically updated, provided that date/time has been entered in the FieldData for that row. Range for the “Report” & “Chart Row Date/Time Begin To] 4nJan-T2500] End 20] NOTE: If complete report fails to be produced, examine the above for accuracy of range. Report Format ‘The lower portion of the Setup sheet allows the definition of which data, format and order the report will, be produced in. ‘The 7 column table includes all the normal readings plus 5 spares that may be used for any additional dota needing to bo reported. Report Format, RptUnits Chart From Sheet Column Time Date & Time 7 [FiidData 7 time z He [Cates z Pressure BHP. pai, [FieidData 53 wae z psig [FieldData 3 cso 4 sig [FieldData a Temps BHT F TeldData | war 5 F FieldDaia 7Flow Rates Cum Vol Ratios ‘Separator H,s100, Mise. Tank Spares SepGas Gas oi Water Gas oll Water Gor awer BSW ‘oGR wor il Metor Dit ‘stave il Temp Meter Run Orifice Gas 5.6. co, Ne HS Choke Heck Pla Comments Water Meter Salinity Water 8.6. be Brnr Oi! Pross Bene Air Press, il Tank Press il Tank Volume Ol! Tank Temp Water Tank Volume Sparet Spare2 Spares ‘Spares Spares é F a 7 Taser 3) 9 bpd 7 4 14 bod al 8 sc 4 70 er z 7 1 Bb a wo SetMoBT 9 % al 14 % 23| ‘blimsch 70} biimect, 7 Br 73] Tahzo. “0 7 Pig i 6 F 70) in 7| im 7a 76] 7 % “a % 75 w ppm 3) ath 3 ‘Bath 3) Aero a 7 | Ber FieldData 36) pm: [FieldData a) [FieldData 29] [FieiaData 29] psig [FieldData 34 sig [FietaData 33] sig [FieldData 23) Bol [FieidData 24) F FieidData 25) bbl FieldData 27) FieldData a) FietdData 35) FioldData 36] [FieldData ‘37 [rietaoaca EC ‘The name/format column (B17:B64) allows one to change the name and numeric format (ex. 0, 0.0, 0.00, 0.000) of the data reported. The Setup format may be changed by right mouse clicking the particular we cell or yoing through the format menu at the top of Excel. NOTE: Excel will round off ifthe column in the report is not wide enough to showr all the digits selected. IF needed, ry wider report columns. ‘Column € ot the table allows the selection and order # of data to be reported. Three buttons are available for default order # selection. These may be used of one can manually select the desired data/order needed. ‘Only the parameters with an order number in this column will be included in the report. Ba NOTE: To change the default settings of the 3 buttons refer 10 Module! sheet in this document‘Column D is the defined report units from the “Click to Set Units” button (above). These may be manually centered but for certain functions relating to calculations or unit conversions the spelling and case are important. Column E allows two (2) data inputs to be charted versus time. Two and only two parameters are allowed. ‘The chart will graph #1 scale on the left axis and #2 on the right axis with time on the bottom axis. NOTE: Leave this column blank until needed and the program will run faster. ‘Column F specifies where the data is coming from. In order to report any data, the program must know on which sheet in the workbook the data exists. Normally, the data comes from the FieldData sheet if itis a reading and from the Cales sheet ifit isa rate, volume, or ratio. A third possibility would be a sheet dedicated to cransferred data from Fardux, gauges, et Column G specifies which column # on the sheet just specified in column F. Once again, the program must know exactly where to find the data needed, Report Production Gracevron ‘The report and chart will be produced by clicking on the “HALLIBURTON’ logo. A new report or chart will be generated cach time the logo is clicked. The specific data, units, unit formats of the report and ‘chart depend on what is defined in the Setup sheet.FieldData ‘The FieldData sheet provides the entry point for the gathered test readings. The main groupings of information include: © Date and Time © Gas Metering ‘© Comments © Oil Metering + Bottomhole + Water Metering © Wellhead © Bumer + Choke [Bortomnole |Wethead [Choke Tudng | Céng | Well {Mnf [Hr Press| Temp | Press | Press| Temp | Dia | Die Day-Mo-Yr-H:Min:See psig | _F | psio_| psig | F | 6am | seth ‘Of-Jan-B8 _12:00-00]Begin Test ‘DiJan-86 13:00:00] (Gas Metering Oi | Static | Gas Meter | OFF Press | Press |Temp| HS | CO; | N,|SG] Run | Dia into | osio | F Joom| x |! | in | in @ [Oi Nteering [Water Siewering [Burner Wieter | OF ] Oi [OilLine| tank [Oi Tank | Tank | Meter | Tank ]Sar] Se] oi [Ar Reading) Temp| Grav | BSW | Press | Volume | Temp |Reading| Volume| ity |Grav| [Press| Press| bol_|_F [apico| % | psig | boi | F | bot | bb |erm| 29 |ph| psig | psig Field Readings Entry Enter the appropriate data here. If additional column space is needed for the entry, drag the line at the ‘colurnn leer for the appropriate wiath. ‘These are the actual teld readmgs and while information may ‘come from this sheet, there are no automatic features in the spreadsheet that will modify this data. The data values must be true for the units in the FieldData header. The units were specified under the Setup sheet’s “Click to Set Units” button by selecting them in the “collected in” spaces. The units can be ‘manually entered on row 9 but remember these are case and spelling sensitive With the cursor in a blank cell immediately below a previous time in Column A, clicking on the “Next Time” button will enter the new date and time. To change the time increment between readings, see the data entry interval space under the Setup sheet's “Click to Set Units” burton. Clicking the “Repeat” button or pressing “Ctrl & S” will copy the data from the cell above and move the ‘cursor right one column, This is a handy button when readings are stable or remain unchanged.NOTE: Additional columns of data may be included on this sheet but must be to the right of Column AF. Provided that this additional data is referenced in the Setup’s report table under the ‘Spares’ category by name/format, units, order #, sheet and column #, the report will also include these readings.Cales With the cursor in column A on the row corresponding to the FieldData row you want to calculate, click on the “Cale” button. The “Calc All Below” button runs calculations from the location of the cursor to the bottom of the data in the FieldData sheet. [Date Time ]BTime Gas Fiow [Oi Flow JWater Gas [07 __|Water Rate —_|FlowRate |FlowRate |Volume |Volume [Volume ‘These commands take data from the FieldData sheet over to the Meters and GasCale sheet and return the results to the Cales sheet NOTE: It is important that the Meters and GasCale sheets include the proper meter factors and reference data on them when a calc is done. Anytime calc is ran, the meter factors and reference data from these sheets will be used. ‘Additional calculations such as other ratios may be added to columns to the right of column M. This ‘would require putting the appropriate Excel equation in the column’s cells by clicking or referencing the appropriate cells on row 10 and then copying the formula to the rest of the rows in the new column, NOTE: The referenced cells used in the formula must be numerical values, not equations. Provided that this additional data is referenced in the Setup’s report table under the ‘Spares’ category by rname/format, units, order #, sheet and column #, the report will also include these readings.Report ‘When everything is entered on the Setup sheet and the Halliburton Logo is clicked. the spreadsheet will take the data selected between the beginning and ending times and put it on the report sheet. The Setup, Defines report header information ‘Specifies name and units the data will be reported in Deteniuines which data will be veported. ‘Specifies the order the data columns will appear on the report Well Test Report ~~ ¢ PPACLIBURTON aetorag! io at Wet Wet Test " euas dopere Teal 1s | oe Po ame el we es eae PS NOTE: Data, information, formats, etc. may be changed directly on the report -- however, the next time the Halliburton logo is clicked, the changes will revert back to original input values specified by the Setup sheetChart When everything is entered on the Setup sheet and the Halliburton 1 ogo is clicked, the spreadsheet takes the data selected between the beginning and ending times and puts it on the Chart sheet. The parameters will be charted versus time. The chart will graph #1 scale on the left axis and #2 on the right axis with time ‘on the bottom axis. The Setup sheet: ‘= Defines chart header information ‘© Determines which 2 sets of data will be charted © Specifies names and units the 2 sets of data will be charted in € PAACLIBURTON a The chart may be reformatted by double clicking the chart area and using the various chart menu commands. The available options are far too extensive to be discussed in this document, Excel has ‘numerous help and guides concerning these chart formatting options. NOTE: Information, scales, formats, etc. may be changed directly on the chart ~ however, the next time the Halliburton logo is clicked, the changes will revert back to original input values specified by the Setup sheet. 10Meters ‘The Meters sheet allows one to correct oil gravity and includes a section to determine an oil meters ‘measured correction factor. The water meter section is also used to get the calculations for the Cales sheet. NOTE: When entering or editing inputs on this sheet, please note the following color designations: © Blue - OK to edit and enter appropriate information. © Red - Key number. Do not edit. Contains equation necessary for calculations * Black - Dont edit. Contains text information or equation necessary for calculations Correcting API Gravity To obtain a corrected API gravity at 60°F, enter the hydrometer reading and hydrometer temperature. NOTE: The corrected oil gravity will still have to be manually entered into the field data for reports Oil Metering Worksheet [API Gravity Correction to 60°F - Hydrometer sede ea TAT AFT Gravy a Observed Tempera TET ART Gay HOOF IMPMS 44 Observed Temperature F) 0.9902 Volume Correction Fasior [Chaplets 11.1 & 11.21 “Ester APT gravity al observed temperate and observed temperature to calculate the API gravity coriected to 60 degrees F and Volume Comrection facto: Oil Metering The oil metering worksheet includes a worksheet to give you a measured correction factor corrected to standard conditions. As a calculation is run, it uses the current oil pressure and temperature to calculate a correction factor for those conditions and returns an oil volume. This methodology is outlined in the API Manual of Petroleum Measurement Standards. One can override this feature by manually entering a measured correction factor inthe blue A37 cell. i Fact ion. Calculation per API MPMS Chapter 12, Section 2 ~Calulton of Liguid hed eae say Petroleum Quantities by Turbine or Displacement Meters [Meter Readings [rime [Fank Readings bt: atinsee 19342 Beginning meter reading (0:00:00 Begin Time 11 Begioning Tank Volome 9550 Ending meter reading (01:05:00 End Time 210 Ending Tank Volume TE Meter indcsted Volume TORSSSS Delta T(r) T99 Tank Indicated Volume {94.0 Oil Temperature at MetenDegF) 82.0 Avg Oi! Temperature in Tank(DegF) 229 APL Gravity a OF 22.9 API Gravity a 60°F 600 Oil Pressure at Meter(Psig) 0.0 Tank Pressur(Psig) (0 Pe Equilibrium Vapor Pressure (psig) (0 Pe Fauilirium Vapor Pressure (psig) 0.00000862 F Compresiilry Factor 9.00000446 F Compressibilty actor (0.986110 Cul Correction factor for liquid temp 60 Ambient Temperature(DegF) 1.002780 Cpl Correction fate fr Tiguid press. 82 Tank Inde Diamster(in) 0.75 Tank Wall Thickness(n)1.000208 Cte Correction factor for steel temp 1.000000 Cps Conection factor for tank press @ TOE SROHSAT Meer Volume Conectedw Sid Cond 197.2842474 Tank Volume Comected to Std Cond 0.991025 Cul Comecton factor fo igui temp ‘0.9590 ] Measured Correction Factor 1.000000 Cpl Corection factor fr liguid press ‘This Measured Corection Facor Calulatia is coretedt standard conditions. Every ol ae calculation below (that uss it) uses the cutent temperatue and pressure for calculating the curent il volume. Monet af the editahle hhie inputs shonld be fairly obvious. However, a few require a briaf explanation. Meter Readings Pe Equilibrium Vapor Pressure (psig) - Pressure obtained when a sample of liquid achieves ‘equilibrium between vaporization and vor ata given temperature, Typically will be inputted as 0 unless additional information is obtained. Time Beginning, Ending, Delta Lime - ‘Ihe mput of time data is strictly for a reference and reports, ‘Time does not affect any reading or calculation in the meter factoring. Tank Readings Pe Equilibrium Vapor Pressure (psig) - Same as above Ambient Temperature, Tank ID, Tank Wall Thickness - Used to correct for temperature and pressure effects on a steel tank metal that can slightly change its volumes. Produces factors (Cts ‘and Cps) that are very close to 1. @ Operationally, a test normally starts and liquid data is collected. Then ata later time a measured factor is obtained by comparing meter volumes to tank Volumes. One would enter that information on the meter worksheet. On the Cales sheet one would then move up in column A to the point one wanted that correction factor to take effect and do a “Cale All Below” so that factor ~ Contract Pressure Base PSIA FACTORS TO CHANGE FROM A PRESSURE BASE OF 14.73 PSIA TO OTHER PRESSURE BASES PRESSURE BASE PSA, 144 1.0229 14525 10141 14.65 1.0055 14.696 1.0023 14.70 1.0020 14,725 1.0003, 14.73 1.0000 14.735 0.9997 14.775 0.9970 14.90 0.9886 16.025 0.9804 1815 0.9723 15.225 0.9675 15.275 0.9643, 15.325 0.9612 15.40 0.9665, 16.525 0.9488 15.65 0.9412 15.775 0.9338 15.90 9264 16.025 o.gts2 16.15 0.9121 16.275 0.9051 16.40 0.8082 16.70 0.8820TABLE 13 Contract Temperature f= Beek +460 cg 60+ 460 FACTORS TO CHANGE FROM A TEMPERATURE BASE OF 60°F TO OTHER, ‘TEMPERATURE BASES ‘TEMPERATURE Fy ‘TEMPERATURE Fe DEGREES F DEGREES F 40 0.9615 6 1.0096 a 0.9635 6 1.0115 2 0.9654 67 1.0135 3 0.9673 68 1.0158 “4 0.9692 69 1.0173 4 vgniz 70 1.0192 46 0.9731 n 1.0212 47 0.9760 n 1.0231 8 0.9769 3 1.0250 49 0.9788 74 1.0269 50 0.9808 8 1.0288 51 0.9827 76 1.0308 52 0.9846 ” 1.0327 53 0.9865 7 1 eas 54 0.9885 79 1.0365 55 0.9904 80 1.0385 56 0.9923 81 1.0404 57 0.0042 82 1.0823 58 0.9962 83 1.0442 59 0.9981 84 1.0862 60 1.0000 85 1.0881 e 1.0019 80 1.0500 62 1.0038 a7 1.0518 63 1.0058 88 1.0598 a 1.0077 89 1.0558 90 1.0877TABLE 15 FACTORS TO ADJUST FOR SPECIFIC GRAVITY fla] MERE GME aa2at Hq TEEEE foaal GCQRE HASTE AGEL SS2UE 25UE HEGIE EERE HI 1 i HeaRS ane ERR abi ig FARA add BED Fanaa dana GEUHE Ta] HENS SUPEd HT Laat $2883 398 570 680 690 700 0 720 730 ‘Th0 750 760 TIO 780 790 82823 29088AMES F, BAsicommcs FACTOR! —FLANGE TAPS Views = rely = 0 Bese Tenperatore = OFF Bese Pressure = 14.73 pate Pipe Sizes —Nominol and Published inside Diameter, Inches Flowing-Tenperature = 60°F Spacilie Gravity = 1.0 Omer noes ie] 207] 2a 790 vast | ae “ae peer rere res va va00 | won Se fee) aaa] ater] aan aon an | aan soo | Sor] aoawy| sos] sous Su Sam | aie 3 | a wan] Sa San 3m | nae mo | sires ite | wae 390 use | uae ie | use wie | ised isa tsa | et ee 7 te He ade te es ae ian [sec | ase ina [ane [sar | ave iS oS [8 |e fee [Sbe [ino [dee Sn sea | Soc aris fone Joti | woe tan on Soa [iam [Ser | iar i fea |eee [Sem | en Uns sas [occa [osu | ann oe mous | wear [tor [ema a paar aes ashe Ee sad [ies fies ins hau Eon fee Once 7 ni : ese eT ee om] can] san] sn] eo | pam] 70] vam P a Tan we | dea | Se soo | ina | Sah] sous so. | RS] Ray) aa aa se usu | ase! ne ia we | tscae | tee | tae we vst | usar | aar vsor_| tats | a5 | ana tas done | tow | soe Ee pas pat iar Ee tae [dines | aire | ieee fe Steat | gis | ae toe | ame | aa | Mee ae sues | ano | Sante Eee eeta leer etd Se Se | ae |e tom | Say | Scr | Se Se Sen | Ste | Sos oe soa | Gels | Ge am snes | airs tie | dacs | 98 | Sc we saa | tae eoo_| aoa te nets Zonas | tonso_| mae im se Str sae | aes Paes io [aoe se es fewest [ios |sas'e Pee ST [3 Bs Wa fits JIN FES | aS Foo |tasa [iain a tat fioma ima [iim | aes Fame [sme [ea fis vos 5 fies oss [tans [sana tae [Get [Bao [ices tee fises ite? |isaes iis te [tance two fia fio [ies 0 Bea lage uae tie Lge | baie fast paso aes ue fewss fase-e fae: fae mn 20 fess [aset fas: fos ero vs five [oes fins? fare Fa oe poe es ounce met Ses Sa3 face Biss nes +38 see Ton (o> no $780 seu ae oer [ cone 338, 70.0 sanTAGLE4 fi, BASIC ORIFICE FACTORS — FLANGE TAPS Flowing.Tempersture = 60°F Base Tempersture = 6° F Base Pressure = 14.73 psia Specific Gravity = 1.0 Pine Sizes —Nominal end Published Inside Diemeters, Inches Vows doly = 0 Once To 2 7 Dameter — inches | 9.564 | 10,020] 10.198 ni.sta]_.090 | 14.008] 18.000 | 18.280 ‘eo | 200.20 vias | 259.56 | asa.48 Vigo | aca | diac Lins | nea | aro. vo | iss | ais ews Soe 10 ais.90 7 Bae ue 2 8 Ble 3Bee Teperetere = OF ‘ave Presewre = 14.73 pia TABLE fy Bane OMPICE FACTOR —PLance Tars VR hey = Pip Sinn —eminl end Polished etde Dieter, chat Flowing Teapentare = OP F Specitic Geeity + 1.0 vase] 19.000 v.00] 29.20 wo most 1018.2 30-4 1343.6 wis 5.08 sas. 1254.3 Pose 87 4 250 | 2105.3 au 7s | aes mua sa | 2400.9 1874 os | 3603 2636.8 750 | ante. a.6 7s se? 00, 3n3.3 ‘97 9 a0 ‘ow wnt 399 ise ‘see 200 sou soos [sa S35 3350.0 ‘500 on ron 52750 ‘ts rey $000 mass {rata 590 Tait Tas 6.800 ste as0.4 $780 708.4 ter 04.8 BaeueaEHEREE sosst see thes cy est {ssa eo _[iseee | tet rt 50 floes — Tae Thao sco iscor | tev He in pores | 8 iat soiom_|ria0 {208 1 zoimn__| [ie:2s0—fazaze- 722382 1478 "21450" tosmo frase | 23608 se zs joa feat aun nen ows iiago_lasasy [26100 za iow iBone 2 Seer ii isan fico | eer ae inet ue fess [aoe eae ase iaie0__|szue__{ 01 ore joss Tem ise — 5270 She Sie [iso _| sue sm [asia] s2675 ‘hess [arose | a0 taa00 [use| ent ioe jot | Tear tat rrrsy 13.000 eat ‘ou__| [ssa Sir se ts.009 BEd sn 16-300 Sees Sis 7-00 so as 3 ‘Su wane ‘4.000 Eid 0 a a) id ‘9.009 ton 500 i ie 4e:300 sant we irom #7 sos" 3300 1030ta h EB FLcTORs 70 CWUCE PROX FLOWING TOOERTRE oF (60° FAIURNGIT TO ACTUAL FLING TOXPERATURS T- Te 7 he on, = a Lae a ° B Leise 3 7 2 Xan 7 % 3 Yous Mo Oe ao robe <5 aang 4 1.ou ah None & Laur 3) ire Git 2 tom @ Your ted % Eeler ao ons $21 oe 3 Leas ee 3 tens Lame 3 ten 5 eee 3 Nem eos Lomo 5 sce 2 Leet 298 3 keg x Tiss 3. Looe rest bo TGoB 2 Lowe 1.0000 1 Nowa Sl aie 2 Leon 6 Olen 5 heer 8 Sen f Noss Olapge 5 oss ome & Mose tne 5 Lops 2 Om ones se oyna 5 Tose 8 ons 10.08 Boss no Loser no S096 2 Lane 2 Seer 5B Las Bote a Lam hohe ig awe 13 o.pesp Bo hes B88 ye Tm ayeco Bae mB Scent » Lae mm Siseaa » Lae % o.ga a Lom st SStuae 3 tebe 2 Scams 3 Lon 5 oye Zo Lone x Sam 1s 4% ore zg eos Bh Loy 2 ome moe ite Bie 8B 1.0302 - ~ og tear crams cd 33 eam 2 fb 3 Tazr0 3 Opes toate mh Opaas 1.029 950.3600 Laas % oxen olen Olas xo Maa Om jo Lae OCSTABLE 11 PSEUDOCRITICAL PROPERTIES OF HYDROCARBON GASES Reproduced By Parmicsion of tha Californie Notural Gesoline Assecietion Material teken trem their Bulletin Ne. TS=461 6 % 6 Specitic Preude fle ravity Critical ity, Air=tog— Pretawre Air=1.00 65 673 90 56 673 n s7 on ” 38 on 3 39 6n a $0 on 358 95 st on 362 96 62 én 365 97 3 670 368 98 coy 670 72 29 670 v5 1,00 658 4a 670 8 1.01 658 494 9 382 1.02 657 1 eo es 1.03 656 500 «9 388 1.04 636 504 1 ry 392 1.05 655 S07 n rr) 395 1.06 65 510 n 68 298 Lor 654 4 7 668 401 1.08 654 a7 ™ 67 405 1.09 653 520 15 7 408 1.10 652 524 1 67 an wn 652 327 7 “5 as Anz “st 530 8 666 ae ws 651 3 ” 666 a a 650 37 “ss 4 1s us Mo 665 ry 665 at as 434 64 a8 664 aay ?, = _STATIC + ATMOSPHERIC 664 a P, 663 us 63 451 62 sa T, = _ELOW TEMP + 460TABLE 12 5 SSEEE SES58 AS4H5 FGRGE S859 Gass S893 gaaag menes geasg BRERA SREGR HSGRE SELEY SEARS BRGY OAgES aeaEE BEES SSESR BRANS RUERY SHSNG GIIRE BUSES CBERy Regay ZasEe 1.10 .096 08 21 34 SESS SSEN5 CASAS WANS QNNEE ZEEE SegES GENTE Sears gsage 1.09 1 21 1 ay 1! g/SEBES ERSRR REFS S S585e SRBLS BSRER teRes eggs S8888 Saas VALUES OF Fox Reduced Temperatore, T, All Headings Inclusive to Next Higher Reading—Do Not Interpolate Sag BARES RRRES 89988 RA5HY , SSEES SOERS AGRA SRRRS 22998 Shas al ESESS SRRRS SSSI SeReduced Temperature, Ty Luts ag vig 1.20 1.083 1.081 1.078 1.074 1.068 1.066 1.093 1.090 1.086 1.082 1.078 1.072 1.103 1.099 1.096 1.092 1.083 1.080 V4 1109105 1-100 1.091 1.086 ihr? a 1.098 1.094 UNS 1.129118 1.108 1.101 V7 Vado 1133 1.27 1s 1109 W159 118104 1.137. 112300 1.8 VAT 11621153 1.046 1.932 -1.126 Vee 11741165 1.156 Vat 1138 J 1.2000 1.189 1.178 1.169 1.152 1.144 : 126 112033921181 11821154 : 1.2320 -1:218 1.205 1.193 VI73 184 3 1249 1219 1.206 1183 1.173 1.25 1269 V4 1219 1193 1:18 1.30 1.289 1.250 1,232 1.204 1.192 1.35 131 1271247 V2 1.203 1.40 1332 1.283 1.262 19 1215 1.45 1.353 13000 1.277 12420-1227 1.50 1.375 V37 1.292 1255 1.239 1.55 1.396 1.334 1.307 1.267 1.250 1.60 14a 13501323 1279 1.261 1.65 1.431 13671338 3921273 1.70 1.441 V3e1 1.381 V30¢ 128 115 454 1394 1:364 V3 1.290 1.80 M65, 1.405 1.375 1.32% 1.30) 1.85 476 ANG 17386 V7 1312 1:90 3486 M26 1:396 1.48 1.324 1.95 2497 4371-407 1359 1.335 2.00 -503 4451415 1368 1.345 2.05 505 450 1.622 1377 1.394 2:10 “507 454 1.428 1385 1.363 215 508 459 1.434 1392 1.370 2:20 508 462 1.438 1397 1.376 235 508 463 1.440 1400 1.379 2.30 507 463 1.447 1.402 1.382 2.35 506 463 1.441 1.403 1.384 2.40 505 4631.44) 1.404 1.385 2.45 504 462 1.447 1.404 1.385 2.50 502 4601-440 1.403 1.385 2.55 497 AST ARB 1.402 1.385 2.60 493 ‘M55 1.436 1.401 1.384 2.65 488 452 1.434 13991382 2:70 483 M49 1.431 V397 1.380 278 478 a6 1.427 139581378 2.80 mul 438 1.422 139) 1.375 2:85 483 4320 AN Var 137 2:90 456 427 411 V3 1368 2.95 Mae 421 1406 W379 1365 3.00 Al 41S 1.401 1375 1.362gSS88 RRRSR sleds E882 s2n82 seaus coney cenga anny SOREN MARAE FAREA 125 Reduced Temperature, T, 14 12Rea. Prcg e Pr 1294.30 1.31 323334135 1.36 “5 —(1.052——«*1.051——«.050~—=«*1«04B «1.047 1.045 1.044 1.042 60 1.057 1,055 1.054 1.052 1.051 1.049 1.048 1.046 165 (1.062.080 1.059 1.057 1.055 1.053 1.052 1.050 Reduced Temperature, T, 701.067 1.065 1.063 1.061 1.060 1.058 1.056 1.054 (751.072 1.070 1.068 1.066 «1.064 = 1.062 3.060 1.058 80 1.077 1.075 1.073 1.070 1.068 1.066 1.064 1.062 ‘85110821080 1.077., 1.075 1.073 1.070.068 1.066 90 1.087 1.085 1.083 1.080 1.077, 1.075.072 1.070 ‘95 109210901087, 1.085 1.082 1.079 1.076 1.074 V00 109811096 1.093 1-090 1.086 = 1.083 1.080 1.078 1.05 1.106 1.101 1.098 = 1.094 1.091 1.088 1.085 1.083 VIO UNO 110610300 1.098.093 1.090 1.087 VIS UMS VN 11083081201 098 1.095 1.092 V200 MUN e MO 15906 102, 1.099 1.096 VIS N27 N22 BN 1071.108 1.100 130001933 1.128 1.124 LMG NZ Hog 1.105 3501 VM V129 VW UNG STN 401 V0 1135 vay Vad M51 Vas 1.140 VI N26 7 V0 1 VAST 1146 VN 1130 1251.21 Mss. List 1.15] M1 1.351.130 1.128 Vo} 1163 1:157 VMs 139 VBE 1.130 651 1168 1:16 11500 Md 1.139 Vo 1 VIS 167 1155 49143 VWs Va V173 11601154 1.148 180001 1185 1.179 AS61160 1.153. 1.85 1190 1.184 WATT 16S 1158 1.90 1196 1.199 Vi76 1.069 1.162 195 1202 1:195 Mae 1.173 1:166 2.00 1.208 1.201 V185 0 771.170 2.05 1.241.206 1198.90.82 1.178 2.10 V2 212031194086 .178 215 V3 21s 2071199 1.183 2:20 1281220211203 187 2:25 V2330 122501216 1.208 1191 2.30 1700 1.212 1.195 235 123215 198 2.40 Var 29 1.202 245 10 1.222 1205 2:50 1233-1: 1207 2.55 1n6 1.8 1.210 760 1:38 11330 1212 265 1240 1.332 v4 2.70 22 134 1216 275 1s 1237 rag 2.80 1s 1.238 1.220 2:85 i246 1.239 v221 2:90 1346 1.239 1.222 2:95 1247 1.240 11233 3:00 V7 1.240 VnReduced Temperature, Ty Pr 373839 sod S508) 1.039 4.038— 1.037 1.036 1.035 1.034 1.034 0 1045 1.043 1.042.041 1.040 1.039 1.038 1.038 65 (1049071066 H.0dg 1.043.042.4104 671.053 0ST N.047 048 1047 1.046 1.045.044 TS 1.057 1.055 1.053— 1.051 1.050 1.049 1.048 1.047 801.061 1.059 1.057 1.055 1.054 1.053 1.051 1.050 5 1.064.062 1.060.058 1.057 1.055 1.053, “90 11068 1.066 1.066 1.062 1.067 1.037 1.038 95 NOT2 1068) 1.067 1.065.066 1.061 1.059 1.000 1.07% 1.078 OT] 1.069 1068 1.064 1.063 Los 1.080 1.078.075 1.073 1.068 1.066 V0 1.085 082 1.080 1.077 1.071 1.069 Vas 1089 087 1.084 1.081 10751072 120 1.993 09) 1.088 1.085 1.079 1.076 1251097 Vo91 1.089 V08T 1.079 130 1.102 1.098 1.095 1.093 1.085 1.083, 1351106 1.103.110 1.097 1.088 1.085, V4o 10) 07 t0¢ 1.101 1.092 1.087 W454 toe 108 ¥.095 1.092 Vso Ue NS 12.08 1.098 1.095 LSS 1122 UNG Le La 1.102 1.098, 16000 1126 B20 1-116 W105 1.102 W650 M300 a7 1923 11981105 VO 5 Lsh 127 N29 WIS 113913811380 Us 1112 W809 ase we ne VRS Ng Nas 138 V2 7 N90 41520 teraz Viz4 X95 118613501145. v7 20000 1160 SA 149 1.130 205 169 Mase 1.152 1.133, 2100 N67 611.156 215 VT 651.189 2200 VAIS VSB 1.162 22500 M78 21.165 23000 1182 1.751.169 23500 1185 N18 1:172 2ag Nyaa Vay 1174 24S NY Mee 1.177 2500 1193 1861179 255 0 1.19% 188 1.18T - 26000 198 1190 1.183 7 265 0 12000 Lig? 1.185 MM 270 202 1981.87 ol 275 1206 1.196 1.189 M 2800 1.206 1.198 1.191 1 205 1207) 9p 1.192 1 290 1208 1.200 1.193 c 295 Ngo N20) 194 if 3000 121020211198 1Te Reduced Temperatu WaT aR. 1.461.70 O17 o 020 S888 SGSSE S888 33923 43999 94985 B4¢sy 23gRE S2gg5 SSESE SEG0E EONGH G09G9 GUUR3 S0gag uG8g auaa2 1.68 1.66 019 021 022 024 025, 027 029 030 032 034 036 037 0: 041 043 044 066, (047 048 050 051 053 054 056 057 059 ‘060 (061 (062 064 065, 066 1967 069, 070 Reduced Temperature, Ty, 160 1621.64 020 022 024 025 027 029 931 032 034 036 038 039 04) (043 045 1.047 1.048 1.58 1.56gases Suash Shas GSG5R Bases GSRSk GREER ES) 14 1841.86 1.015 1.012 1.012 1.017 1.013 1.013, 1.018 101.014 11019 1.015 1.015 1020 Vor 1018 1.022 1.017 1.016 1.023 1.018 1.018 1.025 Loy 1.018 1.026 1.020 1.020 11028 10211020, 1.029 1.022 1.021 10301. K x 1.023 1.022 1.031 1.030 1.028 1.026 = 1.026 1.024 1.023 1.033 1.031 1.030 1.028 1-027-025-1024 Voas 1033 1031110291028 1.027.025 038 1.036 1.034 1.032 1.030 1.030 1.028 1.026 038 1.038 «1.036 1.034 1103211030 1.030 1.028, 0401-038 1-036 1.034 11032 1.031 1.030 1.028, O41 1.040 1.037.035 1.033 1.032 1.030 1.029 047 -1.ndd 1038110361094 1.032 1.030 1.030 044 1.042 1.038 1.036 1.034.034 1.032 1.030 044 1.042, 1.080 1.037 11035 11034 1.032—1.031 046 1.044 = 1.040 1.038 11036 1.035 Noa 1.032 047 1.046 1.042, 1.038 1.037 1.036 1.034 1.032 048 1046 Tne Todt 1039 10gB 1.03603 050 1,047 1.045 1.042 1,040 1.038 1.036 1.035 051 1.048 = 1.048 = 1.043101 1.039 052 1.049 1.047104 1.042.040 053 1.050 1.048 1.045 1:043 1.047 1054 1.051 1049 V'ndg tnd 1042 055 1.052 1.050 1.047 1.045 1.043 056 31.050 1.047 1.045.043 057 1051 1.048 1.046 1.04 x 51.052 1.049106 ad 56 108310800471 04S. 1.056 1.053 1.050 1,047 1.045 1.087 1.054 1.051 Noda 1046 1058 10541051 Tos .048, 1059 -1.055 1.052049 1.047 1.060 1.056 1.053 aso 04a. 1.061 1.057 1.054 1.05) 1.049. 1.062 1.058 11055 21.049 1.063 1.059 1.058 1.083 1.050, 1.063 1.059 1.056 1.083 1.050, 1.064 1.060 1.057.084 1.081, 1.064 1.060 1.057 1.054 1.051 1.064 = 1.060 1.057 1054 1.051 1.065 1.061 1.057 1.051 1.065 1.061 1.057 1.051 1.065 1.061 1.057 1.051Reduced Temperature, Ty 1.88 1921.91.96 2.05 1.012 1.010 1.010 1.010 1.008. 1011-1010 1.010 1.009 1912, 1.012, Von 1.009 1.013 1.012 1.012 1.009 104 1.014 1.013 1.010 1.0 1.014 1.013 1.010 LOIS 01S 1.014 10 1.016 1.015 1.015, 1.017 1016 1.016 1.017, 1.016 1.016 1019 1.018 1.017 1,017 10200-1019, 018.017 1.021 1.020 1019.08. 022 1.020 1.020 1.018. 125 1022 1.022, 1.020 1.020 wo 1.024 = 1.022 1.021 1,020 135M 1.024 1.024 1.022.021 140 1.027 1.025 1.024 1.022 11022 1.020 VAS 1.028 1.026 1.025 1.024 110221022 1.50 1.028 1.026 1.026 1.024 1.023 1.022 1.55 1.030 1.028 1.026 1.026 1.024 1.023 1.601.030 1.028 1.027 1.026 1024 1.024 1.651.031 1-029 1.028 1.027 11026 1.024 7 10311029098 1.027 1.028 1025 -75 1.033 1.031 1.030 1.028 1.027 (1.026 1.801.033 1.037 1.030 1.028 1.026 185 1.034 1-032 1.031 1.029 1077 190 1.034 1.032 11031—1.029 1027 195-1035 1.033 11939—¥'020 1.038 200 103510331032 1.080. 1.078 2.05 1.036 1.034 1.033, 1.031 1.029 6 2.10 1.036 1.034 11033 1.031 1.029 6 215 (1.037 1.035 1.034 1.032. 1.030 7 220 1.037 1-035 1.034 1032. 130 7 225 (1038 1:036 110351033 1030 1.027 2:30 1.038 1.036 1.035 1.033 1.030 1.027 235 (1.039 1.037 1.036.034 1031 1.028 240 1.039 1.037, 1.036 1.034 1.031 1.028 245 1.038 1.036 1.034 1031 1.098 2:50 1039 1.037 1.033 1.031 1.028 255 1.040 1.038 1.036 1.032 1.029 260 1.040 1.038 1.036 V032 1.029 265 104111039 —1.036 103211029 210 10411039 1.036 1.032 1.039 295 Yioa1 1.039 1.037 103311029 1.047 1.039 1.037 1.033 1.030 Vogt 1.039 11037 1.033 1.030 1.042 1.040 1.037 1.033 1.030 1.042 1.040 1.037 1.034 1.030 04210401038 1.034 1.031Reduced Temperature, Ty Press. 2.45 21S 2.200 2.25 2.30 2.35, 2.10 sessTable 13 Supercompressibility Factor Tables For Orifice Meter Measurement Notes: ‘The factors in the attached tables were taken from the California Natural Gasoline Association's Bulletins No. TS-402 and TS-461. Factors for pressures from 0 to 499 psig inclusive were taken from TS-402, and factors for pressures from 500 to999 psig were taken from TS-461. ‘The mean value of the corresponding ranges of flowing temperature. pressure and specific gravity were used in determination of each supercompressibility factor in the attached tables. z 3 a 6 59 60-64 6569 TO TA TS-.79 80. BA 1.002 1.003 1.005 1.005 1.006 50-99 1.007 008 10 1.012 1.018 Yoo—149 1.011 016 Vor 1.925, 150-199 1.015 1.022 1.026 1 1.036 200-249 1.019 028 1.034 Mt V.04s, 250-299 1.022 036 1.042 Xu 1057 300-349 1.027 042 1.050 XM 1068 350-309 1.030 049 1.058 Mt 1.083, 400-449 1.036 x 056 1.068, Ve 1094 450-499 1.040 x 1.063 1.977 Ms 1.107 500-549 1.048 1.060 073 1.084 V 1.124 550-599 1.051 1.064 083 1.095 ne 1144 600-649 1.058 971 087 1.101 1.126 1153 650-699 1.060 1.076 098 wa a 178, 700-749 1.065 1.084 103 1.120 Vase 1192 750-799 1.067 1,088 14 1138 1a rng 900-249 1.073 1.097 118 Vat 1.181 1.234 850-899 1.076 1.101 129 1155 1203 707 s0n_949 1.083 1109 2135 1161 1215 1.283 950-999 11086 1a 1140 1168, nr 1.300Specific Gravity Renge v wae 3 4 5 6 S559 6064 65-69 TOA S79 80-4 1.002 1.003 1.005 1.005 1.006 006 1.007 1.008 1.010 1.012 1.013 1.016 10 1,013, 1.019 1.021 024 150-199 1.015 1.018 1.025 1.030 035, 200-249 1.019 1.023 1,033 1.039 044 250-299 1.022 1.028 1.041 1.48 056 300-349 1.027 1.033 1.049 1.058 066 350-399 1.030 1.030 ‘1.057 1.068 81 400-449 1.035 1.044 1.066 1.077 091 450-499 1.039 1.050 1.075 1.088 104 500-549 1.047 1,059 1.079 1.095 8 $50~599 1.050 1.062 1.090 10 1.137 600-649 1,057 1.069 1.095 16 1.46 650-699 1.059 1.974 1.107 1.133 1.169 700-749 1.063 1.082 una 10 Vat 750~799 1.065 1.086 1125. 1157 1.206 800-849 1.077 1.094 1.132 1.165 1.219 850-899 1,074 1.098 VMs 1.184 1.247 mene tah tee @ 950-999 1.084 1.109 1157 1.204 1.277 48° ~ 52° 049 1.002 1.003 1.006 1,004 1,005 1.005 50=99 3.006 1,008 1.010 1.012 1.013 1.015 100-149 1.011 1.013 1.015 1.018 1.020 1.023 150-199 1.014 1.017 1.021 1.024 1.029 1.034 200-249 1.018 1.022 1.027 1.034 1.038 1.043 250-299 1.921 1.027 1.034 1.040 1.046 1.054 300-349 1.026 1.032 1.040 1,047 1,056 1,064 330-399 1.029 1.038 1.048 1.055 1.066 8 400-449 1.044 1.043 1.053 1.064 1.075 088 450~499 1.038 1.049 1,059 1.073 1.085 100 $00~549 1.045 1.087 1,066 1.077 1.093 112 550-599 1.049 1.060 1.075 1.087 1.106 130 600649 11988 1967 1079 v'092 ina "139 650-699 1.057 1.072 1,088 1.104 W127 1.160 700-749 1,063 1.079 1.093 1.10 1.135 Vay 750-799 1.063 1.083 4.102 vain 1.150 V9 800-849 1.069 1.091 v107 vir 1.158 1.205 850-899 1,072 1.095, V6 1.139 V5 1,237 900-949 1078 vz viz TMs 1186 1205 950-999 1.081 1.106 1.126 11ST 1.193SUPERCOMPRESSIBILITY FACTORS FOR ORIFICE METER MEASUREMENT . 3° 57 Spacitic Gravity Rongs Proature Range T 7 3 7 $ esis) 5559 OSS TTA TS=.79 BOS 1.002 1.003 1.004 1.004 1.005 1.005 1.006 1.007 1.009 Lait 1.012 1.014 100-149 1.010 1.012 101 1.018 1.020 1.023 ‘150-199 1.013 1.016 1.021 1.024 1.028 1.032 200-249 1.018 1,022 1.026 1.031 1.037 1,042 250-299 1.071 1.026 1.039 1.045 1,053 300-349 1.025 1.031 039 1.046 ass 1.063 350-399 1.038 1.037 1.945 1.054 1.065 1.077 400-449 1.032 1.082 1.082 1.063 1.074 1.087 450-499 1.036 1,048 1.058 1.072 1.084 1.098 500-549 1.045 1.056 1.064 1.075 V.089 1.101 550-599 1.048 1,059 1.072 1.085 1,402 1.18 600-649 1,054 1.066 1.076 1.090 1.109 1,126 650-699 1.056 1.071 1.085 1.101 1.122 1.144 700-149 1.960 1.078 1.090 1.106 v130 Vise 750-799 1.062 1.082 1,099 Vw 1a 1.173 800-849 1.068 1.089 1.104 1.122 1.151 1,181 850-899 1.071 1.093 wna 1136 1.168 1.203 900-949 1.07 1.100 a7 1140 1.76 1.215 950-999 1.080 V104 via 1s vie V0 58° - 62° 0-49 1.003 1.004 1.004 1.005 50-99 1.007 1.009 1,011 1.014 100=149 1.012 1.014 1.017 1.022 150-199 1.016 1.020 1.023 1.031 200-249 1.021 1.025 1.030 V.040 250-299 1.025 1.081 1.037 1.050 300-349 1.030 1.037 1.046 1,060 (350-399 ‘3.035 1.043 1,051 1,072 400-449 veo vos p60 V.ow2 450-499 ‘1.045 1.055 1.067 1.093 500-49 1.083 1.061 1,073 1,098 550-599 1.056 1.068 1,083 1.105, 600-649, 1.062 1.072 1,087, 4121 650-699 1.066 1.080 1.098 4.138 700-749, 1.073 1.085, 1103, 1.147 780-799 1.077 1,093 We 1.164 800-849 1.084 1.097 V8 1172 850-899 1.088 1.406 1.129 1.193 900-949 1.095 TAO 1.135 950-999 1.098 vie voSUPERCOMPRESSIBILITY FACTORS FOR ORIFICE METER MEASUREMENT. ed PECEtEE ETS Eeeeeeeess SgeReSg gS sgSeRaRaRAS 15-79 5 012 018 026 034 or ‘9 66 et 095 101 une Lm iat ig 161 1.168 ag SagagaycggEscansas 4 70-74 2 029 036 042 049 058 064 6a oer 091 096 tn 1126 van 2 028 oat o83 062 066 M6 121 126 S| -{eeggggagagaeggsagng gugaggggaggguqaegage 63° - 67° Flowing T:jog BSS88R99S SESSSRSIESES BSSSGssISESSRSEGRAIS 35 EDSTERPEEEE Pe 1.069 1.075 1.078 1.085, 1.087 Mg g25238898938898 |g Seacsegageagyaqgagag SUPERCOMPRESSIBILITY FACTORS FOR ORIFICE METER MEASUREMENT 50-99 100-149 150-199 200-249 250-299 300-349 350-399 400-449 450-499 500-549 aggugggaggggazeasaze 355 8882982588535 8332 sg 888839985 882S552SUPERCOMPRESSIBILITY FACTORS FOR ORIFICE METER MEASUREMENT Flowing Temp. Ronge oar? pee Specific Gravity Range Prosaure Range 7 3 3 é fonig® SSP ONG ASP OT TID 80 149 1.002 1.002 1.003 1.003 1.004 1.004 50.99 1.005 1.006 1.008 1.010 1.010 1.012 100-149 1.009 1.010 1.012 1.018 1.016 1.019 150-199 on 1.014 1.017 1.020 1.023 1.026 200-249 1.015 1.018 1.02 1.025 1.029 1.033 250-299 1.017 1.021 1.026 1.031 1.036 1.042 300-349 1.020 1.025 1.031 1.036 1.043 1.050 350-399 1.023 1.029 1.036 1-042 1.051 1.059 400—449 1.026 1.033 1.08 1.050 1.057 1.068 450-499 1.029 1.087 1.046 1.086 1.066 v077 500-549 1.035 1.084 1.051 1.059 1.073 1.081 550-599 1037 1.046 1.087 1.066 1.083 1.092 600-649 1.042 1.051 1.061 1.069 1.087 1.098 650-699 1046 1.055 1.068 1.078 1.098 am 700-749 1.047 1.060 Vor Vow 1.103 unr 750-799 1.949 1.064 1.079 1.091 une 1.130 800-849 1.083 1.070 1.081 1.094 UnB 1.136 850-899 1.055 1.073 1.088 1.103 9 19 900-949 1.059 1.079 1.092 1107 1.135 1.155 950-999 1.062 1.081 1.095 ain 1.140 1.162 88°_ 92° O49 1.002 1.002 1.003 1.003 1.004 1.004 50-99 1.005 1.006 1.007 1.009 1.010 1.012 100-149 1.908 1.010 1.012 1.014 1.016 1.018 150-199 101 1.013 1.017 1.019 1-021 1-025 200-249 1.014 1.017 1.020 1.024 1.028 1.031 250-299 1.017 1-020 1.025 1.029 1.034 1.940 300-249 1.020 v.02 1.029 v.03 V.oa1 1.047 350-399 1.021 1.028 1.034 1.040 1.048 1.056 400~449 1.025 1.031 1.039 1.047 Vose 064 450-499 1.028 1.095 1.043 1.083 V.062 1.973 500~549 1.033 1.042 1.050 1.087 1.070 1.079 550-599 1.035 1.044 1.056 1.064 1.080 1.090 600-649 1.040 1.049 1.059 1.067 1.085 1.095 650-699 1.042 1.082 1.066 1.075 1.098 1.107 700-749 1.045 1.087 1.069 1.080 1.100 V3 750-799 1.046 1.060 1.076 V.088 110 4125 800-849 1.050 1.066 1.079 1.091 ve 1.132 850-299 1.052 1.070 1.085 1.100 1135 ad 900-949 1.056 1.075 1.089 1.104 1.130 1.150 950-999 1.059 1.078 1.092 1.108 1.136 1157O49) 50-99 100-149 150-199 200-249 250-299 300-349 350-399 400-449 450-499 500-549 550-599 600-649 650-699 700-749 750-799 800-849 850-899 900-949 950-999 -102° 0nu9 50-99 100-149 150-199 200-249 250-299 300-349 350-399 400-449 450-499 500-549 550-599 600-649 650-699 700-149 750-799 300-249 850-899 900-949 950-999 g REEEE g 28 23528 B88 1.031 8 1.037 1.039 1.042 1.043 1.047 1.048 1.052 1.055 1,002 1.005 1.009 1.013 1.016 1.019 1.022 1.026 1.029 1.043 1.039 1.941 1.045, 1.048 1.053 1.056 1.062 1.065 1.970 1.073 1.003 1.007 1.911 1.016 Lo 1.023, 1.027 1.032 1.036 1040 1.046 1.052 1.054 1.060 1.062 1.067 1.971 1.076 1.079 1.081 BBa88 gS8SB9988 1.003 1.009 1.013, 1.018 1.022 1.027 1.032 1.037 1044 Vo49 1.053 1.059 1.062 1.070 1073 11981 1.084 1.091 1.095 1.098 s2es3298 3 33 BES388 BSe2SReRE8 z 2. ® EREgESee8 ge8See ess 1.139 vs 1.451poy 207087 4 OPV aonpacidieas = yp ce eect) oe YS0 ymerg ype = "9 Seek Eby be cad op! semsout * by TRE Bae if 0F WATIT do CII? IL DUS Hesee 3 8s 2 4 Ze ae ese sat x Or Kore 7 Spay BO SEER TD | Tao TT Tome TS és 8 7 1 soy aos se TEESE “M UADIING vo JOROEEY BUHEFED 9INIOK 242041199 OH) POIZOIIXT Ad} ,0 30a 3k MNLHDIIO Yod SINDTABLE 7 Y, EXPANSION FACTORS —FLANGE TAPS. Static Pressure Taken from Downstream Taps aaetileTABLE 6 Y, EXPANSION FACTORS—FLANGE TAPS Static Pressure Taken from Upstream Taps d 9b =f Ratio safead aa Guna W0az2 FEET MORO SadED ETE Filia eae al in ee a of ReOadeuad Yes S7Ezs CUT OHEEISaDETI TEED [xe] NGHEg EEMEN/N0aHe SESE EOna CUEUHIOUEEE EET | -e]BSds BEBE EGE FEEEE CUae EOTOd|SaEGT|OREE fe Nebaa|aaaa|QawLE REGEE saad a0eHd|HROEEES: [og FSET inaH a aaeea Ua EE of RSAEE SEER GE Tar aa aE BUS ET FERIA) fe REEGa aR HTH ae (Pua TBLETHELREETE aja Renee EOE alata atade eat TO SLE ofa FREES Bale ha LEE {ERE GE fa Fas TE THLE [al eavaH O0HE Ha a aad aad af Han ead ae anaes isda PR HaadG HAE afd REUaa REGALTEET Tanne Anaad alice a 1s Taatl aia? “RR slaueaalaceny i Hae an et Fens Baa Ha RE HHOIL FLOW RATE TABLES‘GINEERS’ HANDBOOK Paacricat Perroueust E: 774 Taste 6-70 “Table Showa. Specite Grasiien, Poanda Fer Gallon. and Gallons Per Found at 60 F, sagetgga sega ge deg ROeRRSSAERERRA GER Sma SPEDELIGISSS se cescsccecdddacdidcccdadadacasasacacsdoccoacccooo a gaGSeRMaSTaER THRs SAAgUELPEED Giodgesnddniestiecdasadssdaeds /egugenagaeceegesass: iscaceansces: al faguasses nee eT LEUNG EEEEEIEEEEE E snasasuenscvasdesssecnettenneaxnaenssaaRstasestsss Eacdssssdseccecccedcdecadecsddsedddacccscsseocsoscs be gagegaag 4G2S SPR A CRERRR EAE RARE SSSRRECESISS £5 |* nee ees bs sancesaa hepsi neMacRROSE Rs aNSELgSeaS2UbSSEL EGE “Correnponding to Derrecs ABT. eee |. REET BREESE SHESSE2ETEEeccccdsssscdcscscccccoccecsseccs -|JABLE 2 (ASTM TABLE 5) ‘API Gravity at Observed Temperat “Gorreapuautag API Gravity we" Fr REDUCTION OF OBSERVED API GRAVITY TO API AT 60°F ‘ature, ci ° 1 2 3 i 5 ‘ 5 4 5 10 a a B a 5 6 2 i 8 RENAE MARRE RoRAF BABAR ESTOS oeyEs F Observed ‘TemperFISHER/TAG MANUAL 4 TABLE 2 (ASTM TABLE 5) REDUCTION OF OBSERVED API GRAVITY TO API AT 60°F Corresponding API Gravity aca F- Hey scz9s aause ssvex vevet g be"INSPECTION OF PETROLEUM TABLE 2 (ASTM TABLE 5) REDUCTION OF OBSERVED AP! GRAVITY TO API AT 60°F API Gravity at Observed Temperature Corresponding API Gravity at WF.FISHER/TAG MANUAL 16 TARLE 2 (ASTM TABLE 5) REDUCTION OF OBSERVED API GRAVITY TO API AT 60°F “Temperature ‘API Gravity at Obee Corresponding API Gravity at 60 Fr7 L2 T+] ‘Corresponding API Gravity ar oF. TABLE 2 (ASTM TABLE 5) ‘AFI Gravity at Observed Temperature REDUCTION OF OBSERVED API GRAVITY TO API AT 60°F 7 Eat ie Eg as ie im a ae in in 2s he 215 he ty 2 2 RANKS SENER RARAR RARAR RF8R3 RSR22 2 INSPECTION OF PETROLEUMFISHER/TAG MANUAL TABLE 2 (ASTM TABLE 5) REDUCTION OF OBSERVED API GRAVITY TO API AT 60°F 18 = RaSSS SAREE RHMAA FAARA deans Saass S asaae H2gS% 39883 UISS3 99933 2553 2 fFl. Sease aves dadee Sadie gagee ASE 2 inh Sere elo s EL Ie re aan ere einnae @amen eenes cama secon =| Ela|é REESS Sesee gazes sg5S3 33999 2 3/2 ]2 Sag83 S983 ISIS goegg aesse 7 Fada emt pede nln ctdeie leet aqaene enqee nnuas qoeean a * §/*|£) 28822 S888 sesso gesee ang? 22222 G2223 IIE Tsgt g ee ees B 1 |Sl meses conan nenet yaens coea aanne enart qaaia Goaea awnce me Eig. FEbe Jones wenae AARNE ansas aguas suzee ogeee 8 ae= > ° = & ° z ° 9 z TABLE 2 (ASTM TABLE 5) REDUCTION OF OBSERVED API GRAVITY TO API AT 60°F ‘API Gravity at Observed Temperature e a 9 | 1 | 68 © 6 yading API Gravity at @” F, ng Corre 10.9 BaGas BRmAS 109FISHER/TAG MANUAL 20 TABLE 2 (ASTM TABLE 5) REDUCTION OF OBSERVED API GRAVITY TO API AT 60°F API Gravity at Observed Temperature aE qzana nase eaaue sasaa Guana mi SS ae ern hE ee eee 10‘APL Gravity at Observed Temperature Gorresponding API Gravity at 60" F, TABLE 2 (ASTM TABLE 5) OF FETROLEUM REDUCTION OF OBSERVED API GRAVITY TO API AT 60°F 1 = 2] [25583 25955 Sess5 Jase geese Tees Hoses gece sages soose 2 & 7 His = RENEE SHURE ane ecoee neeRe g z ge*ER/TAG MANUAL FISH 2 TABLE 2 (ASTM TABLE 5) REDUCTION OF OBSERVED API GRAVITY TO API AT 60°F @ Goreesponding API Gravity at" F. 6 56 Tempers23 TABLE 2 (ASTM TABLE 5) REDUCTION OF OBSERVED API GRAVITY TO API AT 60°F INSPECTION OF PETROLEUM R) |a8ad8 added Sade ddaea danas aaase aseas Senas g 7 Basen Sanda saesd danad Sadad Sadna Raaae a z|"|,|58888 Saas Seeaa Sanaa Gada Ragas Randa KaaAd 5 EL |B |eeene caren auceq quane ease ansee euora © el*le|sanae sada dedes aadea sande BREE z elalilseuse aares eases oxnne ennne Sete fete ieee te Elf |S |dande aaian dadde Renan Eeeen BRASS Gdde AAaSa 3 ick ayy Seem iaeeal eutoetedaen eeitateetcctacadidts af" |e BERS RUGS RARKS RSSSR RSRS8 gkdsa assan 5 Elle Sereutsl soebeteieesta tant Peseglegtesiacatnts é|F le ARERR SAKAI SHRAS AeSKS RASAA S888 HANS & EI) _|8|neons winsy esse annes qaene = a Saaan Sa SSRs 8 he BRASS 8) |dedda Bese [ennne RRANS Raha esses Sees & 6e*FISHER/TAG MANUAL 4 TABLE 2 (ASTM TABLE 5) REDUCTION OF OBSERVED API GRAVITY TO API AT 60°F served Temperature API Gravity ae 08 s[*[s]=> [7 "1s RERRE aaa RESES RRR Aaee Sates SRNNs RSSGS RSSSa aaead ReeRs add aasas SSG88 ARSE AKERS RESSS BRERE SEH85 RRESS daa) aiddad aasda Wea ae: Baad Gaaaa danas asaes RERSS SSSES SSSee SRES8 HH0Gn 2 Raaeg REAAS Read sade Corresponding API Gravity at 0" Fr Hdsed died saseg added aadda Adddd shaded Gdane e48d5 danse aGaaq SU432 $593 ®| Jaana ddada Seade Anead Saeed Aaeee Sadds G28d3 SoSsE aaaae RAGRA RASSSINSPECTION OF PETROLEUM TABLE 2 (ASTM TABLE 5) REDUCTION OF OBSERVED API GRAVITY TO API AT 60°F ‘API Gravity at Observed Temperature =T=[2[s Observed Tempers m9 ®| |aeaee RSsex Kaede Hdsdd ddad4 33522 | SHARE HARES Hasan Zaade setae Saete | SSSSS AAASA ARNE Kaas B al? Gaean noone S 7 RSME ddl a Eleasss cueza cones nneon | nlS)agdsa Gdadd sadad dance fl eaisas hana caae a *)2|Saaaa dasa ddede 5 & oe 110 waFISHER/TAG MANUAL TABLE 2 (ASTM TABLE 5) REDUCTION OF OBSERVED API GRAVITY TO API AT 60°F * 39503 HONG 90592 ZGEIS ISTSE Heeg sets wwesh 3 Heli ee ee i E]_|8| sess] eaenn carco aasce qnneq nenen qaaee 8) |aaae anda Beans BeESS adaaa nada saad aaaad Observed Ten BARAK29 INSPECTION OF PETROLEUM TABLE 2 (ASTM TABLE 5) REDUCTION OF OBSERVED API GRAVITY TO API AT 60°F 8| |saded daaad seudd aadae sadan Bem eo Gea ddsae | |fig2d added sachs Sesch HISER Sass Sasae satan dies |5|_|S8588 SEESS Seses Sess sess Baaas Bases 2 3 |---— — — i ai |Sese8 S28d¢ gade9 Seeaa gadas 33383 33888 dasaa lt elec (eee ees | |F|s| sande daadd asses saad avasa sedge gussa Hasse Bl _|2|caeus cance coomn sears aanze aaeyn eaaia quae eaens ¢|*|glasass desde ddseu saudd Gade Haale Sadad dadas S3cds Bal S a 2; | ilseeee seess cone SSS Gauge GED SORE TE So §|*?|3| ssees eases sdasa sigs sideisist Ee dade a88e8 BPS) ens eencs conan sees mace wnada canes weaes 2 a) |Sases Sasa sede S825 casas Sisida BARAa RRNA S a| |Saesd E3838 Sedes deasa aasas 3 i ARRAe HRERR S| |saase sassa saaak ( #8888 SHSS5 RNRAS 5 lite SURGE BAESS SSVTI VSSBS RENN RANKL SBVVT BAAS RaTAT VeeRE gs de®FISHER/TAG MANUAL TABLE 2 (ASTM TABLE 5) *| |auded daava Saade asese a a) |dusae 33323 33833 aaesa 3 g|°|,.|#8388 adaed daade agses 8 Elj]2|sseea wacen Gance ances 7 ee i 31g aadda dase z alle perenl sass 3 =f*]2, aa888 ARRAS & Fale t : sated aanke dane & 7 EEE ERRRE BREEN RERSE 8 al eaae nase ane oaune 4 5 adaaa BGuRA REeeS Reaed 2 3) |aeaaa Hanae SRSae saad Aaaid RAaae a 8 Raasa Se284 3 REDUCTION OF OBSERVED API GRAVITY TO API AT 60°F Observed Tempers 30 S222% Sense sINSPECTION OF PETROLEUM TABLE 2 (ASTM TABLE 5) REDUCTION OF OBSERVED API GRAVITY TO API AT 60°F “API Gravity at Observed Temperature RRARA A aaada & RERER 5 BERER 8 RARER 8 Raat ‘Corresponding API Gravity at @”FISHER/TAG MANUAL TABLE 2 (ASTM TABLE 5) REDUCTION OF OBSERVED API GRAVITY TO API AT 60°F z aguas s8ads dada gages Gadde Saaes s aasss ssid deddd aedse aades sesso 7 Siaas Sigse Seeee Seeae Sees 5 peaches bsaahinabhbmenahiamnaiil : scene negeq sagen enees nqqaa queaa : SSSSS sess sees esses Seeey Seoey & Jenray waaey equa gqaen mune quges neuen nose waoae waan o z SESGS Sasze seas? edoge Gages egese Seuss House Geese GGess § : é Pere Secon ieata casey Sada nnen; aacey o 3 aaa seceg Seuee Sees Sdee0 9998 gag? ¢ : waane gqeng gians ogamn eacnn sagan nagee maces § peer) seede g3s93 S9gee $2999 99993 F3G3 92992 g mies euest gaeza gang squu- come agua Gouna aacen wang Beuus Saeed eeede Seged giseg S9us FGI WSs9 58389 sg9ga 5) |seese gegee seees 33993 33979 Sede Go7sg geSy FSIag JagIs ¢ S| [Sess 33999 Giee9 99999 odes 30968 699g JIE EEE. te FEE |ovees wseee esoas sens acana nanan aguas oanms estes ose: 2 e3 TABLE 2 (ASTM TABLE 5) S| |sges3 assy Sosee f geeee Sa399 3 3] |sgagg 5 Seges Geese see 3 B) [Besse Coees Sess esse segue S5999 908s HIE HEE Jozae § s]s|Seee Jssee 29059 9999 Jeary THEI F299 98088 Feesd Geass § 8/g)sase3 39999 S983 FIIs Fees 98889 Seea8 3833 3 FSIS Yevee Fee0e geese geees sede geeds sazee 3 geese gees seesd sesee seesy sed: sega 8 ‘API Gravity at Observed Temperature Corresponding API Gravity at @" F REDUCTION OF OBSERVED API GRAVITY TO API AT 60°F INSPECTION OF PETROLEUM Sedee Ueecs Sasce 29989 I2S8e seege 3 sosse J5G30 Ieeed So88e seeee aasae saaaa 3 a9e3¢ Sales added Gases Jenes Hoses f sanas sos9s pases §FISHER/TAG MANUAL 34 TABLE 2 (ASTM TABLE 5) REDUCTION OF OBSERVED API GRAVITY TO API AT 60°F ‘API Graviey at Observed Temperature o Tee a4 o | 8 | 97 | 06 RSBBE BSBSS BEGGS Eosee Seas Sasse 2 Corresponding API Gravity at OF. send gaaas 3 Ssee8 Buees Eaudd daasa dees 5 Sage Sans 34438 gasaa dade 3 Observed Tempers cs RSE S995 wanae it a Pt us ie Re ie 0 18038 ‘API Gravity at Observed Temperature TABLE 2 (ASTM TABLE 5) Heed Soees Sessa G8das Sedan daads Aaase Bassa Bidad gages f $9998 AUA8S Sseke asads desea BSSES BBRAB OB s seaae Sdadn Guose Gueee Soses Sadad adage 2 aaaaa Sahbs BSSa8 Saeed dasse faded gages 2 & EBEEE Baas Based daddd 2ogaa Gages S3a9a 2 3] 3] ssse3 sasaa sddaa sagea 3 i 3aagd 8 mT Dies aan ae 84388 a4dea Sagas & i mi ey eaace @ 3 Biase $3833 Saads 8 3) la S8a08 Gaead Badass Hadas ASMA Hasdd dada aacda eeed 2 s ddgia Hadad Haass Saasa aeasa dadad 33328 gasses Saeed f REDUCTION OF OBSERVED API GRAVITY TO API AT 60°F Observed Temper= INSPECTION OF PETROLEUM "88885 S292 32s3s ssz0 eeead FISHER/TAG MANUAL 36 TABLE 2 (ASTM TABLE 5) s g | Geugs 333s2 Zedue GUase Yoeie Bucss Gesge Eseee seses = Ggene aeane anene quoom necen qaane wanda enoay qqaea < | ,| 83888 dagde essed Geese FHS Sesas desde Siass sasse ° gfe |——____-_- — 2 a eteaeiat lel cla ataledyfertelntct tele enelat—tatea telnet alates = g|3udee ddes2 cigco Lusad sagde sadas desea adawe danse Se Fl oantecudaae chu dan=oeuce=hvaze-otlew-desonjuvere- nade 3 1[S)6|ges23 ees gaia gases Sages ounce Snes 6 HE 7 PE |eaeee caaes Seeee) sansa mies aadaajeeaeaiauaen- eases = 3|*|g|ssada ddsee Saas 39490 Suuss dsase asia Gada3 i tH? nn 2 gl glsssas ceace azace eaues ages eness ecees evaqa noeen onrqy 2 8 a Ja] E] assess asaas 30999 SaGs SUS88 SESSS SANG Fas Gasaa 39999 3 f B}[8|oscas cones cence qooae * Sen iosane Sean 8 S| lagsdé guns Susus Seas BB9S8 BYSSS BASSS BaasA Gassd 3 5 mngae enges manee Keene seaan Gates seane ainns eaune arane oe 7 SS) |suans S888" $8934 44292 22445 34555 S289 Gagne ausas dds a 3 || eecee eae eieas legee See Soa eee 5 Bessa Gadus Faas aaaaa gagag-goaae 3 8 Eo, Jeune wonwe ennae a. 8 ERE: SEAR Manse RARIA AARAK oF7 INSPECTION OF PETROLEUM TABLE 2 (ASTM TABLE 5) REDUCTION OF OBSERVED API GRAVITY TO API AT 60°F [API Gravity at Observed Temperature Corresponding API Gravity at @® Fr s Saisie Sdads Goace Geaae aad Sa99a.9999 Gases S a asans Gohoe dadaa Sadea Sagal 33993 29939 99999 3 5 Baase sases Saaga Guida Sauai 33999 Gudea 99089 3 8 Saas dagag 22293 9003 adage dadag $8989 g6093 3 asad 3daad S8ada dadaa Sadaa desde S989 34003 3 {| |*]] 8333 saaua | ORS SES85 3G 8) flaaaae gases gaads dddde G2ded Gogg Sesad daded S683 $9583 2 | adade egg 83532 25283 S858 Saade dsaey 2289 29993 3983 | Saads 22083 Saa98 8939 g 3| |assa8 adage $3393 ace 3 Bxeea verse 2FISHER/TAG MANUAL 38 TABLE 2 (ASTM TABLE 5). . REDUCTION OF OBSERVED API GRAVITY TO API AT 60°F s ag 2/* assaa 3 Els aaae = f Bis aaae Bas a4 3 ba Renee ddeonias ae haabeantjeq ede aeecedddeaenn = SiS|sssss sasss {2 z ecaniestes s|*lglssee3 ceees EI13) crcoe cease cagee aueen cance ogee auzeg qasee notes ances © é|2 iF seges gees S99eu SUusS TeuSs Ueese seses Feeed sees sues F BT |$) ccooe aneas annie canne anes qeaen maaan a] [ses Sees SSSUS Saess Sages Saea Geese Veues Geis 3oss3 3 a] |Sfges $eese Jsgee soe Fesgg sages FILE F29Fe Soe93 gedss F a) |$9g93 29983 aegge 99999 FFI yee Godse iegee goses seeds 3 bebe Seek gases ae :37 INSPECTION OF PETROLEUM TABLE 2 (ASTM TABLE 5) REDUCTION OF OBSERVED API GRAVITY TO API AT 60°F Obuerved| S| JERERE ee822 E2825 SA822 ROUGE S82 SERRE ABUSE tages ateee x Se eee eee ee nenehen [| Beene Since ROGUS AREZE ZEIGE BERS Segee g ef Behar RREZE 2OG8% SARSS EREKE SEEES BSEE SEES BESTS SEES G El }8|eacon er2se anssy yeas fousy eres sange queue wesay casen i S/E/#88R8 GEER ABRRE GREE REESE peeed Peeee Seaee Sedea SELES E ' 2/8 |ae8e2 28382 ERSZ? Sense gees Suds S8d8s Eeeud TEESE B898e 3 5 3 z anne Geeed dese Saaae Goad ages GLEE Ces HI] SESS dls | feeds Redea dedes Gada EGE SOLES 39889 S898 HE GGT *la]" sages 28339 ase BeeEs esas ages? Gouge 38292 IGE 3] Jegeds a883e 28583 $8889 39999 899 HGGS G88S2 Sees ebbee Sees 29992 29099 39999 39900 Wage S8588 ease comes werme Sonne BERS RAARS AARRR sahas HabRR SSSesFISHER/TAG MANUAL TABLE 2 (ASTM TABLE 5) REDUCTION OF OBSERVED API GRAVITY TO API.AT 60°F 40. anes Seded Saded Gaede codes Esess S6S89 SSIS gasa3 desis 3 Ssea8 Sudas G8aEs CEGE3 Bass 9999 39952 T3053 aigad 23983 3 : Saeee Seces ¥88e3 Bases 33533 seeds dagde Gadad § ; 7 eee ils[S]snege gegez gosee gazes sears aeaue esque gece Golan bebe. E[2]s] sees s28ss $2999 88983 W3E2 FG5 BIGGS Sante esae3 38cdd 3 Slalflssceg seuss sence ease cass Ge Senge eners « F[P}s|sseee 28898 Seceu 22822 S8eea 3229 2aG09 TENE Eeese epee c 8); |2 [cases wares conga cease Gn Saneq qnang wucur s| a [|g] eedss 22283 S2dad 3odea adddd Sale Besss ssess ssses Edg24 § ate) eee = ia Elel/sz225 ge53 goag2 gone coere qneen angen cease while canes él? i 850s auasd Beey dees Secs Eased Ssdes Sanaa e939 BELG? Z BT |8| on enany Guaes saves enean quoae nesae cease wong, eonos s 8358S BUSES Sssce sovse esses SSES88 Ssass iaeag geseg 85668 & 3) [88823 £8855 Seeds 34989 S289 95924 U2E9 GEIGS Sete cages 3 8] [Sssee sade Saeay 39538 S083 38982 3 Hee Gee : gfe [ssnaz aguas sszes ages B50Bz esses g ae4 INSPECTION OF PETROLEUM TABLE 2 (ASTM TABLE 5) REDUCTION OF OBSERVED API GRAVITY TO API AT 60°F 3| lagaas Geass desde ddcce Jédce ceese dedde diss dadaa 8 gdeae ddees sedee esaas 888s Sagas Seade e|° 8889s SaSse Fags SAsee SeaSS ASaES Hous Gases s EL ye [ES penne E|_|s|senee ecane genes cagce agens angen eneer qaoee neeen quane © E $)5|dddee sessed sage saa AAS SHARE BSESS BUSES S8sss Besa 3 ect le ehhh deel 3[2|§|sgess sess ssa9% sade Sssés dudag aagaa 3 al |Elescss sense ugaes eaces cease So00 Gang) GEESE GESSE EEG g{3|#] s9s88 daad¢ sagcs coscs Sbses SSsee S8a4d Basss adass Basse 3 ia oe sib aibheed F]]8|casca enone canes nense scene neaeg guess neete tgees Guess 2 §|?|2)s8aa5 sonss Bouse Sess@ Sasa Yo2ga Bases Baass SanaR Haass oF E Ur |S |ommse paced Saaca! unease snaoal scene] annsel eahea] onese [onan |e = BbGB SSSS8 SSRSR BWIA BSASS BHsS2 BABES SAGER Bases asada S 3] [sasas seats Saude daaas asae8 aaa sande soada gases S363 s| |gdad daage Seaas gaged dauga Gadda Se388 edad danas Geass Eife |esas sgas ecee E522 ASHRA AANAR A925 AARMS S¥TeE BeeEE B oeFISHER/TAG MANUAL 2 TABLE 2 (ASTM TABLE 5) REDUCTION OF OBSERVED API GRAVITY TO API AT 60°F S| [seaaa adsce uuusd dagg9 2992 G2I92 g98ce B2008 $8oR = seees i2asd 39099 Geasd 22229 L393 isee5 = Saada agaed 3oad7 25205 adda Goede 3 geee2 sees sence neane aneza saaee 3 Baued Gages Zadis gases secee 288 z eanes rqqse ere eeany anes g aiad Be@S SHREE APRA ERE RS SARL g/88a80 oaas2 29222 382d aR882 SEES EASE GIRS cepts 2 acted danzelh aaa o. pees aee chads et (88822 Seeks F2en3 BERGE ECRES SERRE SORA S8e gees eees eee EEESS REERE Brae43 INSPECTION OF PETROLEUM TABLE 2 (ASTM TABLE 5) REDUCTION OF OBSERVED API GRAVITY TO API AT 60°F 4 Sagar Reece Ree SEES E8888 Reena -heee # Rl laseae gece Sccee Rees ee8es Saks Feeee Reese # 2/* | .Jeeeee ReSee ainde Fees Sees PRRRR aRES ReEES S Bt: _— a aaneaiinin £] |B) erene eeces erage quate comes saseq nace. e E[SJH[REERE fee RSs Eeeee Eecen pees Eeens Reese RRRRE e EL bj———___ ss EE BEE Beene eee — S Flemnce meres canes macen ecane wo OTR HEMRY HANOD REMMA nea + Elf |S|eerer Besse eeeez Fized ehee Beene AELEE TESS RRRER Seees aE looses queen qugce qutia aasee woasa ceose a = |*]z/ Sees RERRE RARER Heeee SEEEE 2eeas Esdde 3 I + as ge i FRERE feeee SRee Besse Ssess Eseee Saeco E ey 6 ner97 gang: ageen eyeay genes ences eanny mugs macau Oo fe RARER REERE FoRRE RESRE S8aes Sede Beess Cosee Leese = ia RRREe Hears ahees Edded sags Gdace gece Gases 3eaes F S| |eecce Betas eedee aaeas adda GECGe Cosas 88299 Boag 2asa2 SsaGs BEERS Sstaz BesEs ecKE LENKA RutUE BARBS sceea eeneRFISHER/TAG MANUAL ‘APL Gravity ae Obeer Fomperui TABLE 2 (ASTM TABLE 5) \ & RAGAN ARRAS KReEe RRRRA RARSS SSSSS BGHSS S4885 Busses ssses SF ®| |Recse cece Becee Reese Seees eves Sessa saedd 3 s| |Se288 22888 edege Seeea sass e565 Gouge g288e Sasa Beads 2 | pecebnabnad area bedded deen | tame pebbnUacka at hl aed dadad Rl ge/ Ress SSSS3 SS8sS GEES LESS ESSSES SSSSB 32392 BS25E ssssz z e/§)3ede2 22238 goede Gece 298e3 $2983 See89 22292 Ge L938 S |-|Elacsze enone casey cages Gace; Gases yeety esse oruee canes = Rlglagess Sosss Lessa sass sees Yedes Zzae2 Zzgea edges Bdes a Fro) § | Seen oboe had ed nde biclerte iaet ele Gin Doh ce tea ola Rg) seeds Sesed Sees dugde uses Z2gea sesed Yesde Sadsa daged emit oaonel taee ler dan-clewt-fetenei--Gaun Gen Dloteet Thddta«! & S88SS $3883 BUSS VF32F SIERE SSSA BBSSS Besds ssssa ascsz zs Baag8 desde Sdase tedds Bseuu Heese Yeses zacce Sesas a3 5 ®| |ggasa 38a suaea seeed Sdscs Gesas Ssess sssed Geass © REDUCTION OF OBSERVED API GRAVITY TO API AT 60°Fa INSPECTION OF PETROLEUM TABLE 2 (ASTM TABLE 5) REDUCTION OF OBSERVED API GRAVITY TO API AT 60°F s Sidea dsasa Souss Geese Bedds deses decas decade 2223S 8 $3538 sages asses sease & el*].: Seese GsGes Sdcce Saeea Sasaa Z #/ [2 zqoee aoa neren exqee canna 1 Bl8 ls SEESS SSRT SESS BAAS aeeES slolé pene per ae ee rerenais El*|6 SaSSe RESSI BABES FaeeE GEEES F gle alle Seneghnaeagiwnauasonsaecaeedee 2]? |z S8228 QAEER HEREE BEEES Basaa 9 23 —— — 51? /2 Seded Gauss baded ers aaner seane Bee BERS SHASS = Saega B2de9 Gudea Reeae Sae0d Bede Ruuee dedee Gaasd Geeta Seaas Be. [ene 7 7 es33 BEE: [ernee memes AUR RABAS BARBS FETT BEETS F aeFISHER/TAG MANUAL 4 TABLE 2 (ASTM TABLE 5} REDUCTION OF OBSERVED API GRAVITY TO API AT 60°F aiuus Uesds dsead Gages Zezas aaaid 208d aund a0aia S290 wlada Guaid a20E2 2 $9523 29932 32399 22933 Begg S222 age gasgg Gaded daddy 23233 29384 lage gacde aidda Sdeee feeee Sagad Sdede aiees #ae88 @ Saas Zaaee Beeee SSEKE ‘API Gravity at Observed Temperature aa822 BBace SgRee REFEE seeds SHAVE BAS szesz ‘Observed ‘Temper yr wanes47 INSPECTION OF PETROLEUM TABLE 2 (ASTM TABLE 5) REDUCTION OF OBSERVED AP! GRAVITY TO API AT 60°F ‘API Gravity at Observed Temperature Corresponding API Gravity at OF, 3idae B888e 747 m9 RERER u SSSS€ SERRE HERE Skee RRKRE RRRRE BREE BRREE Seeee FREER RRRER RRERE RERRE 88382 SSes gases geues BBRRE GENRE RSERS ERASE MARSR BASAE BABAR szsss veoss gF FISHER/TAG MANUAL ma} S888 esas seeae ‘API Gravity at Observed Temperavure Corsesponulng API Gravity Bt OP Fr TABLE 2 (ASTM TABLE 5) saga Sess Bese Besee aaeed S S888 Seeee ee BEERS 32333 See88 gM REDUCTION OF OBSERVED API GRAVITY TO API AT "ee ature RARAS RARAR 4“ Odrerved Tempers Banas wanaR sg 219 | 95.0 sesaa soa3 0.9 29 19 i«> [= | S888 SHSSS ESSSS SRESS Ekess SszEa sages BLASS BEES BSERE SEEEE SRE KIsS Bssss Sesee ESAS Sodas saRsR m4 | 13 SSSSS SSSSS SESE SSIES Sesas ssses esses Massa cases 25 SE555 Sees BSS85 SORRR ESTAS Gidda sasse sdaes 88.6 8 S8szs Sessa SEE8E SALTA Sadss Ssksk Skass asaes gages ert ‘API Gravity at Observed Temperatare TABLE 2 (ASTM TABLE 5) Corresponding API Gravity at 0” Fr ats ps oy BSaEa SSS Soke _Ba8ae Baase sagan Baga ieeea B : Sas8e See83 Beaee dsaEs Shoes 85.8 88882 BRIE BEAEE S5oss $2883 S868 Eabuy Subse Bases awed sass Ho | 89 REDUCTION OF OBSERVED API GRAVITY TO API AT 60°F INSPECTION OF PETROLEUM suas Gaede Saaes Ganda daase Souda auada 3 a te Hie SEGQT BRBSS STITT VSOSS REMKE KREKK SaBsF BESS RssST geese = aesFISHER/TAG MANUAL ‘Gravity at Observed Temperature Corresponding API Gravity at @ F. APL TABLE 2 (ASTM TABLE 5) S888 BEG82 Bizss Bocas Bease 8 82888 94333 dad02 goaas #2924 dagaa dadaa gage Beeed gage Saaaa adage Oia gocee BSS8S BGS MHdes aida susea Saeed B2289 Baass Bese sases ausas diged gaaee Oaees BSesa S493 Wass Hive sodas eaese ssere AAeLR RRA e aeuae gaged added ddddd seas aseie eases keeee a sdudd Gadde adidas cadda Sages deeee eeeee eee cee: Feees & REDUCTION OF OBSERVED API GRAVITY TO API AT 60°F Tempers 50INSPECTION OF PETROLEUM 51 TABLE 2 (ASTM TABLE 5) REDUCTION OF OBSERVED API GRAVITY TO API AT 60°F ae B sasss sages sese8 BUNWE SERRR cages ears BR8RR LESS SETER TASTE BIR 8 88888 eRERe Seeee Ease sRRsR 2 seem BEeEs SEsss sesee eeess & EDRs! SzsRR aRERE BEER BE:6a FISHER/TAG MANUAL TABLE 5 (ASTM TABLE 7) REDUCTION OF VOLUME TO 60°F AGAINST API GRAVITY: AT 60°F ( Abridged Table } This table gives the factors for converting oil volumes observed at temperatures other than 60°F to the correrponding volumes at 60°F for renges of values of API gravity at 60°F. This table has been set up in eight ranges of API gravity as follows: (Group Nev BPI Eraity UO Oto 149 ideo 349 50 to 509 iD to 629 10 to 78) 70 to B88 500 to 930 940 t9 1000 All blonde of gaecline and benzene are ransidaved to fall in Crown Az wehon the presence cof benzene is watertaia, the oil shall be elassifed ia Group 9 if the gravity ia numerically fee than SLO*ADE and the 30” per ceat distilation recovery point is les than 203° F. It is very important to note that the Group classification of the oil is determined by its API gravity at GO°F, Large errors (up to 0.5 per cent) may arise if the gravity at the oheerved temperature is used to determine the Group, because this error may ylaée the oil in the wrong Group. ‘This table must be entered with APE gravity ut OOF, If the APT gravity is Kavown only at the observed temperature, the APE gravity at 60%F must rst be found from Tuble 2 (ASTM Table 3). EXAMPLE What i the volume at 60°F of 8000 U.S. gellons of oil measured at 90°F when the gravity of the oil is 61,15°API at 60°F? rom tho table above, note that an oil haviag an APT gravity ale tn table Forth tomers nga FRE a in The column for Gronp 3 nove that factor opposite 90°F is, 08818 ‘Thea, the oil having a volume of 9000 U.S. gallons at 90°F Tas a volume ov OPE of S000 % OBIS or-.-~ 7854 US, gallons Group 3INSPECTION OF PETROLEUM TABLE 5 (ASTM TABLE 7) REDUCTION OF VOLUME TO 60°F AGAINST 0-100° API API GRAVITY AT 60°F (Abridged) ASTM—IP oF ‘Group Number and API Gravity Range at oo" iP © | Group | | Group 2| Group 3] Group 4] Group § | Group 6] Group? 35688 33088 S2358 $8088 25089 ed 52823 #ug8 SENG NEG CGtRE Same HERE E aG88E 52588 83538 9288 seaed HEE ox oi is i 2.0080 a58d8 eueE Factor for Reducing Volume 10 0° F E8GsE SESE HG E wASES S2822 SSS NEE GUEEE SEEEE 5g882 BSEE Hi: ‘Observed | Grou RARRAS802 28888 GEESE 2285 S285 92312 RRERS HGSEE 8 ASTM—IP ERE SE858 EHE08 E6222 EES 2 iy Range a Fe FISHER/TAG MANUAL ERIS Rise 22008 Tor Reducing Volume to SERUE isd 82802 Hea 2288 $883 TABLE 5 (ASTM TABLE 7) REDUCTION OF VOLUME TO 60°F AGAINST ip 1 | Grou 2] Group 3 | Group «| Group $| Group ¢| Group? API GRAVITY AT 60°F (Abridged) (Group Number ond API ERSaE Engg? EEG S008 Hgs 22088 $55 age a al a2 8 Observed | Group 0] Grou Tempers 0-100° API sa-to0" P. 70 33393 RERRS RARER SERRE SEER0-100" API 10-156" TABLE 5 (ASTM TABLE 7) REDUCTION OF VOLUME TO 60°F AGAINST API GRAVITY AT 60°F (Abridged) INSPECTION OF PETROLEUM ASTM—IP ie J20ug HENGE Saag aamte eguyg tag lie iifsd HUES He ON HENOE Em ills oo Pd oe Be iNT 00H REE HHEeE SONNE Wate elesle G05: HONE Suet TOS REE aE Sts 1 Wit. i tor rs Ties] (Beg sea eee ues eee i els, ‘FI 0.0089 _ 7 Observed | Grout Temper=ASTM—IP GGEHE E9290 GUSEE EEESE EgGg2 EGE0E & x 2 Zz < = © < = x a TABLE 5 (ASTM TABLE 71 API GRAVITY AT 60°F (Abridged) DUCTION OF VOLUME TO 60°F AGAINST 0-63.9° API 150280" F. Ed é Fa é le Sddss seces caasé acces ccoes B Escds Gesds & s/f [is |#s]suzug segs nuns tGead outa g2tzs suney (uaa HetzE HiSLE |B S858 58558 GREE B8000 BSses Scces ceces socce 53) | 25]8 | 93988 98888 5888 E\32|8 |S8ee8 S555 S8eee aEEbs anRRR RARER RARAR Ee ze. " 2055: 428 Bags! ee EE BBSSS S38e5 S2sce S Re] elge |e |85e98 Oboe! g 80888 25288 G0508 2 lee [fs] eeee= sees SSES S2088 25282 3) ge)a[é. ne: ages eeses segg2 2cb: 23) 8|35|5°)E898e S88ss B839% 52399 2eg88 2 EE]EIER]E |eseee sees S2588 58208 22508 5 |i|bs]* )28888 GSENE 28eee 2a0G Goaea 30889 SSR8Y 28803 80384 8 é Saags buses seas Sages Sees SECS a8gee S2Ec5 Sods © é a3 Qauae Sense BERR RINSPECTION OF PETRO TABLE 5 (ASTM TABLE 7) REDUCTION OF VOLUME TO 60°F AGAINST, 0-34.9° API oso F. API GRAVITY AT 60°F (Abridged) ASTM—IP 20582 32055 $2089 22229 @ abs 20889 BREE ECEEZ Dy 0.5724 a REEL 3983 $0903 SIGE GER aidg Bokca SaGS% HANES $SS9% 28895 & SERS EERRE SHS98 RANTS RESEE BEERE 8 HSGES EES0E 22888 E8555 3! BEGG HOZEE EEG0E 22022 Seu E2588 & y EERE GESEE Y 22 E8288 0.9924 82883 28888 E5883 835938 3 Factor for Red ling Vetus sate BaBHE SOEGE E58 SEER 2582 OUEYE QBRER EOEER 8 RHAAR HARHR BASRS BERRA KERR: i RARRE RARAR RBRAR RRRRE RARER 24 FISHER/TAG MANUAL (EEC E EEE ELE EE ee See AS MANUAL TABLE 5 (ASTM TABLE 7) REDUCTION OF VOLUME TO 60°F AGAINST API GRAVITY AT 60°F (Abridged) 0-34.9° API ASTMAIP od oop Number [Sigg Nombarand abi Grater Rane SPT Graviey Range wr ue cma srvea {Group 0] Groopt ‘Temper- Tempore} oe sae SR Toes [soar # Br” | PAR | har Factor for Regus [Factor for Redec-| | Factor for Regus” bea vohuwe toe lnevelume eee hn Voturne toe, 0.86 | oz 088 | 0.0m 0880 | ot oe | Seat eee | 3a See | OSE oSh | ost Sie | oe Soe | Sere osm | Sane ose | oe 388 | fev EB | GEE 388 | 38 SES | SEE ass | oxo | we | os | ossas oer | ote fae | oem | ih | BHR | os Re | oet de | Sem | da | sta | Ose oat | oS dase | oats | 28 | Oster | San Saas | See OSS | RR | 2 | Sir | St S88 | Best ose | ose | ws | osm | oer osu | our 0.8529 | 0.8686, 446 | (O.8TIB | 0.8564 0.8508 | 0.844 Ose | Ose |e | SHE | ee Sees | 8eae Sea | 8m | ae | oie | oe Sasa | Oecr oasis | oes |S | OR | OE Sie | OS gage | gam | ae | oem | oss | ass | cess | occ GS | $88 | Gt | Sam | Oe | Se | Sams | Seu Sasi | Sas | ie | Bm | oak | ae | Sas | 885 : Sie | oar | Gs | fem | Oa | ae | Seer | ous pas | 0385 | St | okt | oes | ie | oss | See 2 | oso | oss | ass | oo | oa | ae | oss | osu S/S tee) tee gee) | See | oes ae | sit | ose | | ORS | ORE] Gs | os | Sees Se] om | ose |e | osm | oasis | ae | B88 | Sei es [oss | or | wo | osc | oss | as | ons | o.sne $e [osat | oa) i] OS | ORE | ae | 88s | ose am | ots | samo | 4a |] Shs | oR | Se | oes | Ose $8 | cates | cae | 12 | SEE | OER] Me | es | ose aR | come | ose | ik | ost | oS |e | Oa | ORS 2 | osm | ose | as | oss | ous | sw | oss | osm St | ose | Oe |e | ose | oa | Se] core | oie | | OSS | oie \ $8 | ose | oie |e | Ges | os | Sh] ost | ocsens | a | See | Ose ox _| oars | oom | ow | oso | osu |